DCS-Mirror
/
unfoldingWord_en_tn
mirror of https://git.door43.org/unfoldingWord/en_tn
2
0
Fork 0
Files Issues Releases Wiki Activity See in Reader

Converted from en_tn_56-2TI.tsv to tn_2TI.tsv 

Signed-off-by: unfoldingWord <info@unfoldingword.org>
This commit is contained in:
unfoldingWord 2022-12-16 21:29:07 +00:00
parent 4701dd2b66
commit 9aaa70c5b1
2 changed files with 344 additions and 344 deletions
Show Stats Download Patch File Download Diff File Expand all files Collapse all files

344
en_tn_56-2TI.tsv
View File

@ -1,344 +0,0 @@
Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote
2TI front intro s7fk 0 # Introduction to 2 Timothy<br><br>## Part 1: General Introduction<br><br>### Outline of the book of 2 Timothy<br><br>1. Paul greets Timothy and encourages him to endure hardship as he serves God (1:1–2:13).<br>2. Paul gives general instructions to Timothy (2:14–26).<br>3. Paul warns Timothy about future events and instructs him about how to carry out his service to God (3:1–4:8).<br>4. Paul makes personal remarks (4:9–22).<br><br>### Who wrote the book of 2 Timothy?<br><br>Paul wrote 2 Timothy. He was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.<br><br>This book is the second letter Paul wrote to Timothy. Timothy was his disciple and close friend. Paul wrote this letter while in prison in Rome. Paul would die soon after writing this letter.<br><br>### What is the book of 2 Timothy about?<br><br>Paul had left Timothy in the city of Ephesus to help the believers there. Paul wrote this letter to instruct Timothy about various matters. The topics he addressed include warnings about false teachers and advice about enduring difficult situations. This letter also shows how Paul was training Timothy to be a leader among the churches.<br><br>### How should the title of this book be translated?<br><br>Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “2 Timothy” or “Second Timothy.” Or they may choose a different title, such as “Paul’s Second Letter to Timothy” or “The Second Letter to Timothy.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])<br><br>## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts<br><br>### What is the soldier imagery in 2 Timothy?<br><br>As Paul waited in prison, knowing he would die soon, he spoke of being a soldier of Jesus Christ. Soldiers have to obey to their leaders. In the same way, Christians have to obey Jesus. As “soldiers” of Christ, believers are to obey his commands, even if they die as a result.<br><br>### What does it mean that God inspired Scripture?<br><br>God is the true author of Scripture. He inspired the human authors who wrote the books. That means God in some way caused the people to write what they wrote. This is why the Bible is also referred to as God’s word. This implies several things about it. First, everything that the Bible teaches is free from error and can be trusted. Second, God will always preserve his Scripture for every generation of people. Third, God’s word should be translated into all the world’s languages.<br><br>## Part 3: Important Translation Issues<br><br>### Singular and plural “you”<br><br>In this book, the word “I” refers to Paul. Here the word “you” is almost always singular and refers to Timothy. The exception to this is 4:22. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])<br><br>### Inclusive and exclusive “we” and “us”<br><br>In this book, “we” and “us” include the writer, Paul, the recipient, Timothy, and all believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])<br><br>### What did Paul mean by the expressions “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?<br><br>Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union between Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.<br><br>### What are the major textual issues in the text of the book of 2 Timothy?<br><br>For the following verses, the oldest Greek manuscripts differ from later Greek manuscripts. Modern translations may also differ depending on the Greek manuscript that they translate from. The ULT text translates the Greek from the oldest manuscripts, and puts the differences from later manuscripts in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible already exists in the general region, translators should consider following the decision in that translation. If not, translators are advised to follow the oldest Greek manuscripts as reflected in the ULT text.<br>* “Because of this, I was appointed a preacher, an apostle, and a teacher” (1:11). Some later manuscripts read, “Because of this, I was appointed a preacher, an apostle, and a teacher to the Gentiles.”<br>* “Warn them before God” (2:14). Some later manuscripts read, “Warn them before the Lord.”<br><br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
2TI 1 intro p5lf 0 # 2 Timothy 1 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Paul formally introduces this letter in verses 1–2. Writers often began letters in this way in the ancient Near East.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Spiritual children<br><br>Paul discipled Timothy as a Christian and a church leader. Paul may also have led him to believe in Christ. Therefore, Paul calls Timothy “beloved child.” So even though Paul was not Timothy’s father, Paul speaks of his relationship with Timothy as that of a father and son in a spiritual sense. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### Persecution<br><br>Paul was in prison when he wrote this letter. Paul encourages Timothy to be willing to suffer for the gospel.
2TI 1 1 ha4l Παῦλος 1 Paul This letter follows the normal custom of the time by beginning with the name and identity of the author, then mentioning the recipient (in verse 2). Your language may have a particular way of introducing the author of a letter. If so, you could use it in your translation. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, am writing this letter”
2TI 1 1 vl2g διὰ θελήματος Θεοῦ 1 through the will of God Paul became an apostle because God wanted him to be an apostle. Alternate translation: “because of God’s will” or “because God wanted it to be so”
2TI 1 1 e1lg κατ’ 1 according to This could mean: (1) God appointed Paul to tell others about the promise of life in Jesus. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of announcing” (2) Paul became an apostle because he himself received the promise of life in Jesus. Alternate translation: “as a result of receiving”
2TI 1 1 m9kv figs-metaphor ζωῆς τῆς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 of life that is in Christ Jesus Paul speaks of **life** as if it were an object inside of Jesus. This refers to the life people receive as a result of belonging to Christ Jesus. Alternate translation: “of the life that we receive as a result of belonging to Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TI 1 2 rp5u Τιμοθέῳ 1 to Timothy Your language may have a particular way of introducing the person who receives a letter. If so, you could use it in your translation. Alternate translation: “This letter is for you, Timothy”
2TI 1 2 ey7g figs-metaphor ἀγαπητῷ τέκνῳ 1 my beloved child Paul was not Timothy’s father, but he uses the term **child** to express his love and approval of Timothy. It is also likely that Paul introduced Timothy to Christ, and so Paul considered him his child in a spiritual sense. Alternate translation: “who is like a beloved son to me” or “you are like a dear child to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TI 1 2 w43q translate-blessing χάρις, ἔλεος, εἰρήνη, ἀπὸ 1 Grace, mercy, and peace from After stating the name of the author and the person who is receiving it (Timothy), Paul adds a blessing to Timothy. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing in your language. Alternate translation: “may you experience kindness, mercy, and peace within you from” or “I pray that you will have grace, mercy, and peace from” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
2TI 1 2 p003 figs-abstractnouns χάρις, ἔλεος, εἰρήνη 1 Grace, mercy, and peace Paul’s blessing to Timothy includes the three abstract nouns **Grace**, **mercy**, and **peace**. Your language may have a particular way of expressing these concepts, such as with verbs. If so, you could use them in your translation. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2TI 1 2 ub7c guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Θεοῦ Πατρὸς 1 God the Father **Father** is an important title for God. Here, **Father** could refer to: (1) the Father of Christ. (2) the Father of believers. Alternate translation: “God, who is the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
2TI 1 2 dcr3 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 our In this book, unless otherwise noted, the words **we**, **us**, and **our** refer to Paul (the writer of this letter), Timothy (the one to whom this letter is written), and, by extension, all believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
2TI 1 3 p004 figs-abstractnouns χάριν ἔχω τῷ Θεῷ 1 I have gratitude to God If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **gratitude** with a verb or an adjective. Alternate translation: “I thank God” or “I am thankful to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2TI 1 3 tvb7 figs-idiom ᾧ λατρεύω ἀπὸ προγόνων 1 whom I serve from my ancestors This is an idiom that means that Paul’s family has been serving God for many generations. Alternate translation: “whom my ancestors served and I serve, as well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2TI 1 3 ha9d figs-metaphor ἐν καθαρᾷ συνειδήσει 1 with a clean conscience Paul speaks of his **conscience** as if it could be physically **clean**. A person with a **clean conscience** does not feel guilty because he has always tried to do what was right. Alternate translation: “knowing I have tried my hardest to do what is right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TI 1 3 rz7s figs-abstractnouns ὡς ἀδιάλειπτον ἔχω τὴν περὶ σοῦ μνείαν 1 as I have constant remembrance of you Paul speaks of the action of remembering by using the abstract noun **remembrance**. Your language may have a particular way of expressing this concept, such as with a verb. If so, you could use it in your translation. Alternate translation: “as I think about you constantly in my prayers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2TI 1 3 p005 figs-yousingular σοῦ 1 you The word **you** is singular here and throughout the book, since Paul is addressing Timothy. A note will discuss the one exception in 4:22. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
2TI 1 3 pa6q figs-merism νυκτὸς καὶ ἡμέρας 1 night and day Here, **night and day** are used together to refer to all the time included in the night and the day. This means that Paul prays to God often, no matter what time it is. It does not mean that he prays all night and all day without ever stopping. Alternate translation: “at all times” Alternate translation: “always” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
2TI 1 4 p006 figs-explicit μεμνημένος σου τῶν δακρύων 1 remembering your tears It is implied that Paul is referring here to the time when Paul was leaving Timothy. If this is unclear, you could include this information. Alternate translation: “remembering how you cried when I left you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2TI 1 4 kk82 figs-metonymy σου τῶν δακρύων 1 your tears Here, **your tears** refers to the act of Timothy’s crying or being very sad. Alternate translation: “that you cried” or “your sadness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2TI 1 4 gu8c figs-metaphor χαρᾶς πληρωθῶ 1 I may be filled with joy Paul speaks of himself as if he were a container that could be **filled**. Alternate translation: “I may be very joyful” or “I may rejoice a lot” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TI 1 4 p007 figs-activepassive χαρᾶς πληρωθῶ 1 I may be filled with joy If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “joy may fill me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2TI 1 5 ayl4 figs-idiom ὑπόμνησιν λαβὼν 1 having received remembrance This is an idiom that simply means, “remembering.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2TI 1 5 buc3 figs-abstractnouns τῆς ἐν σοὶ ἀνυποκρίτου πίστεως 1 of the genuine faith in you Paul refers to Timothy’s **faith** with an abstract noun. Your language may have a particular way of expressing this concept, such as with a verb. If so, you could use it in your translation. Alternate translation: “that you genuinely believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2TI 1 5 p008 figs-metaphor τῆς ἐν σοὶ ἀνυποκρίτου πίστεως 1 of the genuine faith in you Paul speaks of **faith** as if it were an object inside of Timothy. Paul is referring to Timothy’s faith in God here, not to anyone’s faith in Timothy. Alternate translation: “your genuine faith” or “your faith that is genuine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TI 1 5 vgz2 figs-personification ἐν σοὶ ἀνυποκρίτου πίστεως, ἥτις ἐνῴκησεν πρῶτον ἐν τῇ μάμμῃ σου, Λωΐδι, καὶ τῇ μητρί σου, Εὐνίκῃ; πέπεισμαι δὲ ὅτι καὶ ἐν σοί 1 of … faith in you, which dwelt first in your grandmother Lois and your mother Eunice, and I am convinced that it is also in you Paul is speaking of their **faith** as if it were something that was alive and lived **in** each of them. Alternate translation: “of the genuine faith that you have. Lois, your grandmother, and then Eunice, your mother, had this faith in God, and now I am confident that you have this same genuine faith as well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
2TI 1 5 l8wc translate-names Λωΐδι 1 Lois **Lois** is the name of a woman, Timothy’s grandmother, who is probably his mother’s mother. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2TI 1 5 p009 translate-names Εὐνίκῃ 1 Eunice **Eunice** is the name of a woman, Timothy’s mother. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2TI 1 6 j58k δι’ ἣν αἰτίαν 1 for which reason Paul writes that the **reason** for asking Timothy to rekindle his gift is that he is confident of Timothy’s faith in Jesus. Alternate translation: “for this reason” or “because of your faith in Jesus”
2TI 1 6 h6eq figs-metaphor ἀναζωπυρεῖν τὸ χάρισμα 1 to rekindle the gift Paul speaks about Timothy’s need to start using his **gift** again as if he were restarting a fire. Alternate translation: “be eager once more to use the gift” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TI 1 6 i977 translate-symaction τὸ χάρισμα τοῦ Θεοῦ, ὅ ἐστιν ἐν σοὶ διὰ τῆς ἐπιθέσεως τῶν χειρῶν μου 1 the gift of God that is in you through the laying on of my hands Paul placed his **hands** on Timothy and prayed that God would give him power from God’s Spirit to enable him to do the work that God had called him to do. Then Timothy received the gift from the Holy Spirit. See how you translated this in 1 Tim 4:14. Alternate translation: “the gift of God that you received when I prayed for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
2TI 1 6 p010 figs-metaphor τὸ χάρισμα τοῦ Θεοῦ, ὅ ἐστιν ἐν σοὶ διὰ τῆς ἐπιθέσεως τῶν χειρῶν μου 1 the gift of God that is in you through the laying on of my hands Paul speaks of **the gift** as an object inside of Timothy. If the words **that is in you** do not clearly communicate in your language that Timothy received the gift, you could translate it with a verb that expressing the idea of giving or receiving. Alternate translation: “the gift of God that you received when I laid my hands on you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TI 1 6 s6vb figs-explicit τὸ χάρισμα τοῦ Θεοῦ, ὅ ἐστιν ἐν σοὶ διὰ τῆς ἐπιθέσεως τῶν χειρῶν μου 1 the gift of God that is in you through the laying on of my hands It is implied that this is a spiritual gift that enables Timothy to do the work of ministry that God has called him to do, and that Paul also prayed for Timothy as he laid his hands on him. If these things are not clear, you may want to include this information in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2TI 1 7 u8vl grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 For Here, **For** indicates that this verse provides another reason for Paul’s instruction in the previous verse that Timothy should use his spiritual gift. If it would be helpful in your language, you could replace **For** with this information here. Alternate translation: “Another reason why I want you to start using again the gift God that gave you is that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2TI 1 7 h1z3 οὐ & ἔδωκεν ἡμῖν ὁ Θεὸς πνεῦμα δειλίας, ἀλλὰ δυνάμεως, καὶ ἀγάπης, καὶ σωφρονισμοῦ 1 God did not give us a spirit of fear, but of power, and of love, and of discipline Here, **spirit** could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “God’s Holy Spirit does not cause us to be afraid. He causes us to have power and love and discipline” (2) the character of a human being. Alternate translation: “God does not cause us to be afraid but to have power and love and discipline”
2TI 1 7 p011 figs-abstractnouns δυνάμεως, καὶ ἀγάπης, καὶ σωφρονισμοῦ 1 of power, and of love, and of discipline Paul uses abstract nouns to refer to three things that Timothy should be able to do. Your language may have a particular way of expressing these concepts, such as with verbs. If so, you could use them in your translation. Alternate translation: “one that makes us able to obey, to love, and to control ourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2TI 1 7 k6g7 σωφρονισμοῦ 1 of discipline Here, **discipline** could refer to: (1) self-control. Alternate translation: “of the ability to control ourselves” (2) the power to correct or even to control others. Alternate translation: “of the ability to correct others”
2TI 1 8 fk9z figs-metonymy τὸ μαρτύριον 1 the testimony Paul may be using the word **testimony** to refer to the activity of telling others about the Lord and not to the message itself. Alternate translation: “of testifying” or “of telling others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2TI 1 8 blk9 τὸν δέσμιον αὐτοῦ 1 his prisoner Paul is not being held **prisoner** by the Lord. He is a prisoner because he has testified about the Lord. Alternate translation: “a prisoner for his sake” or “a prisoner for the Lord”
2TI 1 8 ry82 συνκακοπάθησον τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ 1 suffer together for the gospel The term **together** could mean: (1) Timothy should suffer together with Paul. (2) Timothy should suffer together with all Christians who suffer.
2TI 1 8 xa86 συνκακοπάθησον τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ 1 suffer together for the gospel Here, **for the gospel** means “for the sake of telling other people the good news about Jesus.” Alternate translation: “along with me, accept the suffering that results from telling other people the good news about Jesus”
2TI 1 8 hi9a τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ, κατὰ δύναμιν Θεοῦ 1 for the gospel, according to the power of God Paul is reminding Timothy that God provides people with **power** when they suffer so that they can endure the suffering. Alternate translation: “for the gospel, allowing God to make you strong”
2TI 1 9 ld55 figs-metonymy καλέσαντος κλήσει ἁγίᾳ 1 called us with a holy calling Here, **with a holy calling** could refer to: (1) what results from the calling. The call produces holy people or people set apart for God. Alternate translation: “called us with a calling that sets us apart as holy to God” (2) the source of the calling, which is God, who is holy. Alternate translation: “called us by means of his own holy calling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2TI 1 9 lmas οὐ κατὰ τὰ ἔργα ἡμῶν 1 not according to our works It may be helpful to start a new sentence here. If you do start a new sentence, for clarity you may wish to repeat some words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “He did not save us and call us because of our works”
2TI 1 9 kyr5 figs-hendiadys ἀλλὰ κατὰ ἰδίαν πρόθεσιν καὶ χάριν 1 but according to his own purpose and grace Here the words **purpose** and **grace** work together to mean “gracious purpose.” Paul is saying that God’s purpose or plan for us includes showing us grace or kindness through Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “but because of his gracious purpose” or “but because he planned to show us kindness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
2TI 1 9 p012 figs-activepassive καὶ χάριν, τὴν δοθεῖσαν ἡμῖν ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 and grace, which was given to us in Christ Jesus If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “and grace, which God gave to us in Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2TI 1 9 pq1z figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 in Christ Jesus Paul speaks of God’s **purpose and grace** or “gracious purpose” as if it were an object inside of **Christ Jesus**. This refers to God’s plan to save people that Jesus fulfilled. So when people begin a relationship with Jesus, then God saves them. Alternate translation: “through our relationship to Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TI 1 9 zq7m figs-idiom πρὸ χρόνων αἰωνίων 1 before eternal times This is an idiom that indicates that God decided to save through faith in Christ before time and the creation of the world. Alternate translation: “before time began” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2TI 1 10 h5e5 figs-metaphor φανερωθεῖσαν δὲ νῦν 1 and which now has been revealed Paul speaks of God’s gracious plan to save us as if it were an object that could be uncovered and shown to people through the arrival of Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “and which now people can know” or “and which now people can experience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TI 1 10 p013 figs-activepassive φανερωθεῖσαν δὲ νῦν 1 and which now has been revealed If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “which now God has revealed” or “which now God has allowed people to know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2TI 1 10 i3wl figs-metaphor φωτίσαντος δὲ ζωὴν καὶ ἀφθαρσίαν διὰ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου 1 and brought to light life and immortality through the gospel Paul refers to **life** and **immortality** as if they were objects that could be brought from darkness into light so that people could see them. He is speaking of revealing something or making it known to people. Alternate translation: “and revealed life and immortality through the gospel” or “and declared life and immortality through the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TI 1 10 a1n7 figs-hendiadys ζωὴν καὶ ἀφθαρσίαν 1 life and immortality Here, **life** and **immortality** are probably working together to mean “immortal life.” Alternate translation: “eternal life” or “incorruptible life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
2TI 1 11 tb9b figs-activepassive ἐτέθην ἐγὼ κῆρυξ 1 I was appointed a herald If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “God chose me to be a herald” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2TI 1 11 p014 translate-unknown κῆρυξ 1 a herald A **herald** is someone who is sent out to announce a message. If your language does not have a similar term and your readers would not know what a **herald** is, you can use a general expression. Alternate translation: “a messenger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2TI 1 11 p015 figs-metaphor κῆρυξ 1 a herald Paul compares himself to a **herald** because God has sent him out to announce the gospel message. Alternate translation: “a preacher” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TI 1 12 j37g δι’ ἣν αἰτίαν 1 for which reason Paul provides the **reason** for his suffering by referring back to his status as an apostle. Alternate translation: “because I am an apostle”
2TI 1 12 y8l4 figs-explicit καὶ ταῦτα πάσχω 1 I also suffer also these things Paul does not mention the specific **things** that he is **suffering**, but from the context of the letter, the implication is that he is referring to suffering as a prisoner. Alternate translation: “I also suffer as a prisoner” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2TI 1 12 td39 πέπεισμαι 1 I am certain Paul expresses that he is **certain** that God will make everything right in the end. Alternate translation: “I am sure”
2TI 1 12 p6pi figs-metaphor τὴν παραθήκην μου φυλάξαι 1 to guard my deposit Paul is using a metaphor of a person leaving something with another person who is supposed to protect it until he gives it back to the first person. The two people involved are Jesus and Paul, but it is not clear which one is holding the **deposit**. This could mean: (1) Paul is trusting Jesus to keep something safe that Paul has entrusted to Jesus. This could be Paul’s own life, or, more specifically, that Paul would remain faithful to Jesus all of his life. Alternate translation: “to keep me faithful to him” (2) Paul is trusting Jesus to preserve the good news that Jesus has deposited with Paul for Paul to preach. Alternate translation: “to help me keep preaching his message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TI 1 12 hhu5 figs-possession τὴν παραθήκην μου 1 my deposit The term **my** here conveys the idea that this **deposit** is associated with Paul in some way. The particular association depends on what we consider the deposit to be. This could mean: (1) the deposit is associated with Paul because it is Paul’s own life or Paul’s faith in Jesus. Alternate translation: “my faithfulness to him” (2) the deposit is associated with Paul because it is the gospel message that Paul preaches. Alternate translation: “the gospel message that he has entrusted to me to preach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2TI 1 12 qcu3 figs-explicit ἐκείνην τὴν ἡμέραν 1 that day This refers to the **day** when Jesus returns for judgment. Alternate translation: “the day of judgment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2TI 1 13 h1qd figs-metonymy ὑγιαινόντων λόγων 1 of the healthy words Paul wants Timothy to teach the things that he taught and thereby to follow his example. The expression **healthy words** means “the correct message” by association, since a healthy mind would recognize that the correct message was reasonable. Alternate translation: “of the correct message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2TI 1 13 p016 figs-metonymy λόγων 1 of … words Paul uses the term **words** to describe the expression in words of what Christians believe. Alternate translation: “of … message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2TI 1 13 p017 figs-abstractnouns ἐν πίστει καὶ ἀγάπῃ τῇ ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 in the faith and love that are in Christ Jesus Paul uses two abstract nouns, **faith** and **love**, to refer to actions that Timothy should do. Your language may have a particular way of expressing these concepts, such as with verbs. If so, you could use them in your translation. Alternate translation: “trusting in Christ Jesus and loving others because you belong to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2TI 1 13 b2ld ἐν πίστει καὶ ἀγάπῃ τῇ ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 in the faith and love that are in Christ Jesus Here, **love** could refer to: (1) the love that Timothy should show others. Alternate translation: “trusting in Christ Jesus and loving others because you belong to him” (2) the love that Timothy should show to God. Alternate translation: “trusting in Christ Jesus and loving him”
2TI 1 13 ix6w figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 in Christ Jesus Paul speaks of **faith** and **love** as if they were objects inside of **Christ Jesus**. This refers to the faith and love that Jesus enables us to have when we belong to him. See how you translated this phrase in 1:9. Alternate translation: “ours through our relationship to Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TI 1 14 i5g5 figs-explicit τὴν καλὴν παραθήκην 1 the good deposit Here, **the good deposit** refers to the gospel message that God has entrusted to Timothy to share with his people. Alternate translation: “the good message entrusted to you for God’s people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2TI 1 14 cb5q figs-explicit τὴν καλὴν παραθήκην φύλαξον 1 Guard the good deposit Timothy needs to be alert to protect the gospel message because people will oppose him and try to distort what he says and teaches, turning it into a different message. Alternate translation: “Protect the good deposit against those who will try to distort it” or “Because people will try to distort the gospel message, guard it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2TI 1 14 a3v2 διὰ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 through the Holy Spirit Here, **through** means “by means of” or “by the power of.” Alternate translation: “by means of the Holy Spirit” or “with the help of the Holy Spirit”
2TI 1 15 p018 figs-hyperbole πάντες οἱ ἐν τῇ Ἀσίᾳ 1 all who are in Asia The word **all** could mean: (1) “many, but not all” in the strict sense, since Timothy and Onesiphorus did not turn away from him. So this would be an example of hyperbole. (2) the men who came to Rome with him from Asia Minor. Alternate translation: “all who came with me from Asia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2TI 1 15 p6f4 figs-metaphor ἀπεστράφησάν με 1 turned away from me This is a metaphor that means they left Paul and stopped helping him. Alternate translation: “have deserted me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TI 1 15 p020 figs-explicit ἀπεστράφησάν με 1 turned away from me Paul assumes that Timothy would know that the reason that the believers from Asia had abandoned him was because the authorities had put him in prison. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “have deserted me because I am in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2TI 1 15 x6cc translate-names Φύγελος & Ἑρμογένης 1 Phygelus **Phygelus** and **Hermogenes** are the names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2TI 1 16 izk9 translate-blessing δῴη ἔλεος ὁ Κύριος τῷ Ὀνησιφόρου οἴκῳ 1 May the Lord grant mercy to the household of Onesiphorus Paul is asking God to bless the family of **Onesiphorus**. You can express this as either a blessing or a prayer, in whichever way is more natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I pray that the Lord will be kind to the family of Onesiphorus” or “May the Lord bless the family of Onesiphorus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
2TI 1 16 e6hl translate-names Ὀνησιφόρου 1 of Onesiphorus **Onesiphorus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2TI 1 16 zz44 figs-metonymy τῷ Ὀνησιφόρου οἴκῳ 1 to the household of Onesiphorus The word **household** refers to **Onesiphorus** and to all the people in his family, possibly even his servants. Alternate translation: “to Onesiphorus and everyone who lives with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2TI 1 16 td1q figs-metonymy τὴν ἅλυσίν μου οὐκ ἐπησχύνθη 1 was not ashamed of my chain The word **chain** refers to being in prison. Onesiphorus was not ashamed that Paul was in prison but came to visit him frequently. Alternate translation: “was not ashamed of my imprisonment” or “was not ashamed of my being in prison” or “was not ashamed of me, even though I was in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2TI 1 17 xfg1 grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλὰ 1 but Here, **but** indicates a contrast between the previous verse and this verse. Instead of being ashamed that Paul was in prison, Onesiphorus searched for Paul and found him there. Use whatever form is most natural in your language to show this contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
2TI 1 18 p3di translate-blessing δῴη αὐτῷ ὁ Κύριος, εὑρεῖν ἔλεος παρὰ Κυρίου 1 May the Lord grant to him to find mercy from the Lord Paul is again asking for the Lord to **grant mercy** to Onesiphorus. You can express this as either a blessing or a prayer, in whichever way is more natural in your language. See how you translated this in [1:16](../01/16.md). Alternate translation: “I pray that the Lord will be merciful to Onesiphorus” or “May the Lord have mercy on Onesiphorus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
2TI 1 18 x0eo grammar-connect-logic-result (δῴη αὐτῷ ὁ Κύριος, εὑρεῖν ἔλεος παρὰ Κυρίου ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ), καὶ ὅσα ἐν Ἐφέσῳ διηκόνησεν, βέλτιον σὺ γινώσκεις 1 May the Lord grant to him to find mercy from the Lord in that day. And how much he served in Ephesus, you know very well If it would be helpful in your language, you could reverse the order of these sentences, since the second sentence gives the reason for the action that the first sentence describes. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2TI 1 18 r54t writing-pronouns δῴη αὐτῷ ὁ Κύριος, εὑρεῖν ἔλεος παρὰ Κυρίου 1 May the Lord grant to him to find mercy from the Lord If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the name “Onesiphorus” instead of the pronoun **him** to make it clear who is receiving mercy. Alternate translation: “May Onesiphorus receive mercy from the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2TI 1 18 x2dk figs-metaphor εὑρεῖν ἔλεος παρὰ Κυρίου 1 to find mercy from the Lord Paul speaks of **mercy** as if it were an object that could be found. Paul is expressing his desire that God show **mercy** to Onesiphorus on the day of judgment. Alternate translation: “to receive mercy from the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TI 1 18 f3ep figs-explicit ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ 1 in that day The expression **that day** refers to the day when God will judge all people; at that time they will receive mercy from the Lord, as Paul mentions, or wrath. Alternate translation: “on the day of judgment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2TI 1 18 p025 figs-explicit ὅσα ἐν Ἐφέσῳ διηκόνησεν, βέλτιον σὺ γινώσκεις 1 how much he served in Ephesus, you know very well Paul is reminding Timothy that Onesiphorus helped him earlier, **in Ephesus**. So, Paul is asking the Lord to bless Onesiphorus because he helped Paul several times. Alternate translation: “you know well how much he also helped me earlier when I was in Ephesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2TI 2 intro k3zn 0 # 2 Timothy 2 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>In verses 11b–13, Paul may be quoting a poem or hymn. To show the reader that this may be a quotation, in your translation you may choose to set these verses farther to the right than the other verses in the chapter.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### We will reign with him<br><br>Faithful Christians will reign with Christ in the future. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]])<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Analogies<br><br>In this chapter, Paul makes several analogies to teach about living as a Christian. He uses analogies of soldiers, athletes, and farmers. Later in the chapter, he uses the analogy of different kinds of containers in a house.
2TI 2 1 bll5 figs-metaphor τέκνον μου 1 my child Here, **child** is a term of great love and approval. Timothy is not Paul’s biological child. It is also likely that Paul introduced Timothy to Christ, and so this is why Paul considered him like his own child. Alternate translation: “who are like my child” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TI 2 1 p026 figs-activepassive ἐνδυναμοῦ 1 be strengthened You could express this with an active form, and you could state who would do the action. Alternate translation: “let God make you strong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2TI 2 1 e6ex figs-abstractnouns ἐν τῇ χάριτι τῇ ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 in the grace that is in Christ Jesus Paul wants Timothy to experience the strength that God provides through his **grace** or kindness. Believers experience God’s grace through knowing Jesus Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **grace** with an adjective. Alternate translation: “as you allow Christ Jesus to kindly empower you through your relationship to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2TI 2 2 ig9v figs-explicit διὰ πολλῶν μαρτύρων 1 along with many witnesses Paul is referring to teaching in a public setting with others present. The implication is that those others could testify as to what he taught. Alternate translation: “in the presence of people who can testify to what I said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2TI 2 2 kv1m figs-metaphor ταῦτα παράθου 1 entrust these things to faithful men Paul speaks of his instructions to Timothy as if they were objects that Timothy could give to other people and trust them to use correctly. Alternate translation: “commit them” or “teach them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TI 2 2 p027 figs-gendernotations πιστοῖς ἀνθρώποις 1 to faithful men Here the term **men** has a generic sense that may include women. Alternate translation: “to faithful people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2TI 2 3 yc1j figs-explicit συνκακοπάθησον 1 Suffer together Here, **together** could mean: (1) Timothy should suffer together with Paul. Alternate translation: “Suffer together with me” (2) Timothy should suffer together with all Christians who suffer. Alternate translation: “Suffer together with all believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2TI 2 3 juu2 figs-metaphor ὡς καλὸς στρατιώτης Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 as a good soldier of Jesus Christ Paul compares suffering for Christ Jesus to the suffering that a good soldier endures. Alternate translation: “as if you were a soldier and Jesus Christ were your commander” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TI 2 4 a4x7 figs-metaphor οὐδεὶς στρατευόμενος ἐμπλέκεται ταῖς τοῦ βίου πραγματίαις 1 No one serving as a soldier gets entangled in the affairs of life To help Timothy understand something important about following Jesus, Paul introduces the metaphor of a **soldier** who has to decide between pleasing his leader or pleasing those outside the army. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this. Alternate translation: “Consider that no dedicated soldier allows the affairs of life to distract him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TI 2 4 p7n5 figs-metaphor ἐμπλέκεται ταῖς τοῦ βίου πραγματίαις 1 gets entangled in the affairs of life Paul speaks of being involved in other matters as if they were a net that trapped people and kept them from being able to move freely. Alternate translation: “allows the affairs of life to distract him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TI 2 4 p028 figs-activepassive ἐμπλέκεται ταῖς τοῦ βίου πραγματίαις 1 gets entangled in the affairs of life If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “allows the affairs of life to distract him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2TI 2 4 p029 figs-explicit τοῦ βίου 1 of life By **life**, Paul means, in the context of this metaphor, “civilian life.” The implication is that Timothy and all believers should not allow competing concerns to keep them from serving Christ. Alternate translation: “of everyday life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2TI 2 4 d2lg τῷ στρατολογήσαντι 1 the one who enlisted him Alternate translation: “his leader” or “the one who commands him”
2TI 2 5 d483 figs-metaphor ἐὰν & ἀθλῇ τις, οὐ στεφανοῦται, ἐὰν μὴ νομίμως ἀθλήσῃ 1 if anyone competes, he is not crowned if he has not competed lawfully To help Timothy understand something important about following Jesus, Paul introduces the metaphor of an athlete who has to decide between competing **lawfully** or not lawfully. The athlete will only receive the crown given to the winner if he competes lawfully. By making this comparison with an athlete competing in games, Paul is implicitly telling Timothy that Christ will not reward him unless he serves him **lawfully**, that is, unless he obeys him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this directly. Alternate translation: “consider that the officials only crown an athlete as the winner if he competes according to the rules” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TI 2 5 p031 figs-hypo ἐὰν & ἀθλῇ τις, οὐ στεφανοῦται, ἐὰν μὴ νομίμως ἀθλήσῃ 1 if anyone competes, he is not crowned if he has not competed lawfully Paul is also using a hypothetical situation to teach Timothy. Alternate translation: “suppose an athlete did not compete by the rules. Then he would not be crowned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
2TI 2 5 p032 ἐὰν & ἀθλῇ τις 1 if anyone competes Here, **competes** refers to competing in an athletic event. Alternate translation: “if an athlete competes in an event”
2TI 2 5 xbn6 figs-doublenegatives οὐ στεφανοῦται, ἐὰν μὴ νομίμως ἀθλήσῃ 1 he is not crowned if he has not competed lawfully If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this double negative by translating it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “the officials will only crown him if he competes by the rules” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
2TI 2 5 p033 figs-activepassive οὐ στεφανοῦται 1 he is not crowned If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “the officials will not crown him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2TI 2 5 p034 figs-explicit οὐ στεφανοῦται 1 he is not crowned Paul assumes that Timothy will know that in this culture crowning indicated the winner of a competition. Alternate translation: “the officials will not crown him as the winner” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2TI 2 5 lea8 translate-unknown οὐ στεφανοῦται 1 he is not crowned In Paul’s time, when athletes won competitions, they were **crowned** with wreaths made from the leaves of plants. You can express this idea in your translation by referring to the comparable custom in your own culture, or by using a general expression. Alternate translation: “the officials will not give him an award” or “the officials will not declare him to be the winner” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2TI 2 5 reg6 figs-explicit μὴ νομίμως ἀθλήσῃ 1 he has competed lawfully Paul is referring to the rules that governed a competition. The athletes had to obey the rules or they would be removed from the competition and not have an opportunity to win. If it would be helpful in your language, you could mention these rules. Alternate translation: “he does not compete according to the rules” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2TI 2 6 wz35 figs-metaphor τὸν κοπιῶντα γεωργὸν δεῖ πρῶτον τῶν καρπῶν μεταλαμβάνειν 1 The hardworking farmer ought to be first to receive of the crops To help Timothy understand something important about following Jesus, Paul introduces the metaphor of a **farmer** who has to decide between working hard or not working hard. The farmer will receive a share of the harvest if he is working hard. By making this comparison, Paul is encouraging Timothy to work hard in his service to Christ so that God will reward him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this directly. Alternate translation: “Consider that a farmer who works hard should receive a share of the crops before anyone else” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TI 2 6 p035 figs-explicit πρῶτον τῶν καρπῶν μεταλαμβάνειν 1 first to receive of the crops In this illustration, it seems that the hardworking farmer is working with other farmers who will all receive a part of the crop after the harvest. But since this farmer works harder than the others, he should receive before the others. It is implied that receiving first is best, possibly because the quality of the crop is better. Alternate translation: “receive the best share of the crops” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2TI 2 7 bdk9 figs-explicit νόει ὃ λέγω, δώσει γάρ σοι ὁ Κύριος σύνεσιν 1 Think about what I am saying, for the Lord will give you understanding Paul gave Timothy three metaphors in verses 3–6, but he did not completely explain their implications. He expected Timothy to figure out, with God’s help, the lesson of these metaphors for Christ’s servants. For that reason, if you want to include an explanation of the meaning of the metaphors, we recommend that you state the meaning in a footnote rather than in the Bible text. Alternate translation: “you will have to think carefully about what I have just told you to understand it completely, but you can depend on God to help you to do that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2TI 2 7 p036 figs-metonymy ὃ λέγω 1 what I am saying Paul refers to what he has just written in his letter with the verb **saying** to express the idea of communicating. Alternate translation: “what I have just told you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2TI 2 7 a22q figs-explicit ἐν πᾶσιν 1 in everything Here, **in everything** refers to everything related to the three metaphors that Paul has written just before this. Alternate translation: “about everything that I have just said” or “about all that I said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2TI 2 8 mh1k figs-metaphor ἐκ σπέρματος Δαυείδ 1 from the seed of David The phrase **from the seed of** refers to Jesus being descended from King David. Alternate translation: “who is a descendant of David” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TI 2 8 wt31 figs-idiom ἐγηγερμένον ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 raised from the dead The expression **raised from the dead** is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “whom God caused to live again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2TI 2 8 p038 figs-activepassive ἐγηγερμένον ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 raised from the dead If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “whom God raised from the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2TI 2 8 s4vh figs-possession κατὰ τὸ εὐαγγέλιόν μου 1 according to my gospel The term **my** conveys the idea that it is the gospel associated with Paul because he preaches it. Alternate translation: “according to the gospel message that I preach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2TI 2 9 t2ax figs-metonymy μέχρι δεσμῶν 1 unto chains Paul uses the expression **unto chains** to express how far his suffering has gone: from being beaten, to being arrested, to being in chains in prison. Alternate translation: “to the point of being imprisoned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2TI 2 9 p039 figs-simile ὡς κακοῦργος 1 like a criminal Paul compares his situation to the shameful one that a person would be in who had actually committed a crime. Alternate translation: “as if I were a criminal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
2TI 2 9 pc6t figs-metaphor ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ οὐ δέδεται 1 the word of God is not bound Here, **bound** means being held in chains as a prisoner, referring to Paul’s condition. Paul contrasts himself, an actual prisoner, with God’s message, which can never be held prisoner. Alternate translation: “nothing is holding back the message from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TI 2 9 p040 figs-activepassive ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ οὐ δέδεται 1 the word of God is not bound If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this idea. Alternate translation: “nothing is holding back the message from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2TI 2 9 p041 figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the word of God Paul uses the term **word** to describe the message from God that he and others are communicating with words. Alternate translation: “the message from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2TI 2 10 p042 figs-hyperbole πάντα ὑπομένω 1 I endure all things Here the term **all** is a generalization that likely refers to the sufferings that Paul describes in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “I endure all of these sufferings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2TI 2 10 aa1x figs-nominaladj διὰ τοὺς ἐκλεκτούς 1 for the chosen The term **chosen** is an adjective that functions as a noun here and refers to a group of people. If your language would not use an adjective in that way, you could translate this term with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “for the people whom God has chosen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
2TI 2 10 j2bk καὶ αὐτοὶ σωτηρίας τύχωσιν τῆς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 they also may obtain the salvation that is in Christ Jesus The phrase **obtain salvation** could also be expressed with Christ Jesus, who grants salvation, as the subject. Alternate translation: “Christ Jesus may grant them salvation”
2TI 2 10 p043 figs-abstractnouns καὶ αὐτοὶ σωτηρίας τύχωσιν τῆς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 they also may obtain the salvation that is in Christ Jesus If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **salvation** with a verb. Alternate translation: “Christ Jesus may save them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2TI 2 10 el68 figs-abstractnouns μετὰ δόξης αἰωνίου 1 with eternal glory The abstract noun **glory** refers to the wonderful condition that people will experience when they are in the presence of God. It comes from God himself and he shares it with those who are saved by Jesus Christ, and this condition is **eternal**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **glory** with an adjective. Alternate translation: “and know how glorious it is to be with God forever” or “and experience God’s wonderful presence forever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2TI 2 11 nr7u πιστὸς ὁ λόγος 1 This word is trustworthy In this context, the term **word** refers to the statement of doctrine that follows. See how you translated this phrase in [1 Timothy 1:15](../1ti/01/15.md) Alternate translation: “This statement is dependable”
2TI 2 11 p044 πιστὸς ὁ λόγος 1 This word is trustworthy You could represent the meaning of the adjective **trustworthy** with an active verb, if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “you could trust this statement”
2TI 2 11 p045 figs-quotemarks πιστὸς ὁ λόγος 1 This word is trustworthy Paul uses this phrase to introduce a direct quotation. The words that follow in the rest of this verse and in [2:12](../02/12.md) and [2:13](../02/13.md) are a poem or hymn that expresses the message that Paul says is trustworthy. It may be helpful to your readers if you indicate this by marking these words as a direct quotation or by setting them farther to the right, as the General Notes at the beginning of this chapter suggest. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
2TI 2 11 g6e4 writing-poetry εἰ γὰρ συναπεθάνομεν, καὶ συνζήσομεν 1 For if we died with him, we will also live with him This is the beginning of a poem or hymn that Paul is probably quoting. If your language has a way of indicating that this is poetry, such as by setting individual phrases on separate lines, you could use it here and in [2:12](../02/12.md) and [2:13](../02/13.md). If not, you could translate this material as regular prose rather than as poetry. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-poetry]])
2TI 2 11 in38 figs-metaphor εἰ & συναπεθάνομεν 1 if we died with him Paul is speaking since he and Timothy and other believers who should trust this statement have not actually **died**. This could refer to: (1) the way that believers accept Jesus’ death for their sins when they trust him for salvation. This means that they have “died” to their old life of sin. Alternate translation: “if we have ended our old way of life by accepting Jesus’ death for us” (2) the way that people who believe in Jesus may suffer for him, possibly to the point of dying for him. Alternate translation: “if we are prepared to die for Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TI 2 11 p046 καὶ συνζήσομεν 1 we will also live with him Although Paul is referring to dying with Christ in a figurative sense, **live** is probably not figurative, but could refer to: (1) life after physical death. This seems most likely given Paul’s mention of “eternal glory” in the previous verse and “we will reign with him” in the next. Alternate translation: “then God will raise us from the dead to live with Jesus” (2) how believers will act in this life before physical death. Alternate translation: “we will not pursue our own desires, instead we will do what Jesus wants us to do”
2TI 2 12 p048 εἰ ἀρνησόμεθα 1 if we deny him Paul uses the term **deny** to refer to the action of believers saying that they do not know Jesus Christ during this present life. It is presented as the opposite of **endure**, so it refers to someone who gives in to persecution and denies being a follower of Jesus. Alternate translation: “if we say now that we do not know him”
2TI 2 12 p049 κἀκεῖνος ἀρνήσεται ἡμᾶς 1 he also will deny us In this second usage of the word **deny**, Paul is referring to the action of Jesus Christ on the day of final judgment. On that day, Jesus will either receive a faithful believer or reject those who are not true followers. Those who deny that they are followers of Jesus while on earth are not true followers. Alternate translation: “he will reject us on the day of judgment”
2TI 2 13 ke4w εἰ ἀπιστοῦμεν 1 if we are unfaithful Paul uses the word **unfaithful** to express the condition of believers who do not continue to obey Jesus, but rather disobey him. Alternate translation: “if we disobey Jesus” or “if we do not do what Jesus wants us to do”
2TI 2 13 p050 figs-explicit ἐκεῖνος πιστὸς μένει 1 he remains faithful This could mean : (1) he remains faithful to them. (2) he remains true to himself. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2TI 2 13 ihd4 ἀρνήσασθαι & ἑαυτὸν οὐ δύναται 1 he is not able to deny himself Paul states that Jesus is not able to **deny himself**, meaning that Jesus is not able to go against his character and will remain true to what he said he would do. Paul may have one or both of the following ideas in mind. (1) Jesus’ character includes being the Savior who can forgive our unfaithfulness when we repent of it, as Peter experienced (John 21:15–19). This favors the interpretation of the previous phrase as “he remains faithful to us.” (2) Jesus’ character also includes being the holy God who judges people for their sin when they do not repent. This favors the interpretation of the previous phrase as “he remains true to himself.” Alternate translation: “he must always act according to his character”
2TI 2 14 u661 ὑπομίμνῃσκε 1 Remind them The word **{them}**, which is implicit in the Greek verb, probably refers to the people that Timothy has responsibility over. Alternate translation: “Remind the people there”
2TI 2 14 p051 figs-metaphor ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 before God Paul uses the expression **before God**, which means “in front of God,” to mean “where God can see.” Seeing, in turn, means attention and judgment. Alternate translation: “as God is watching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TI 2 14 r5lq figs-explicit ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 before God The implication is that Paul is telling Timothy to tell the believers, when he gives them this command, that God will be watching what they do. Alternate translation: “with God as their witness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2TI 2 14 g6p7 figs-metaphor μὴ λογομαχεῖν 1 not to battle about words Paul uses the term **battle** to describe arguments. This could mean: (1) the believers are not to argue about unimportant things such as the words that someone uses to present the gospel message. That only distracts people from talking about important things, such as the gospel message itself. Alternate translation: “not to fight about small things like words” (2) the believers are not to argue about what words mean. Again, this causes disunity among the believers for no good reason. Alternate translation: “not to fight about the meanings of words” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TI 2 14 rke6 ἐπ’ οὐδὲν χρήσιμον 1 it is useful for nothing Paul adds that battling about words has no benefit for those involved. Alternate translation: “it does not benefit anyone”
2TI 2 14 ywty figs-abstractnouns ἐπὶ καταστροφῇ τῶν ἀκουόντων 1 to the destruction of those who hear If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **destruction** with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “it destroys those who hear” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2TI 2 14 x7gx figs-metonymy ἐπὶ καταστροφῇ τῶν ἀκουόντων 1 to the destruction of those who hear Here, **destruction** refers not to physical harm, but to the spiritual harm that is done to believers who hear their teachers foolishly arguing about unimportant things. This teaches the believers that being seen as right about small things is more important than love and unity, and can cause them to have wrong ideas about the faith or to stop following Jesus altogether. Alternate translation: “and can make those who hear it want to stop following Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2TI 2 15 m3vy σπούδασον σεαυτὸν, δόκιμον παραστῆσαι τῷ Θεῷ 1 Strive to present yourself approved to God Alternate translation: “Do your best to please God”
2TI 2 15 rj6y figs-metaphor ἐργάτην 1 a worker Paul says that Timothy will be a skilled workman if he correctly teaches God’s word. Alternate translation: “like a craftsman” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TI 2 15 xgz9 figs-metaphor ὀρθοτομοῦντα τὸν λόγον τῆς ἀληθείας 1 cutting the word of truth straight Paul refers to **the word of truth** as if it were a path that someone was cutting through difficult terrain. When such a path is **straight**, travelers can follow it directly to their destination. By contrast, the useless discussions that Paul describes in [2:14](../02/14.md) and [2:16](../02/16.md) would be needless detours in terms of this same metaphor. Alternate translation: “show people how to follow the Scriptures directly” or “teach the Scriptures correctly so that people can follow them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TI 2 15 p052 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τῆς ἀληθείας 1 the word of truth Paul uses the term **word** to refer to something that is expressed in words. This could refer to: (1) the message that Timothy is to teach. Alternate translation: “the true message” (2) the Scriptures. Alternate translation: “the true things that God has said in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2TI 2 15 p053 figs-abstractnouns τὸν λόγον τῆς ἀληθείας 1 the word of truth If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **truth** with an adjective. Alternate translation: “the true message” or “the true things that God has said in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2TI 2 16 e27q figs-metaphor ἐπὶ πλεῖον & προκόψουσιν ἀσεβείας 1 they will advance into greater ungodliness Paul speaks of these discussions as if they could physically progress in a certain direction, and he speaks of **ungodliness** as that direction. Paul is describing the effect that these discussions have on people. Alternate translation: “they cause people to become more and more ungodly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TI 2 17 i73t figs-simile ὁ λόγος αὐτῶν ὡς γάγγραινα νομὴν ἕξει 1 their word will have a spreading like gangrene This is a simile. It means that something will spread from person to person and harm the faith of all those who hear it. The thing that will spread could refer to: (1) the habit of having useless and godless discussions. (2) the things that the people were saying in these empty discussions, or both. Alternate translation: “these empty discussions will spread quickly and cause destruction like an infectious disease” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
2TI 2 17 p054 figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος αὐτῶν 1 their word Paul uses the term **word** to refer to something that is expressed in words. Alternate translation: “these discussions” or “what people who take part in these discussions say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2TI 2 17 p055 translate-unknown ὡς γάγγραινα 1 like gangrene “Gangrene” is type of tissue death caused by infection or lack of blood circulation. It quickly spreads in a person’s body and can lead to death. If your readers would not know what **gangrene** is, you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “like an infectious disease” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2TI 2 17 p056 writing-pronouns ὧν ἐστιν Ὑμέναιος, καὶ Φίλητος 1 among whom are Hymenaeus and Philetus Paul gives Timothy the names of **Hymenaeus** and **Philetus** examples of ungodliness and foolish talk. To make the relationship between these names and the preceding **their word** clear in your language, you may have to make this explicit. Alternate translation: “Hymeneus and Philetus are such people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2TI 2 17 x2k6 translate-names Ὑμέναιος, καὶ Φίλητος 1 Hymenaeus and Philetus **Hymenaeus** and **Philetus** are names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2TI 2 18 fi9z figs-metaphor οἵτινες περὶ τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἠστόχησαν 1 who have missed the mark regarding the truth Paul uses this expression to speak of faith in Christ as if it were a target at which people should aim. Those who have **missed the mark** do not believe or teach what is true. Alternate translation: “who are teaching things that are not true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TI 2 18 p057 figs-abstractnouns οἵτινες περὶ τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἠστόχησαν 1 who have missed the mark regarding the truth If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **truth** with an adjective. Alternate translation: “who teach things that are not true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2TI 2 18 pu22 figs-abstractnouns ἀνάστασιν ἤδη γεγονέναι 1 the resurrection has already happened If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **resurrection** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “God has already raised the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2TI 2 18 ura5 figs-metaphor ἀνατρέπουσιν τήν τινων πίστιν 1 who are destroying the faith of some Paul refers to **faith** as though it were an object that could be destroyed. Alternate translation: “they are causing some people to stop believing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TI 2 19 ir1z figs-metaphor ὁ & στερεὸς θεμέλιος τοῦ Θεοῦ ἕστηκεν 1 the firm foundation of God stands Paul uses the image of the **foundation** of a building to explain that even though a false and destructive message has been destroying the faith of some people, God has nevertheless given people who want to continue to follow him a true message, which provides for them a safe and secure “place to stand.” Alternate translation: “God has provided a secure basis for people to continue to believe in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TI 2 19 p058 figs-metonymy ἔχων τὴν σφραγῖδα ταύτην 1 having this seal Paul speaks of the inscription on this foundation as if it were a **seal**, since seals on the outside of documents often bore inscriptions describing their contents. Alternate translation: “having this inscription” or “which can be described in this way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2TI 2 19 p059 figs-quotemarks ἔχων τὴν σφραγῖδα ταύτην 1 having this seal Paul uses this phrase to introduce two direct quotations. The statements that follow in the rest of this verse describe two aspects of the basis that God has provided for people to continue to believe in him. It may be helpful to your readers if you indicate this by marking these statements as quotations. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
2TI 2 19 nd7t figs-idiom ὁ ὀνομάζων τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου 1 who names the name of the Lord The expression **names the name of the Lord** is an idiom that refers to saying the name of the Lord in order to declare that one belongs to him. Alternate translation: “who says he believes in the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2TI 2 19 y3bc figs-abstractnouns ἀποστήτω ἀπὸ ἀδικίας 1 must abstain from unrighteousness If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **unrighteousness** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “must stop doing evil things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2TI 2 20 p060 figs-metaphor ἐν μεγάλῃ δὲ οἰκίᾳ, οὐκ ἔστιν μόνον σκεύη χρυσᾶ καὶ ἀργυρᾶ, ἀλλὰ καὶ ξύλινα καὶ ὀστράκινα 1 Now in a great house, there are not only gold and silver containers, but also wood and clay To help Timothy understand something important about following Jesus, Paul introduces the metaphor that compares the **containers** that are in the home of a wealthy person with people in the church. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that this is a metaphor or illustration. Alternate translation: “Consider this illustration: in the home of a wealthy person, there are containers made of gold and silver, and there are also containers made of wood and clay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TI 2 20 p061 figs-ellipsis ἀλλὰ καὶ ξύλινα καὶ ὀστράκινα 1 but also wood and clay Paul leaves out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. Alternate translation: “and there are also containers made of wood and clay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2TI 2 20 j75l σκεύη 1 containers The word **container** is a general term for items used to hold other things, such as grain, food, drink, or refuse. If your language does not have a general word, you can use a specific word such as “bowl” or “pot.”
2TI 2 20 mt5e figs-abstractnouns ἃ μὲν εἰς τιμὴν, ἃ δὲ εἰς ἀτιμίαν 1 both some for honor and some for dishonor If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract nouns **honor** and **dishonor** by stating the ideas behind them with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “he uses the former at events to honor people and he uses the latter to do things that no one wants to see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2TI 2 21 jm3p figs-metaphor ἐκκαθάρῃ ἑαυτὸν ἀπὸ τούτων 1 has cleansed himself from these Here Paul continues the metaphor that compares people in the church to containers in a great house that have different uses. Paul speaks of a person washing himself clean as though he had been a pot full of something bad. By this he means that the person has given up certain associations or activities. Here, **these** could refer to: (1) the false teachers who are destroying the faith of some people. Alternate translation: “has disassociated himself from these false teachers” (2) the activities of quarreling and false teaching that Paul has warned Timothy about. Alternate translation: “has stopped doing these ungodly actions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TI 2 21 g79f figs-metaphor ἔσται σκεῦος εἰς τιμήν 1 he will be a container for honor Paul speaks of a person who has given up these associations or activities as if he were a particular kind of **container**. Alternate translation: “he will be like a dish for special occasions” or “he will be like a dish that is used to honor people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TI 2 21 p062 figs-explicit ἔσται σκεῦος εἰς τιμήν 1 he will be a container for honor The implication is that God will be able to give important assignments to a person who is free from wrong associations or activities. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he will be someone to whom God can give important assignments” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2TI 2 21 mh63 ἔσται σκεῦος εἰς τιμήν, ἡγιασμένον εὔχρηστον τῷ Δεσπότῃ, εἰς πᾶν ἔργον ἀγαθὸν ἡτοιμασμένον 1 he will be a container for honor, having been sanctified, useful to the Master, having been prepared for every good work These four phrases could mean: (1) the ones beginning with **having been** give the reason for the phrase before them. Alternate translation: “he will be a container for honor because he has been sanctified, and he will be useful to the Master because he has been prepared for every good work” (2) all four phrases could simply be describing the person. Alternate translation: “he will be a container for honor, someone who is sanctified, useful to the Master, and ready for every good work”
2TI 2 21 p063 figs-activepassive ἡγιασμένον 1 having been sanctified If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea, and you can state who did the action. Alternate translation: “whom God has set apart for himself” or “whom God has set apart for a special purpose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2TI 2 21 nl5d figs-metaphor ἡγιασμένον 1 having been sanctified If this phrase is continuing the metaphor of objects in a house, then Paul is referring to a person who is free from wrong associations or activities as if he were a precious object whose owner keeps it in a special place. Whether this phrase is continuing the metaphor or not, it still expresses the idea of being “dedicated” for a special purpose. Alternate translation: “whom God has set apart for a special purpose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TI 2 21 p064 figs-metaphor εὔχρηστον τῷ Δεσπότῃ 1 useful to the Master In the context of the metaphor of the house, Paul speaks of God as the head of the household. Alternate translation: “useful to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TI 2 21 p065 figs-activepassive εἰς πᾶν ἔργον ἀγαθὸν ἡτοιμασμένον 1 having been prepared for every good work If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “who has gotten himself ready to do any good work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2TI 2 22 h9p6 figs-metaphor τὰς & νεωτερικὰς ἐπιθυμίας φεῦγε 1 flee youthful lusts Paul speaks about **youthful** desires as if they were a dangerous person or animal that Timothy should run away from. Alternate translation: “control your youthful desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TI 2 22 p066 figs-metonymy τὰς & νεωτερικὰς ἐπιθυμίας φεῦγε 1 flee youthful lusts Paul speaks of immoral activities by association with the desires that lead a person to engage in them. Alternate translation: “refuse to do the wrong things that young people want to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2TI 2 22 srb7 figs-metaphor δίωκε δὲ δικαιοσύνην, πίστιν, ἀγάπην, εἰρήνην 1 and pursue righteousness, faith, love, and peace Paul is using the verb **pursue** in contrast to **flee**. He speaks of these positive things as if Timothy should run towards them because they will do him good. Alternate translation: “be eager to do what is right, to believe in God, to love God and others, and to live in peace with people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TI 2 22 p067 figs-abstractnouns δικαιοσύνην, πίστιν, ἀγάπην, εἰρήνην 1 righteousness, faith, love, and peace If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract nouns **righteousness**, **faith**, **love**, and **peace** by stating the ideas behind them with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “do what is right, believe in God, love other people, and live peacefully with other people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2TI 2 22 hg99 μετὰ τῶν ἐπικαλουμένων τὸν Κύριον ἐκ καθαρᾶς καρδίας 1 with those who call on the Lord from a clean heart This likely means that Paul wants Timothy to pursue these positive things together with others who are sincere in their faith. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could put this phrase at the beginning of Paul’s command to Timothy, as in the UST, before **pursue**. Alternate translation: “together with those who worship the Lord with sincere intentions”
2TI 2 22 gl3q figs-idiom τῶν ἐπικαλουμένων τὸν Κύριον 1 those who call on the Lord The expression **calling on the Lord** is an idiom that means to trust and worship the Lord. Alternate translation: “those who worship the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2TI 2 22 p068 figs-metonymy ἐκ καθαρᾶς καρδίας 1 from a clean heart Paul uses a physical part of the body, the **heart**, to represent the intentions and desires of a person. Alternate translation: “with sincere intentions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2TI 2 22 b2ti figs-metaphor ἐκ καθαρᾶς καρδίας 1 from a clean heart Paul uses the word **clean** to describe the intentions or thoughts of a person as though they were an object that could be made clean. Alternate translation: “with sincere intentions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TI 2 23 tmf7 figs-metonymy τὰς & μωρὰς καὶ ἀπαιδεύτους ζητήσεις παραιτοῦ 1 avoid foolish and ignorant questions Paul refers to certain kinds of discussions by association with the kind of **questions** that people might ask that would lead to these discussions or by association with the kind of people that would ask these questions. Alternate translation: “do not become involved in foolish and ignorant discussions” or “do not allow people to involve you in discussions that they start because they are foolish and ignorant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2TI 2 23 p069 figs-doublet μωρὰς καὶ ἀπαιδεύτους ζητήσεις 1 foolish and ignorant questions Paul may be using the words **foolish** and **ignorant** together to emphasize a single idea. Alternate translation: “very stupid questions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
2TI 2 23 kh6p figs-metaphor γεννῶσι μάχας 1 they give birth to battles Paul speaks of the **questions** as if they were women giving birth to children (the **battles**). Alternate translation: “they cause arguments” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TI 2 23 p070 figs-metaphor μάχας 1 battles Paul uses the term **battles** to describe arguments. Alternate translation: “they cause arguments” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TI 2 24 p071 figs-metaphor δοῦλον & Κυρίου 1 the slave of the Lord Paul is using the expression **slave of the Lord** to refer to leaders in the church, including Timothy, who do what God tells them to do. This includes teaching the believers and interacting with the quarrelsome teachers who challenge their authority and the truth. Alternate translation: “a leader in the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TI 2 24 p072 figs-metaphor οὐ δεῖ μάχεσθαι 1 must not battle Paul uses the term **battle** to describe arguments. Alternate translation: “must not argue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TI 2 25 un9l figs-abstractnouns ἐν πραΰτητι 1 in meekness If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **meekness** in this expression with an adverb. Alternate translation: “meekly” or “gently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2TI 2 25 u6rp παιδεύοντα 1 educating Paul presents **educating** as the godly response to quarrels. This term can mean “teach” or “correct.” Alternate translation: “teaching” or “correcting”
2TI 2 25 jt1r figs-metaphor μήποτε δώῃ αὐτοῖς ὁ Θεὸς μετάνοιαν 1 God may perhaps give them repentance Paul speaks of **repentance** as if it were an object that God could give people. Alternate translation: “God may cause them to repent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TI 2 25 u8dy εἰς ἐπίγνωσιν ἀληθείας 1 for the knowledge of the truth Paul speaks of the result of **repentance** as knowing the **truth**. Alternate translation: “so that they will know the truth”
2TI 2 26 p073 figs-ellipsis ἀνανήψωσιν ἐκ τῆς τοῦ διαβόλου παγίδος 1 they may become sober again from the trap of the devil As Paul moves from one metaphor into another, he leaves out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. Alternate translation: “they may become sober again and escape from the trap of the devil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2TI 2 26 ef3q figs-metaphor ἀνανήψωσιν 1 they may become sober again Paul speaks of sinners learning to think correctly about God as if they were drunk people becoming **sober again**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TI 2 26 mql8 figs-metaphor ἐκ τῆς τοῦ διαβόλου παγίδος 1 from the trap of the devil Paul refers to the deception of **the devil** as a physical trap that sinners are captured in. Alternate translation: “and escape from the devil’s deception” or “and reject the devil’s deception” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TI 2 26 p074 figs-activepassive ἐζωγρημένοι ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ, εἰς τὸ ἐκείνου θέλημα 1 having been captured by him for his will If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “after the devil has captured them and made them do what he wanted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2TI 2 26 dj4j figs-metaphor ἐζωγρημένοι ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ, εἰς τὸ ἐκείνου θέλημα 1 having been captured by him for his will Paul speaks of the devil’s deception as if the devil had physically **captured** them and made them do what he wanted. Alternate translation: “after the devil has deceived them and made them do what he wanted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TI 3 intro k2cr 0 # 2 Timothy 3 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>Many scholars understand the **last days** to mean the entire time from when Jesus first came to when he will return, which includes Paul’s time. If so, then what Paul teaches in this chapter about being persecuted applies to all believers. But some scholars understand the **last days** to mean a time in the future just before Jesus returns. If that is the meaning, then Paul is prophesying in verses 1–9 and 13 about those days. If possible, translators should be careful not to let how they understand this issue affect how they translate these verses. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lastday]])
2TI 3 1 g65r figs-idiom ἐν ἐσχάταις ἡμέραις 1 in the last days Paul is using the term **days** to refer to a particular time. Alternate translation: “during the period of time before the end” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2TI 3 1 n7gs figs-explicit ἐνστήσονται καιροὶ χαλεποί 1 there will be difficult times The implication from what Paul goes on to say about people becoming ungodly and violent is that it will be difficult for believers in this time period. Alternate translation: “believers will face difficult situations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2TI 3 2 p075 figs-gendernotations οἱ ἄνθρωποι 1 men Here Paul is using the term **men** in a generic sense that includes all people. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2TI 3 2 jb27 φίλαυτοι 1 self-loving Here, **self-loving** refers to loving oneself more than loving family or friends with a natural human love. This is not the kind of love that comes from God. Alternate translation: “self-centered”
2TI 3 3 u3n7 ἄστοργοι 1 unloving The term **unloving** means that they will not love other people whom they should love. Alternate translation: “they will not love their own families”
2TI 3 3 r2uv ἄσπονδοι 1 irreconcilable The term **irreconcilable** means they will not agree to make peace with others and will insist on living in a state of conflict in order to have their own way. Alternate translation: “they will not agree with anyone” or “they will not live in peace with anyone”
2TI 3 3 ks9y ἀφιλάγαθοι 1 not good-loving The phrase **not good-loving** could be translated by removing the negative **not** and replacing **loving** with the opposite term “hating.” Alternate translation: “They will hate what is good”
2TI 3 4 dw5z προπετεῖς 1 reckless The adjective **reckless** conveys the idea of doing things without thinking about the negative things that could happen as a result. Alternate translation: “heedless of consequences”
2TI 3 4 d6ng figs-metaphor τετυφωμένοι 1 puffed up The expression **puffed up** is a metaphor for being proud and considering oneself better than others. Alternate translation: “haughty” or “conceited” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TI 3 4 p076 figs-activepassive τετυφωμένοι 1 puffed up If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “haughty” or “conceited” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2TI 3 5 k5dc figs-idiom ἔχοντες μόρφωσιν εὐσεβείας 1 having a form of godliness The expression **a form of** indicates that their **godliness** is not genuine or true. Alternate translation: “appearing to have godliness” or “appearing to honor God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2TI 3 5 p077 grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 And Paul uses the word **And** to introduce the results of what the previous sentence described. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
2TI 3 5 p078 figs-nominaladj τούτους ἀποτρέπου 1 turn away from these The term **these** is a demonstrative adjective that refers to the people who show the ungodly qualities that Paul lists in the previous verses. Paul is using the term as a noun. If your language does not use adjectives in that way, you can add the word “people” in your translation. Alternate translation: “avoid these people” or “avoid such people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
2TI 3 5 xm1c figs-metaphor τούτους ἀποτρέπου 1 turn away from these The expression **turn away** is a metaphor for avoiding someone. Alternate translation: “avoid these people” or “avoid such people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TI 3 6 gu4b figs-metaphor αἰχμαλωτίζοντες 1 captivating Here Paul uses the term **captivating** to mean greatly influencing someone by the use of deception. Alternate translation: “manipulating” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TI 3 6 u9m5 γυναικάρια 1 foolish women The term **foolish women** refers to women who are spiritually weak and immature. They allow these men into their homes and listen to them because they are weak, idle, and have many sins. Alternate translation: “women who are spiritually weak”
2TI 3 6 e9ex figs-metaphor σεσωρευμένα ἁμαρτίαις 1 who are loaded with sins Paul speaks of these **sins** as if they were heaped up on the backs of these women. Paul is explaining why these men can easily influence these women. This could mean: (1) these women sin often or even continually. Alternate translation: “who sin often” (2) these women feel terrible guilt because they sin. Alternate translation: “who feel terrible guilt for their sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TI 3 6 p079 figs-activepassive σεσωρευμένα ἁμαρτίαις 1 who are loaded with sins If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “who sin often” or “who feel terrible guilt for their sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2TI 3 6 p080 figs-activepassive ἀγόμενα ἐπιθυμίαις ποικίλαις 1 led away by various desires If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “various desires lead them away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2TI 3 6 izz9 figs-personification ἀγόμενα ἐπιθυμίαις ποικίλαις 1 led away by various desires Paul speaks about these **various desires** as if they could physically lead a person away. He means that the women decide to do evil things in order to satisfy their desires. Alternate translation: “they decide to sin in various ways” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
2TI 3 7 p082 figs-metaphor μηδέποτε εἰς ἐπίγνωσιν ἀληθείας ἐλθεῖν δυνάμενα 1 never able to come to the knowledge of the truth Paul speaks of the **knowledge of the truth** as if it were a destination at which people could arrive. Alternate translation: “never able to understand the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TI 3 8 p083 ὃν τρόπον δὲ 1 And what way Alternate translation: “Just as”
2TI 3 8 b8el translate-names Ἰάννης καὶ Ἰαμβρῆς 1 Jannes and Jambres **Jannes** and **Jambres** are names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2TI 3 8 p084 figs-explicit Ἰάννης καὶ Ἰαμβρῆς 1 Jannes and Jambres Paul assumes that Timothy will know that he is referring here to the magicians in Pharaoh’s court who tried to duplicate the miracles that Moses was doing. The Bible does not record their names, but according to Jewish tradition their names were Jannes and Jambres. These men wanted to show that Pharaoh did not have to listen to Moses or obey Yahweh. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could identify them more explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jannes and Jambres, Pharaoh’s magicians,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2TI 3 8 p085 figs-nominaladj οὗτοι 1 these As in [3:5](../03/05.md), the term **these** is a demonstrative adjective that refers to the people who show the ungodly qualities that Paul has described. Paul is using the term as a noun. If your language does not use adjectives in that way, you can add the word “people” in your translation. Alternate translation: “these people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
2TI 3 8 p086 figs-abstractnouns τῇ ἀληθείᾳ 1 the truth If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **truth** with an adjective. Alternate translation: “what is true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2TI 3 8 g4kk figs-metonymy ἄνθρωποι κατεφθαρμένοι τὸν νοῦν 1 men whose mind is corrupted Paul uses the word **mind** to refer to the way these evil men think. Alternate translation: “men who cannot think rightly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2TI 3 8 p087 figs-activepassive ἄνθρωποι κατεφθαρμένοι τὸν νοῦν 1 men whose mind is corrupted If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “men who cannot think rightly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2TI 3 8 pfh1 ἀδόκιμοι περὶ τὴν πίστιν 1 unapproved regarding the faith Paul uses the adjective **unapproved** to convey the idea that these men have been tested regarding how well they trust in Christ and obey him, and they have failed the test because their faith is not real. Alternate translation: “without sincere faith” or “whose faith is not genuine”
2TI 3 8 sppy figs-explicit ἀδόκιμοι περὶ τὴν πίστιν 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could start a new sentence here and say who does not approve of these men. Alternate translation: “God does approve of these men because they do not have a genuine faith in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2TI 3 9 x9kx figs-explicit ἀλλ’ 1 But The word **But** indicates a contrast between this verse and the previous idea from [3:06](../03/06.md) that these men were able to sneak into homes and persuade people to believe wrong things. If you need to make this contrast clear, you could remind your readers of the previous idea here. Alternate translation: “But even though they have persuaded some people to believe wrong things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2TI 3 9 c6xx figs-metaphor οὐ προκόψουσιν ἐπὶ πλεῖον 1 they will not advance unto more Paul uses an expression about physical movement to mean that the false teachers will not continue to have much success among the believers. Alternate translation: “they will not be able to continue teaching falsely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TI 3 9 mv4j figs-hyperbole ἡ & ἄνοια αὐτῶν ἔκδηλος ἔσται πᾶσιν 1 their foolishness will be obvious to all The word **all** is a generalization. Paul has just said that these men will have a little success in deceiving some people. But ultimately their foolishness will become widely apparent, as happened to Jannes and Jambres, who were publicly discredited when they were not able to equal the powerful miracles of Moses. Alternate translation: “their foolishness will become widely apparent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2TI 3 9 z4fu figs-nominaladj ἐκείνων 1 of those The term **those** is a demonstrative adjective that refers to Jannes and Jambres. Paul is using the term as a noun. If your language does not use adjectives in that way, you can supply the names of the two men. Alternate translation: “of Jannes and Jambres” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
2TI 3 10 vw42 figs-metaphor σὺ & παρηκολούθησάς 1 you have followed Paul speaks of giving close attention to the things he lists in this verse as if one were physically following them as they moved. The idea is that Timothy is giving close attention to these things and imitating them. Alternate translation: “you have observed” or “you have paid close attention to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TI 3 10 wma6 figs-abstractnouns μου τῇ διδασκαλίᾳ 1 my teaching If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **teaching** with a relative clause. Alternate translation: “what I have taught others to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2TI 3 10 lq3v figs-abstractnouns τῇ ἀγωγῇ 1 conduct If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **conduct** with a relative clause. Alternate translation: “how I live my life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2TI 3 10 p088 figs-abstractnouns τῇ προθέσει 1 purpose If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **purpose** with a verbal clause. Alternate translation: “what I try to do with my life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2TI 3 10 p089 figs-abstractnouns τῇ πίστει 1 faith If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **faith** with a relative clause. Alternate translation: “what I believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2TI 3 10 p091 figs-abstractnouns τῇ μακροθυμίᾳ 1 patience If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **patience** with a relative clause. Alternate translation: “how I am patient with others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2TI 3 10 p090 figs-abstractnouns τῇ ἀγάπῃ 1 love If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **love** with a relative clause. Alternate translation: “how I love others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2TI 3 10 l4pp figs-abstractnouns τῇ ὑπομονῇ 1 longsuffering If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **endurance** with a relative clause. Alternate translation: “how I endure when I suffer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2TI 3 11 p093 οἵους διωγμοὺς ὑπήνεγκα 1 what kind of persecutions I endured Paul is reminding Timothy that he knows of the various ways in which Paul suffered and how he endured until God rescued him. Alternate translation: “how I endured various persecutions”
2TI 3 11 r9vk figs-metaphor ἐκ πάντων, με ἐρρύσατο ὁ Κύριος 1 the Lord rescued me from them all Paul speaks as if God had physically removed him from a situation of danger. Alternate translation: “the Lord preserved me through them all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TI 3 12 ke7f ζῆν εὐσεβῶς 1 to live piously The term **piously** means in an obedient way that honors God. Alternate translation: “to live in a godly way”
2TI 3 12 xm9l figs-activepassive διωχθήσονται 1 will be persecuted If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “people will persecute” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2TI 3 13 p094 figs-gendernotations ἄνθρωποι 1 men Here Paul is using the term **men** in a generic sense that can include both men and women. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2TI 3 13 xo4q figs-hendiadys πονηροὶ & ἄνθρωποι καὶ γόητες 1 evil men and impostors This is probably a hendiadys, and the **evil men and impostors** are not two groups of people, but one group of people. Alternate translation: “evil people who only pretend to follow Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
2TI 3 13 s7f2 γόητες 1 impostors The term **impostors** refers here to a person who wants other people to think he is a true Christian when he is not. Alternate translation: “people who are pretending to be believers”
2TI 3 13 imc8 figs-metaphor προκόψουσιν ἐπὶ τὸ χεῖρον 1 will advance unto the worse Paul speaks of evil people and their character as something that moves forward physically, making gradual progress in a direction. Alternate translation: “will become worse and worse” or “will become even more evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TI 3 13 p095 figs-idiom ἐπὶ τὸ χεῖρον 1 unto the worse This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “worse and worse” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2TI 3 13 eyx5 figs-metaphor πλανῶντες καὶ πλανώμενοι 1 leading astray and being led astray The expression **leading astray** uses the image of physically taking a person to a place that he didn’t think he was going to. This is a figurative reference to persuading someone to believe something that is not true. Alternate translation: “teaching lies and believing lies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TI 3 13 p096 figs-activepassive πλανῶντες καὶ πλανώμενοι 1 leading astray and being led astray If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “teaching lies and believing lies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2TI 3 14 ytg9 figs-metaphor μένε ἐν οἷς ἔμαθες 1 remain in the things you have learned Paul speaks of biblical instruction as if it were a place in which Timothy could stay. Alternate translation: “continue doing what you have learned” or “continue believing what you have learned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TI 3 14 p097 figs-activepassive ἐπιστώθης 1 become convinced of If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “are confident about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2TI 3 15 w9l5 figs-personification τὰ δυνάμενά σε σοφίσαι 1 which are able to make you wise Paul speaks of the Scriptures as if they were a teacher who could instruct people and help them become **wise**. It may be convenient in your translation to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “By studying them you can become wise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
2TI 3 15 p098 figs-abstractnouns εἰς σωτηρίαν διὰ πίστεως τῆς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 for salvation through the faith that is in Christ Jesus If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **salvation** with a verb such as “save.” Alternate translation: “so that you will know enough to trust Christ Jesus to save you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2TI 3 16 s274 figs-metaphor πᾶσα Γραφὴ θεόπνευστος καὶ 1 All Scripture is God-breathed The term **God-breathed** uses the image of breathing to indicate that the Scriptures come directly from God through his Spirit. Characteristically in the Bible, the breath of God represents the Spirit of God. Alternate translation: “God produced all Scripture as his Spirit directed people what to write, and it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TI 3 16 hvr1 πᾶσα Γραφὴ θεόπνευστος 1 All Scripture is God-breathed By **All Scripture**, Paul is referring to every part of Scripture, which, at that time, was what we know as the Old Testament. If it is confusing to refer to all of the books of the Old Testament with the singular word **Scripture**, you could change it to a plural word as in the UST and make the verbs plural. Alternate translation: “All of the Holy Writings are God-breathed”
2TI 3 16 uv35 ὠφέλιμος 1 is profitable Paul refers to the Scripture as **profitable** to convey the idea that Timothy and all believers will benefit when they use the Scripture to teach, reprove, correct, and train. Alternate translation: “you will benefit from it as you use it” or “it benefits everyone when we use it”
2TI 3 16 vl2n figs-abstractnouns πρὸς ἐλεγμόν 1 for reproof Paul instructs Timothy to use the Scriptures as the standard for knowing what is right and wrong and showing people that they are wrong. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **reproof** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “for showing people that they are wrong” or “for helping us to know when we are wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2TI 3 16 e5h9 figs-abstractnouns πρὸς ἐπανόρθωσιν 1 for correction Paul instructs Timothy to use the Scriptures as the standard for showing people how to make something right. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **correction** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “for showing people how to make things right” or “for showing us how to fix errors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2TI 3 16 y1hf figs-abstractnouns πρὸς παιδείαν τὴν ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ 1 and for the training that is in righteousness Paul instructs Timothy to use the Scriptures as the standard for training people how to live lives that are right with God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **righteousness** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “and for training people how to do what is right” or “and for training us to do what is right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2TI 3 17 nb12 figs-gendernotations ὁ τοῦ Θεοῦ ἄνθρωπος 1 the man of God Paul is using the word **man** here in a generic sense that includes all believers in God, whether male or female. Of course, Paul also intends for Timothy to apply this to himself. Alternate translation: “the person who serves God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2TI 3 17 uu7i ἄρτιος 1 proficient Alternate translation: “fully capable”
2TI 3 17 p099 figs-activepassive ἐξηρτισμένος 1 equipped If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “and have everything he needs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2TI 4 intro k2xa 0 # 2 Timothy 4 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>1. Paul gives a solemn charge to Timothy (4:1–8)<br>2. Paul tells Timothy how he is doing (4:9–18)<br>3. Paul sends personal greetings (4:19–22)<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### “I adjure you”<br><br>With these words Paul challenges Timothy in the most serious way possible to do what he is telling him to do. It is a way of commanding Timothy, not by Paul’s own authority, but by the authority that he then refers to, that of God and Jesus Christ. In other words, Paul is saying that God and Jesus Christ are commanding Timothy through Paul.<br><br>### Crown<br><br>Scripture uses the image of a crown to represent different things. In this chapter, Paul describes Christ as awarding a crown to believers as a metaphor for the reward that Christ will give them for having lived rightly on this earth.
2TI 4 1 eh3x διαμαρτύρομαι 1 I adjure you The word translated **adjure** is used to place someone under a serious and binding obligation. Think about the words that you use to do this in your language. This could refer to: (1) placing someone under an oath to do something. Alternate translation: “I place you under an oath” or “I hereby obligate you” (2) solemnly commanding someone with great authority. Alternate translation: “I solemnly urge you”
2TI 4 1 cb15 figs-explicit ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 before God and Christ Jesus Here the word **before** means “in front of,” that is, “in the presence of.” The implication is that God and Christ Jesus will witness and approve this command or oath. Alternate translation: “in the presence of God and Christ Jesus” or “with God and Christ Jesus as the witnesses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2TI 4 1 u32g figs-merism ζῶντας καὶ νεκρούς 1 the living and the dead Paul refers to **the living** and **the dead** together to mean all people, whether they are alive at the time of judgment or have died. Alternate translation: “those who are still alive and those who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
2TI 4 1 p100 figs-nominaladj ζῶντας καὶ νεκρούς 1 the living and the dead The terms **living** and **dead** are adjectives that Paul is using as nouns to refer to groups of people. If your language does not use adjectives in that way, you can translate these terms with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “those who are still alive and those who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
2TI 4 1 lwt2 figs-metonymy καὶ τὴν ἐπιφάνειαν αὐτοῦ, καὶ τὴν βασιλείαν αὐτοῦ 1 and by his appearing and his kingdom Paul refers to Christ’s return by association to the fact that he will appear once again to people on earth when he returns, and he refers to Christ’s rule as king by association to the **kingdom** that he will rule. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “and on Christ’s return and on his rule as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2TI 4 1 anqh καὶ τὴν ἐπιφάνειαν αὐτοῦ, καὶ τὴν βασιλείαν αὐτοῦ 1 and by his appearing and his kingdom This can be understood in two different ways, depending on if Paul is placing Timothy under an oath or giving Timothy a command. (1) If Paul is placing Timothy under an oath, then he is saying that these are the things that Timothy would be denying if he fails to fulfill the oath. Alternate translation: “with an oath as strong as your desire for Christ’s return and for his rule as king” (2) If Paul is introducing a command in this verse, then Paul is appealing to these things to strengthen his command. Alternate translation: “and as surely as Christ will return and rule as king”
2TI 4 2 j2z7 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 the word Paul is using the term **word** to refer to the whole message about Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “the Gospel message” or “the Good News” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2TI 4 2 zzh4 figs-merism εὐκαίρως, ἀκαίρως 1 opportunely, inopportunely Paul uses the opposite words **opportunely** and**inopportunely** to say that Timothy should be ready to preach about Jesus when it seems like a good time to do so and also when it does not seem like a good time. He is using the two types of occasions together to indicate all occasions. Alternate translation: “when it is convenient and when it is not convenient” or “at all times” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
2TI 4 2 g7ax figs-explicit ἔλεγξον 1 reprove The command to **reprove** implies that the action is directed toward people who have done something wrong and are in need of correction. Alternate translation: “correct those who have sinned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2TI 4 2 p101 ἐπιτίμησον 1 rebuke The word **rebuke** involves telling someone that they have done something wrong and warning them not to do it again. Alternate translation: “tell them not to sin”
2TI 4 2 p102 figs-hendiadys ἐν πάσῃ μακροθυμίᾳ καὶ διδαχῇ 1 with all patience and teaching Here, **patience and teaching** is a hendiadys, with **patience** modifying **teaching**. Alternate translation: “do these things by teaching very patiently” or “always do these things by teaching patiently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
2TI 4 2 g5r0 figs-explicit ἐν πάσῃ μακροθυμίᾳ καὶ διδαχῇ 1 with all patience and teaching The implication is that this is how Timothy should preach, reprove, rebuke, and exhort. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “do these things by teaching very patiently” or “always do these things by teaching patiently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2TI 4 2 p103 figs-hyperbole ἐν πάσῃ μακροθυμίᾳ καὶ διδαχῇ 1 with all patience and teaching Here, **all** could mean: (1) Timothy should always be patient when he teaches. Alternate translation: “always teaching patiently” (2) a generalization for emphasis, meaning that Timothy should be very patient. Alternate translation: “by teaching very patiently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2TI 4 3 jv7a ἔσται & καιρὸς ὅτε 1 there will be a time when Alternate translation: “the time will come when”
2TI 4 3 u2cc οὐκ ἀνέξονται 1 they will not endure Alternate translation: “they will no longer listen patiently to”
2TI 4 3 ilx7 figs-explicit οὐκ ἀνέξονται 1 they will not endure The context indicates that **they** means people who are a part of the community of believers. Alternate translation: “some believers will no longer listen patiently to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2TI 4 3 fyl3 figs-metonymy τῆς ὑγιαινούσης διδασκαλίας 1 healthy teaching The expression **healthy teaching** means “correct teaching” by association, since a healthy mind would recognize that correct teaching was reasonable. Alternate translation: “correct teaching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2TI 4 3 e5t2 figs-metaphor κατὰ τὰς ἰδίας ἐπιθυμίας, ἑαυτοῖς ἐπισωρεύσουσιν διδασκάλους 1 they will heap up for themselves teachers according to their own desires Paul speaks of how people will obtain many teachers as if they were putting them into a heap or pile. They will want many teachers, but not value these teachers for how they live godly lives or how accurately they teach. Alternate translation: “they will gather many teachers for themselves who will teach what they want” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TI 4 3 s375 figs-idiom κνηθόμενοι τὴν ἀκοήν 1 their ear itching Paul speaks of people badly wanting to hear something as if their ears itched and could only be relieved if they found many teachers who would tell them what they wanted to hear. Alternate translation: “because they want to hear it so badly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2TI 4 3 p104 figs-metonymy κνηθόμενοι τὴν ἀκοήν 1 their ear itching Paul uses the **ear** to mean hearing. Alternate translation: “because they want to hear it so badly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2TI 4 4 rh2i figs-metaphor ἀπὸ μὲν τῆς ἀληθείας τὴν ἀκοὴν ἀποστρέψουσιν 1 will both turn their ear away from the truth Paul speaks about people no longer paying attention as if they were physically turning their ears away so that they could not hear. Alternate translation: “will no longer pay attention to the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TI 4 4 p105 figs-metonymy ἀπὸ μὲν τῆς ἀληθείας τὴν ἀκοὴν ἀποστρέψουσιν 1 will both turn their ear away from the truth Paul uses the **ear** to mean listening. Listening, in turn, means paying attention. Alternate translation: “will no longer pay attention to the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2TI 4 4 xrv7 figs-metaphor ἐπὶ & τοὺς μύθους ἐκτραπήσονται 1 be turned aside to myths Paul speaks about people starting to pay attention to **myths** as if someone were getting them to wander off in the wrong direction. Alternate translation: “these teachers will get them to pay attention to stories that are not true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TI 4 4 p106 figs-activepassive ἐπὶ & τοὺς μύθους ἐκτραπήσονται 1 be turned aside to myths If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form, and you can state who would do the action. Alternate translation: “these teachers will get them to pay attention to stories that are not true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2TI 4 5 ehz7 figs-metaphor νῆφε 1 be sober Paul wants his readers to think correctly about everything, and so he speaks as if he wanted them to **be sober** rather than drunk. Alternate translation: “think clearly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TI 4 5 tv3k εὐαγγελιστοῦ 1 of an evangelist Alternate translation: “of a person who proclaims the good news about Jesus”
2TI 4 6 p107 ἐγὼ & ἤδη σπένδομαι 1 I am already being poured out While Paul speaks of his death as **already** happening, he means that it is an event that will happen soon. Alternate translation: “I will soon be poured out”
2TI 4 6 sh23 figs-metaphor ἐγὼ & ἤδη σπένδομαι 1 I am already being poured out Paul speaks of himself as if he were wine in a cup that was **being poured out** as a sacrifice to God. Alternate translation: “the sacrifice of my life to God will soon be complete” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TI 4 6 p108 figs-activepassive ἐγὼ & ἤδη σπένδομαι 1 I am already being poured out If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “My life will soon end as a sacrifice to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2TI 4 6 fb7l figs-euphemism ὁ καιρὸς τῆς ἀναλύσεώς μου ἐφέστηκεν 1 the time of my departure is here Paul refers to his death as a **departure**. This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant. Alternate translation: “soon I will die and leave this world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
2TI 4 7 d9ts figs-metaphor τὸν καλὸν ἀγῶνα ἠγώνισμαι 1 I have fought the good fight Paul speaks of himself as if he has been competing in an athletic contest. Here, **good** could mean: (1) the kind of effort Paul has made. Alternate translation: “I have done my best” (2) Paul has pursued a worthwhile endeavor. Alternate translation: “I have worked hard for what really matters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TI 4 7 kq83 figs-metaphor τὸν δρόμον τετέλεκα 1 I have finished the race Paul speaks of his life of service to God as if he had been running a **race** on foot. Alternate translation: “I have completed what I needed to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TI 4 7 vk2p figs-metaphor τὴν πίστιν τετήρηκα 1 I have kept the faith Paul speaks of **the faith**, by which he means his trust in Christ and his obedience to God, as if they were valuable objects that he has kept safe in his possession. This could mean: (1) Paul was faithful to do what God told him to do. Alternate translation: “I have remained faithful in doing my ministry” (2) Paul was faithful to teach the truth. Alternate translation: “I have preserved the teachings from any error” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TI 4 8 ujg5 figs-activepassive ἀπόκειταί μοι ὁ τῆς δικαιοσύνης στέφανος 1 the crown of righteousness has been reserved for me If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “God has reserved the crown of righteousness for me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2TI 4 8 hg8i figs-metaphor τῆς δικαιοσύνης στέφανος 1 the crown of righteousness Here, the **crown** could: (1) represent the reward that God gives to people who have lived the right way. Alternate translation: “the reward for the righteous” (2) represent righteousness itself. Just as the judge of a race gives a crown to the winner, when Paul finishes his life, God will declare that Paul is righteous. Alternate translation: “the reward that is righteousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TI 4 8 dwn6 translate-unknown στέφανος 1 crown See how you translated **crown** in [2:5](../02/05.md). The **crown** that Paul is using as an illustration of the future award from God was a wreath made of laurel tree leaves that was given to winners of athletic contests. You can use a word in your language that would refer to a prize for winning a contest. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2TI 4 8 n3k8 figs-explicit ἐν, ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ 1 on that day As in [1:12](../01/12.md), this refers to the **day** when Jesus returns to judge people. Alternate translation: “on the day of judgment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2TI 4 8 uh88 πᾶσιν τοῖς ἠγαπηκόσι τὴν ἐπιφάνειαν αὐτοῦ 1 those who have loved his appearing Alternate translation: “to all those who are looking forward to his return”
2TI 4 8 p109 figs-metonymy τὴν ἐπιφάνειαν αὐτοῦ 1 his appearing See how you translated **his appearing** in [4:1](../04/01.md). Paul is referring to Christ’s return by association with the fact that he will appear once again to people on earth when he returns. Alternate translation: “his return” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2TI 4 9 t8b7 σπούδασον ἐλθεῖν & ταχέως 1 come … quickly Alternate translation: “Come … as soon as possible”
2TI 4 10 e4xx translate-names Δημᾶς & Κρήσκης & Τίτος 1 Demas … Crescens … Titus **Demas**, **Crescens**, and **Titus** are names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2TI 4 10 ji2l figs-metonymy τὸν νῦν αἰῶνα 1 the present age The expression **the present age** refers to worldly things as opposed to the things of God. Paul refers to these worldly things by association with the present time when people generally desire them, as opposed to the future time when the things of God will be established throughout the earth. Alternate translation: “the temporary comforts of this world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2TI 4 10 u2qb figs-ellipsis Κρήσκης εἰς Γαλατίαν, Τίτος εἰς Δαλματίαν 1 Crescens to Galatia, Titus to Dalmatia Here Paul leaves out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. He means that like Demas, **Crescens** and **Titus** have left him. However, he is probably not saying that they did this because they also “loved this present age” like Demas. It is more likely that they are traveling to help the churches. Alternate translation: “Crescens has left me and gone to Galatia, and Titus has left me and gone to Dalmatia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2TI 4 10 gs61 translate-names Γαλατίαν & Δαλματίαν 1 Galatia … Dalmatia This are the names of parts of the Roman empire. **Galatia** is an official Roman province and **Dalmatia** is an area in the southern part of the province of Illyricum. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2TI 4 11 w21u μοι εὔχρηστος εἰς διακονίαν 1 he is useful to me for service This could mean: (1) Mark is **useful** in helping Paul to take care of his personal needs. Alternate translation: “he can help take care of my needs” (2) Mark is **useful** in helping Paul minister to others, especially by preaching and teaching. Alternate translation: “he is helpful to me in my ministry”
2TI 4 12 y60r ἀπέστειλα 1 I sent Timothy is at Ephesus when he receives this letter. It may be that Tychicus is the one who carried this letter to Timothy at Ephesus. If so, then Paul is writing from Timothy’s perspective, who would view Paul’s sending of Tychicus as a past event. If this is confusing in your language and you want to include this possibility, you may need to change the tense of the verb to future. Alternate translation: “soon I will be sending”
2TI 4 13 d5rw translate-unknown φελόνην 1 cloak The term **cloak** refers to a heavy garment worn over clothes. Alternate translation: “coat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2TI 4 13 v9b6 translate-names Κάρπῳ 1 Carpus **Carpus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2TI 4 13 k6tj translate-unknown τὰ βιβλία 1 the books The term **books** refers to scrolls. A scroll was a type of book made of a long sheet of papyrus or leather. After writing on a scroll or reading it, people would roll it up using rods on the ends. Alternate translation: “the scrolls” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2TI 4 13 e395 translate-unknown μάλιστα τὰς μεμβράνας 1 especially the parchments The term **parchments** may refer to a specific type of scroll. Alternate translation: “especially those made from animal skins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2TI 4 14 un4v translate-unknown Ἀλέξανδρος ὁ χαλκεὺς 1 Alexander the coppersmith The term **coppersmith** refers to a person who worked with things made of copper and other metals. Alternate translation: “Alexander, who works with metal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2TI 4 14 kv94 translate-names Ἀλέξανδρος 1 Alexander **Alexander** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2TI 4 14 wbx4 figs-metaphor ἀποδώσει αὐτῷ ὁ Κύριος κατὰ τὰ ἔργα αὐτοῦ 1 The Lord will repay him according to his deeds Paul speaks of punishment as if it were repayment. Alternate translation: “the Lord will give him the right punishment for what he has done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TI 4 15 i4aj figs-metonymy ἀντέστη τοῖς ἡμετέροις λόγοις 1 he … opposed our words The term **words** refers to the message that Paul and Timothy and their co-workers teach. Alternate translation: “he … opposed the message that we teach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2TI 4 16 v847 ἐν τῇ πρώτῃ μου ἀπολογίᾳ 1 At my first defense Paul is referring to the opening session of his trial. By writing **first**, he is likely indicating that he will have to appear in court again. Alternate translation: “At the opening session of my trial” or “When I first appeared in court and explained my actions”
2TI 4 16 f2c3 οὐδείς μοι παρεγένετο 1 no one appeared with me Paul explains to Timothy that he had to go to court alone, without any supporters. Alternate translation: “no one testified on my behalf”
2TI 4 16 rm2t figs-activepassive μὴ αὐτοῖς λογισθείη 1 May it not be counted against them If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “May God not hold it against them” or “I pray that God does not punish those believers for deserting me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2TI 4 17 t1fw figs-metaphor ὁ & Κύριός μοι παρέστη 1 the Lord stood with me Paul is speaking as if **the Lord** had physically **stood** with him. Alternate translation: “the Lord helped me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TI 4 17 y69m figs-activepassive ἵνα δι’ ἐμοῦ τὸ κήρυγμα πληροφορηθῇ 1 so that through me, the proclamation might be fully carried out If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. This could mean: (1) at his trial, Paul was able to explain the entire message God had given him to proclaim. Alternate translation: “so that I was able to proclaim all of the Lord’s message” (2) Paul was able to continue proclaiming God’s message right through to this time when he expected to lose his life. Alternate translation: “so that I was able to continue proclaiming the Lord’s message right to the end” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2TI 4 17 p113 figs-hyperbole καὶ ἀκούσωσιν πάντα τὰ ἔθνη 1 and all the Gentiles might hear Here, **all** could be: (1) a figurative generalization. Alternate translation: “so that as many Gentiles as possible could hear it” (2) a reference to all the Gentiles in the court. Alternate translation: “so that all the Gentiles who were there might hear” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2TI 4 17 gsr8 figs-metaphor ἐρύσθην ἐκ στόματος λέοντος 1 I was rescued out of the mouth of the lion Paul speaks as if he had been in danger of being killed by a **lion** at his court appearance. He could mean the physical danger of being sentenced to execution, or the spiritual danger of being tempted not to speak boldly for Jesus, or both. It would probably be best to leave both possibilities open in your translation. Alternate translation: “I was rescued from great danger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2TI 4 17 p114 figs-activepassive ἐρύσθην ἐκ στόματος λέοντος 1 I was rescued out of the mouth of the lion If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “God rescued me from great danger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2TI 4 18 p115 figs-idiom εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας τῶν αἰώνων 1 to the ages of the ages This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “forever and ever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2TI 4 19 n4zc figs-metonymy τὸν Ὀνησιφόρου οἶκον 1 the household of Onesiphorus See how you translated this phrase in [1:16](../01/16.md). The word **household** refers to **Onesiphorus** and all the people in his family, possibly even his servants. Alternate translation: “Onesiphorus and everyone who lives with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2TI 4 19 mef8 translate-names Ὀνησιφόρου 1 of Onesiphorus **Onesiphorus** is the name of a man. See how you translated this name in [1:16](../01/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2TI 4 20 lie9 translate-names Ἔραστος & Τρόφιμον 1 Erastus … Trophimus **Erastus** and **Trophimus** are the names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2TI 4 20 wp9h translate-names Μιλήτῳ 1 Miletus **Miletus** is the name of a city to the south of Ephesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2TI 4 21 cvc7 σπούδασον & ἐλθεῖν 1 Hasten to come Alternate translation: “Do your best to come” or “Try as hard as you can to come”
2TI 4 21 eh95 figs-explicit πρὸ χειμῶνος 1 before winter The implication is that Timothy should try to come to Paul before the cold weather arrives and makes travel difficult or even impossible. If **winter** is the warm season in your area and summer is the cold season, or if your area does not have a cold season but a rainy season, you could use a more general expression. Alternate translation: “before the cold weather makes travel difficult” or “before the weather changes and makes travel difficult” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2TI 4 21 z1j9 figs-ellipsis ἀσπάζεταί σε Εὔβουλος, καὶ Πούδης, καὶ Λίνος, καὶ Κλαυδία, καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ 1 Eubulus greets you, and Pudens, and Linus, and Claudia, and the brothers Here Paul leaves out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. To make sure that the meaning is clear, you could supply these words. The people listed after Eubulus are also greeting Timothy. Eubulus is not greeting them. Alternate translation: “Eubulus greets you, and so do Pudens, Linus, Claudia, and all the believers here” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2TI 4 21 p7px translate-names Εὔβουλος & Πούδης & Λίνος 1 Eubulus … Pudens … Linus **Eubulus**, **Pudens**, and **Linus** are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2TI 4 21 er77 translate-names Κλαυδία 1 Claudia **Claudia** is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2TI 4 21 mk26 figs-gendernotations οἱ ἀδελφοὶ 1 the brothers The word **brothers** means all believers, whether male or female. Alternate translation: “all the believers here” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2TI 4 22 tx26 figs-you ὁ Κύριος μετὰ τοῦ πνεύματός σου 1 The Lord be with your spirit Paul ends his letter with a blessing for Timothy. Here, **you** is singular and refers to Timothy. Alternate translation: “I pray that the Lord makes your spirit strong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
2TI 4 22 p119 figs-synecdoche ὁ Κύριος μετὰ τοῦ πνεύματός σου 1 The Lord be with your spirit Paul describes Timothy as a whole person by reference to his **spirit**, perhaps because he is wishing particularly for Timothy to receive spiritual strengthening. Alternate translation: “I pray that the Lord makes you strong” or “I pray that the Lord will strengthen you spiritually” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
2TI 4 22 k85y figs-you ἡ χάρις μεθ’ ὑμῶν 1 Grace be with you Paul ends his letter with a second blessing. The **you** here is plural and refers to all of the believers who are with Timothy. Alternate translation: “May grace be with all of you there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
2TI 4 22 p120 ἡ χάρις μεθ’ ὑμῶν 1 Grace be with you If it would be helpful in your language, you could state explicitly who Paul wishes will make this happen. Alternate translation: “May God give grace to all of you”
1 Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote
2 2TI front intro s7fk 0 # Introduction to 2 Timothy<br><br>## Part 1: General Introduction<br><br>### Outline of the book of 2 Timothy<br><br>1. Paul greets Timothy and encourages him to endure hardship as he serves God (1:1–2:13).<br>2. Paul gives general instructions to Timothy (2:14–26).<br>3. Paul warns Timothy about future events and instructs him about how to carry out his service to God (3:1–4:8).<br>4. Paul makes personal remarks (4:9–22).<br><br>### Who wrote the book of 2 Timothy?<br><br>Paul wrote 2 Timothy. He was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.<br><br>This book is the second letter Paul wrote to Timothy. Timothy was his disciple and close friend. Paul wrote this letter while in prison in Rome. Paul would die soon after writing this letter.<br><br>### What is the book of 2 Timothy about?<br><br>Paul had left Timothy in the city of Ephesus to help the believers there. Paul wrote this letter to instruct Timothy about various matters. The topics he addressed include warnings about false teachers and advice about enduring difficult situations. This letter also shows how Paul was training Timothy to be a leader among the churches.<br><br>### How should the title of this book be translated?<br><br>Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “2 Timothy” or “Second Timothy.” Or they may choose a different title, such as “Paul’s Second Letter to Timothy” or “The Second Letter to Timothy.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])<br><br>## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts<br><br>### What is the soldier imagery in 2 Timothy?<br><br>As Paul waited in prison, knowing he would die soon, he spoke of being a soldier of Jesus Christ. Soldiers have to obey to their leaders. In the same way, Christians have to obey Jesus. As “soldiers” of Christ, believers are to obey his commands, even if they die as a result.<br><br>### What does it mean that God inspired Scripture?<br><br>God is the true author of Scripture. He inspired the human authors who wrote the books. That means God in some way caused the people to write what they wrote. This is why the Bible is also referred to as God’s word. This implies several things about it. First, everything that the Bible teaches is free from error and can be trusted. Second, God will always preserve his Scripture for every generation of people. Third, God’s word should be translated into all the world’s languages.<br><br>## Part 3: Important Translation Issues<br><br>### Singular and plural “you”<br><br>In this book, the word “I” refers to Paul. Here the word “you” is almost always singular and refers to Timothy. The exception to this is 4:22. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])<br><br>### Inclusive and exclusive “we” and “us”<br><br>In this book, “we” and “us” include the writer, Paul, the recipient, Timothy, and all believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])<br><br>### What did Paul mean by the expressions “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?<br><br>Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union between Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.<br><br>### What are the major textual issues in the text of the book of 2 Timothy?<br><br>For the following verses, the oldest Greek manuscripts differ from later Greek manuscripts. Modern translations may also differ depending on the Greek manuscript that they translate from. The ULT text translates the Greek from the oldest manuscripts, and puts the differences from later manuscripts in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible already exists in the general region, translators should consider following the decision in that translation. If not, translators are advised to follow the oldest Greek manuscripts as reflected in the ULT text.<br>* “Because of this, I was appointed a preacher, an apostle, and a teacher” (1:11). Some later manuscripts read, “Because of this, I was appointed a preacher, an apostle, and a teacher to the Gentiles.”<br>* “Warn them before God” (2:14). Some later manuscripts read, “Warn them before the Lord.”<br><br>(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
3 2TI 1 intro p5lf 0 # 2 Timothy 1 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>Paul formally introduces this letter in verses 1–2. Writers often began letters in this way in the ancient Near East.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### Spiritual children<br><br>Paul discipled Timothy as a Christian and a church leader. Paul may also have led him to believe in Christ. Therefore, Paul calls Timothy “beloved child.” So even though Paul was not Timothy’s father, Paul speaks of his relationship with Timothy as that of a father and son in a spiritual sense. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])<br><br>## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter<br><br>### Persecution<br><br>Paul was in prison when he wrote this letter. Paul encourages Timothy to be willing to suffer for the gospel.
4 2TI 1 1 ha4l Παῦλος 1 Paul This letter follows the normal custom of the time by beginning with the name and identity of the author, then mentioning the recipient (in verse 2). Your language may have a particular way of introducing the author of a letter. If so, you could use it in your translation. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, am writing this letter”
5 2TI 1 1 vl2g διὰ θελήματος Θεοῦ 1 through the will of God Paul became an apostle because God wanted him to be an apostle. Alternate translation: “because of God’s will” or “because God wanted it to be so”
6 2TI 1 1 e1lg κατ’ 1 according to This could mean: (1) God appointed Paul to tell others about the promise of life in Jesus. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of announcing” (2) Paul became an apostle because he himself received the promise of life in Jesus. Alternate translation: “as a result of receiving”
7 2TI 1 1 m9kv figs-metaphor ζωῆς τῆς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 of life that is in Christ Jesus Paul speaks of **life** as if it were an object inside of Jesus. This refers to the life people receive as a result of belonging to Christ Jesus. Alternate translation: “of the life that we receive as a result of belonging to Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
8 2TI 1 2 rp5u Τιμοθέῳ 1 to Timothy Your language may have a particular way of introducing the person who receives a letter. If so, you could use it in your translation. Alternate translation: “This letter is for you, Timothy”
9 2TI 1 2 ey7g figs-metaphor ἀγαπητῷ τέκνῳ 1 my beloved child Paul was not Timothy’s father, but he uses the term **child** to express his love and approval of Timothy. It is also likely that Paul introduced Timothy to Christ, and so Paul considered him his child in a spiritual sense. Alternate translation: “who is like a beloved son to me” or “you are like a dear child to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
10 2TI 1 2 w43q translate-blessing χάρις, ἔλεος, εἰρήνη, ἀπὸ 1 Grace, mercy, and peace from After stating the name of the author and the person who is receiving it (Timothy), Paul adds a blessing to Timothy. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing in your language. Alternate translation: “may you experience kindness, mercy, and peace within you from” or “I pray that you will have grace, mercy, and peace from” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
11 2TI 1 2 p003 figs-abstractnouns χάρις, ἔλεος, εἰρήνη 1 Grace, mercy, and peace Paul’s blessing to Timothy includes the three abstract nouns **Grace**, **mercy**, and **peace**. Your language may have a particular way of expressing these concepts, such as with verbs. If so, you could use them in your translation. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
12 2TI 1 2 ub7c guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Θεοῦ Πατρὸς 1 God the Father **Father** is an important title for God. Here, **Father** could refer to: (1) the Father of Christ. (2) the Father of believers. Alternate translation: “God, who is the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
13 2TI 1 2 dcr3 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 our In this book, unless otherwise noted, the words **we**, **us**, and **our** refer to Paul (the writer of this letter), Timothy (the one to whom this letter is written), and, by extension, all believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
14 2TI 1 3 p004 figs-abstractnouns χάριν ἔχω τῷ Θεῷ 1 I have gratitude to God If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **gratitude** with a verb or an adjective. Alternate translation: “I thank God” or “I am thankful to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
15 2TI 1 3 tvb7 figs-idiom ᾧ λατρεύω ἀπὸ προγόνων 1 whom I serve from my ancestors This is an idiom that means that Paul’s family has been serving God for many generations. Alternate translation: “whom my ancestors served and I serve, as well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
16 2TI 1 3 ha9d figs-metaphor ἐν καθαρᾷ συνειδήσει 1 with a clean conscience Paul speaks of his **conscience** as if it could be physically **clean**. A person with a **clean conscience** does not feel guilty because he has always tried to do what was right. Alternate translation: “knowing I have tried my hardest to do what is right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
17 2TI 1 3 rz7s figs-abstractnouns ὡς ἀδιάλειπτον ἔχω τὴν περὶ σοῦ μνείαν 1 as I have constant remembrance of you Paul speaks of the action of remembering by using the abstract noun **remembrance**. Your language may have a particular way of expressing this concept, such as with a verb. If so, you could use it in your translation. Alternate translation: “as I think about you constantly in my prayers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
18 2TI 1 3 p005 figs-yousingular σοῦ 1 you The word **you** is singular here and throughout the book, since Paul is addressing Timothy. A note will discuss the one exception in 4:22. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
19 2TI 1 3 pa6q figs-merism νυκτὸς καὶ ἡμέρας 1 night and day Here, **night and day** are used together to refer to all the time included in the night and the day. This means that Paul prays to God often, no matter what time it is. It does not mean that he prays all night and all day without ever stopping. Alternate translation: “at all times” Alternate translation: “always” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
20 2TI 1 4 p006 figs-explicit μεμνημένος σου τῶν δακρύων 1 remembering your tears It is implied that Paul is referring here to the time when Paul was leaving Timothy. If this is unclear, you could include this information. Alternate translation: “remembering how you cried when I left you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
21 2TI 1 4 kk82 figs-metonymy σου τῶν δακρύων 1 your tears Here, **your tears** refers to the act of Timothy’s crying or being very sad. Alternate translation: “that you cried” or “your sadness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
22 2TI 1 4 gu8c figs-metaphor χαρᾶς πληρωθῶ 1 I may be filled with joy Paul speaks of himself as if he were a container that could be **filled**. Alternate translation: “I may be very joyful” or “I may rejoice a lot” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
23 2TI 1 4 p007 figs-activepassive χαρᾶς πληρωθῶ 1 I may be filled with joy If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “joy may fill me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
24 2TI 1 5 ayl4 figs-idiom ὑπόμνησιν λαβὼν 1 having received remembrance This is an idiom that simply means, “remembering.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
25 2TI 1 5 buc3 figs-abstractnouns τῆς ἐν σοὶ ἀνυποκρίτου πίστεως 1 of the genuine faith in you Paul refers to Timothy’s **faith** with an abstract noun. Your language may have a particular way of expressing this concept, such as with a verb. If so, you could use it in your translation. Alternate translation: “that you genuinely believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
26 2TI 1 5 p008 figs-metaphor τῆς ἐν σοὶ ἀνυποκρίτου πίστεως 1 of the genuine faith in you Paul speaks of **faith** as if it were an object inside of Timothy. Paul is referring to Timothy’s faith in God here, not to anyone’s faith in Timothy. Alternate translation: “your genuine faith” or “your faith that is genuine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
27 2TI 1 5 vgz2 figs-personification ἐν σοὶ ἀνυποκρίτου πίστεως, ἥτις ἐνῴκησεν πρῶτον ἐν τῇ μάμμῃ σου, Λωΐδι, καὶ τῇ μητρί σου, Εὐνίκῃ; πέπεισμαι δὲ ὅτι καὶ ἐν σοί 1 of … faith in you, which dwelt first in your grandmother Lois and your mother Eunice, and I am convinced that it is also in you Paul is speaking of their **faith** as if it were something that was alive and lived **in** each of them. Alternate translation: “of the genuine faith that you have. Lois, your grandmother, and then Eunice, your mother, had this faith in God, and now I am confident that you have this same genuine faith as well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
28 2TI 1 5 l8wc translate-names Λωΐδι 1 Lois **Lois** is the name of a woman, Timothy’s grandmother, who is probably his mother’s mother. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
29 2TI 1 5 p009 translate-names Εὐνίκῃ 1 Eunice **Eunice** is the name of a woman, Timothy’s mother. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
30 2TI 1 6 j58k δι’ ἣν αἰτίαν 1 for which reason Paul writes that the **reason** for asking Timothy to rekindle his gift is that he is confident of Timothy’s faith in Jesus. Alternate translation: “for this reason” or “because of your faith in Jesus”
31 2TI 1 6 h6eq figs-metaphor ἀναζωπυρεῖν τὸ χάρισμα 1 to rekindle the gift Paul speaks about Timothy’s need to start using his **gift** again as if he were restarting a fire. Alternate translation: “be eager once more to use the gift” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
32 2TI 1 6 i977 translate-symaction τὸ χάρισμα τοῦ Θεοῦ, ὅ ἐστιν ἐν σοὶ διὰ τῆς ἐπιθέσεως τῶν χειρῶν μου 1 the gift of God that is in you through the laying on of my hands Paul placed his **hands** on Timothy and prayed that God would give him power from God’s Spirit to enable him to do the work that God had called him to do. Then Timothy received the gift from the Holy Spirit. See how you translated this in 1 Tim 4:14. Alternate translation: “the gift of God that you received when I prayed for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
33 2TI 1 6 p010 figs-metaphor τὸ χάρισμα τοῦ Θεοῦ, ὅ ἐστιν ἐν σοὶ διὰ τῆς ἐπιθέσεως τῶν χειρῶν μου 1 the gift of God that is in you through the laying on of my hands Paul speaks of **the gift** as an object inside of Timothy. If the words **that is in you** do not clearly communicate in your language that Timothy received the gift, you could translate it with a verb that expressing the idea of giving or receiving. Alternate translation: “the gift of God that you received when I laid my hands on you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
34 2TI 1 6 s6vb figs-explicit τὸ χάρισμα τοῦ Θεοῦ, ὅ ἐστιν ἐν σοὶ διὰ τῆς ἐπιθέσεως τῶν χειρῶν μου 1 the gift of God that is in you through the laying on of my hands It is implied that this is a spiritual gift that enables Timothy to do the work of ministry that God has called him to do, and that Paul also prayed for Timothy as he laid his hands on him. If these things are not clear, you may want to include this information in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
35 2TI 1 7 u8vl grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 For Here, **For** indicates that this verse provides another reason for Paul’s instruction in the previous verse that Timothy should use his spiritual gift. If it would be helpful in your language, you could replace **For** with this information here. Alternate translation: “Another reason why I want you to start using again the gift God that gave you is that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
36 2TI 1 7 h1z3 οὐ & ἔδωκεν ἡμῖν ὁ Θεὸς πνεῦμα δειλίας, ἀλλὰ δυνάμεως, καὶ ἀγάπης, καὶ σωφρονισμοῦ 1 God did not give us a spirit of fear, but of power, and of love, and of discipline Here, **spirit** could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “God’s Holy Spirit does not cause us to be afraid. He causes us to have power and love and discipline” (2) the character of a human being. Alternate translation: “God does not cause us to be afraid but to have power and love and discipline”
37 2TI 1 7 p011 figs-abstractnouns δυνάμεως, καὶ ἀγάπης, καὶ σωφρονισμοῦ 1 of power, and of love, and of discipline Paul uses abstract nouns to refer to three things that Timothy should be able to do. Your language may have a particular way of expressing these concepts, such as with verbs. If so, you could use them in your translation. Alternate translation: “one that makes us able to obey, to love, and to control ourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
38 2TI 1 7 k6g7 σωφρονισμοῦ 1 of discipline Here, **discipline** could refer to: (1) self-control. Alternate translation: “of the ability to control ourselves” (2) the power to correct or even to control others. Alternate translation: “of the ability to correct others”
39 2TI 1 8 fk9z figs-metonymy τὸ μαρτύριον 1 the testimony Paul may be using the word **testimony** to refer to the activity of telling others about the Lord and not to the message itself. Alternate translation: “of testifying” or “of telling others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
40 2TI 1 8 blk9 τὸν δέσμιον αὐτοῦ 1 his prisoner Paul is not being held **prisoner** by the Lord. He is a prisoner because he has testified about the Lord. Alternate translation: “a prisoner for his sake” or “a prisoner for the Lord”
41 2TI 1 8 ry82 συνκακοπάθησον τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ 1 suffer together for the gospel The term **together** could mean: (1) Timothy should suffer together with Paul. (2) Timothy should suffer together with all Christians who suffer.
42 2TI 1 8 xa86 συνκακοπάθησον τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ 1 suffer together for the gospel Here, **for the gospel** means “for the sake of telling other people the good news about Jesus.” Alternate translation: “along with me, accept the suffering that results from telling other people the good news about Jesus”
43 2TI 1 8 hi9a τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ, κατὰ δύναμιν Θεοῦ 1 for the gospel, according to the power of God Paul is reminding Timothy that God provides people with **power** when they suffer so that they can endure the suffering. Alternate translation: “for the gospel, allowing God to make you strong”
44 2TI 1 9 ld55 figs-metonymy καλέσαντος κλήσει ἁγίᾳ 1 called us with a holy calling Here, **with a holy calling** could refer to: (1) what results from the calling. The call produces holy people or people set apart for God. Alternate translation: “called us with a calling that sets us apart as holy to God” (2) the source of the calling, which is God, who is holy. Alternate translation: “called us by means of his own holy calling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
45 2TI 1 9 lmas οὐ κατὰ τὰ ἔργα ἡμῶν 1 not according to our works It may be helpful to start a new sentence here. If you do start a new sentence, for clarity you may wish to repeat some words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “He did not save us and call us because of our works”
46 2TI 1 9 kyr5 figs-hendiadys ἀλλὰ κατὰ ἰδίαν πρόθεσιν καὶ χάριν 1 but according to his own purpose and grace Here the words **purpose** and **grace** work together to mean “gracious purpose.” Paul is saying that God’s purpose or plan for us includes showing us grace or kindness through Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “but because of his gracious purpose” or “but because he planned to show us kindness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
47 2TI 1 9 p012 figs-activepassive καὶ χάριν, τὴν δοθεῖσαν ἡμῖν ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 and grace, which was given to us in Christ Jesus If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “and grace, which God gave to us in Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
48 2TI 1 9 pq1z figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 in Christ Jesus Paul speaks of God’s **purpose and grace** or “gracious purpose” as if it were an object inside of **Christ Jesus**. This refers to God’s plan to save people that Jesus fulfilled. So when people begin a relationship with Jesus, then God saves them. Alternate translation: “through our relationship to Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
49 2TI 1 9 zq7m figs-idiom πρὸ χρόνων αἰωνίων 1 before eternal times This is an idiom that indicates that God decided to save through faith in Christ before time and the creation of the world. Alternate translation: “before time began” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
50 2TI 1 10 h5e5 figs-metaphor φανερωθεῖσαν δὲ νῦν 1 and which now has been revealed Paul speaks of God’s gracious plan to save us as if it were an object that could be uncovered and shown to people through the arrival of Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “and which now people can know” or “and which now people can experience” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
51 2TI 1 10 p013 figs-activepassive φανερωθεῖσαν δὲ νῦν 1 and which now has been revealed If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “which now God has revealed” or “which now God has allowed people to know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
52 2TI 1 10 i3wl figs-metaphor φωτίσαντος δὲ ζωὴν καὶ ἀφθαρσίαν διὰ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου 1 and brought to light life and immortality through the gospel Paul refers to **life** and **immortality** as if they were objects that could be brought from darkness into light so that people could see them. He is speaking of revealing something or making it known to people. Alternate translation: “and revealed life and immortality through the gospel” or “and declared life and immortality through the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
53 2TI 1 10 a1n7 figs-hendiadys ζωὴν καὶ ἀφθαρσίαν 1 life and immortality Here, **life** and **immortality** are probably working together to mean “immortal life.” Alternate translation: “eternal life” or “incorruptible life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
54 2TI 1 11 tb9b figs-activepassive ἐτέθην ἐγὼ κῆρυξ 1 I was appointed a herald If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “God chose me to be a herald” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
55 2TI 1 11 p014 translate-unknown κῆρυξ 1 a herald A **herald** is someone who is sent out to announce a message. If your language does not have a similar term and your readers would not know what a **herald** is, you can use a general expression. Alternate translation: “a messenger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
56 2TI 1 11 p015 figs-metaphor κῆρυξ 1 a herald Paul compares himself to a **herald** because God has sent him out to announce the gospel message. Alternate translation: “a preacher” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
57 2TI 1 12 j37g δι’ ἣν αἰτίαν 1 for which reason Paul provides the **reason** for his suffering by referring back to his status as an apostle. Alternate translation: “because I am an apostle”
58 2TI 1 12 y8l4 figs-explicit καὶ ταῦτα πάσχω 1 I also suffer also these things Paul does not mention the specific **things** that he is **suffering**, but from the context of the letter, the implication is that he is referring to suffering as a prisoner. Alternate translation: “I also suffer as a prisoner” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
59 2TI 1 12 td39 πέπεισμαι 1 I am certain Paul expresses that he is **certain** that God will make everything right in the end. Alternate translation: “I am sure”
60 2TI 1 12 p6pi figs-metaphor τὴν παραθήκην μου φυλάξαι 1 to guard my deposit Paul is using a metaphor of a person leaving something with another person who is supposed to protect it until he gives it back to the first person. The two people involved are Jesus and Paul, but it is not clear which one is holding the **deposit**. This could mean: (1) Paul is trusting Jesus to keep something safe that Paul has entrusted to Jesus. This could be Paul’s own life, or, more specifically, that Paul would remain faithful to Jesus all of his life. Alternate translation: “to keep me faithful to him” (2) Paul is trusting Jesus to preserve the good news that Jesus has deposited with Paul for Paul to preach. Alternate translation: “to help me keep preaching his message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
61 2TI 1 12 hhu5 figs-possession τὴν παραθήκην μου 1 my deposit The term **my** here conveys the idea that this **deposit** is associated with Paul in some way. The particular association depends on what we consider the deposit to be. This could mean: (1) the deposit is associated with Paul because it is Paul’s own life or Paul’s faith in Jesus. Alternate translation: “my faithfulness to him” (2) the deposit is associated with Paul because it is the gospel message that Paul preaches. Alternate translation: “the gospel message that he has entrusted to me to preach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
62 2TI 1 12 qcu3 figs-explicit ἐκείνην τὴν ἡμέραν 1 that day This refers to the **day** when Jesus returns for judgment. Alternate translation: “the day of judgment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
63 2TI 1 13 h1qd figs-metonymy ὑγιαινόντων λόγων 1 of the healthy words Paul wants Timothy to teach the things that he taught and thereby to follow his example. The expression **healthy words** means “the correct message” by association, since a healthy mind would recognize that the correct message was reasonable. Alternate translation: “of the correct message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
64 2TI 1 13 p016 figs-metonymy λόγων 1 of … words Paul uses the term **words** to describe the expression in words of what Christians believe. Alternate translation: “of … message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
65 2TI 1 13 p017 figs-abstractnouns ἐν πίστει καὶ ἀγάπῃ τῇ ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 in the faith and love that are in Christ Jesus Paul uses two abstract nouns, **faith** and **love**, to refer to actions that Timothy should do. Your language may have a particular way of expressing these concepts, such as with verbs. If so, you could use them in your translation. Alternate translation: “trusting in Christ Jesus and loving others because you belong to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
66 2TI 1 13 b2ld ἐν πίστει καὶ ἀγάπῃ τῇ ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 in the faith and love that are in Christ Jesus Here, **love** could refer to: (1) the love that Timothy should show others. Alternate translation: “trusting in Christ Jesus and loving others because you belong to him” (2) the love that Timothy should show to God. Alternate translation: “trusting in Christ Jesus and loving him”
67 2TI 1 13 ix6w figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 in Christ Jesus Paul speaks of **faith** and **love** as if they were objects inside of **Christ Jesus**. This refers to the faith and love that Jesus enables us to have when we belong to him. See how you translated this phrase in 1:9. Alternate translation: “ours through our relationship to Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
68 2TI 1 14 i5g5 figs-explicit τὴν καλὴν παραθήκην 1 the good deposit Here, **the good deposit** refers to the gospel message that God has entrusted to Timothy to share with his people. Alternate translation: “the good message entrusted to you for God’s people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
69 2TI 1 14 cb5q figs-explicit τὴν καλὴν παραθήκην φύλαξον 1 Guard the good deposit Timothy needs to be alert to protect the gospel message because people will oppose him and try to distort what he says and teaches, turning it into a different message. Alternate translation: “Protect the good deposit against those who will try to distort it” or “Because people will try to distort the gospel message, guard it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
70 2TI 1 14 a3v2 διὰ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 through the Holy Spirit Here, **through** means “by means of” or “by the power of.” Alternate translation: “by means of the Holy Spirit” or “with the help of the Holy Spirit”
71 2TI 1 15 p018 figs-hyperbole πάντες οἱ ἐν τῇ Ἀσίᾳ 1 all who are in Asia The word **all** could mean: (1) “many, but not all” in the strict sense, since Timothy and Onesiphorus did not turn away from him. So this would be an example of hyperbole. (2) the men who came to Rome with him from Asia Minor. Alternate translation: “all who came with me from Asia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
72 2TI 1 15 p6f4 figs-metaphor ἀπεστράφησάν με 1 turned away from me This is a metaphor that means they left Paul and stopped helping him. Alternate translation: “have deserted me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
73 2TI 1 15 p020 figs-explicit ἀπεστράφησάν με 1 turned away from me Paul assumes that Timothy would know that the reason that the believers from Asia had abandoned him was because the authorities had put him in prison. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “have deserted me because I am in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
74 2TI 1 15 x6cc translate-names Φύγελος & Ἑρμογένης 1 Phygelus **Phygelus** and **Hermogenes** are the names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
75 2TI 1 16 izk9 translate-blessing δῴη ἔλεος ὁ Κύριος τῷ Ὀνησιφόρου οἴκῳ 1 May the Lord grant mercy to the household of Onesiphorus Paul is asking God to bless the family of **Onesiphorus**. You can express this as either a blessing or a prayer, in whichever way is more natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I pray that the Lord will be kind to the family of Onesiphorus” or “May the Lord bless the family of Onesiphorus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
76 2TI 1 16 e6hl translate-names Ὀνησιφόρου 1 of Onesiphorus **Onesiphorus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
77 2TI 1 16 zz44 figs-metonymy τῷ Ὀνησιφόρου οἴκῳ 1 to the household of Onesiphorus The word **household** refers to **Onesiphorus** and to all the people in his family, possibly even his servants. Alternate translation: “to Onesiphorus and everyone who lives with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
78 2TI 1 16 td1q figs-metonymy τὴν ἅλυσίν μου οὐκ ἐπησχύνθη 1 was not ashamed of my chain The word **chain** refers to being in prison. Onesiphorus was not ashamed that Paul was in prison but came to visit him frequently. Alternate translation: “was not ashamed of my imprisonment” or “was not ashamed of my being in prison” or “was not ashamed of me, even though I was in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
79 2TI 1 17 xfg1 grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλὰ 1 but Here, **but** indicates a contrast between the previous verse and this verse. Instead of being ashamed that Paul was in prison, Onesiphorus searched for Paul and found him there. Use whatever form is most natural in your language to show this contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
80 2TI 1 18 p3di translate-blessing δῴη αὐτῷ ὁ Κύριος, εὑρεῖν ἔλεος παρὰ Κυρίου 1 May the Lord grant to him to find mercy from the Lord Paul is again asking for the Lord to **grant mercy** to Onesiphorus. You can express this as either a blessing or a prayer, in whichever way is more natural in your language. See how you translated this in [1:16](../01/16.md). Alternate translation: “I pray that the Lord will be merciful to Onesiphorus” or “May the Lord have mercy on Onesiphorus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
81 2TI 1 18 x0eo grammar-connect-logic-result (δῴη αὐτῷ ὁ Κύριος, εὑρεῖν ἔλεος παρὰ Κυρίου ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ), καὶ ὅσα ἐν Ἐφέσῳ διηκόνησεν, βέλτιον σὺ γινώσκεις 1 May the Lord grant to him to find mercy from the Lord in that day. And how much he served in Ephesus, you know very well If it would be helpful in your language, you could reverse the order of these sentences, since the second sentence gives the reason for the action that the first sentence describes. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
82 2TI 1 18 r54t writing-pronouns δῴη αὐτῷ ὁ Κύριος, εὑρεῖν ἔλεος παρὰ Κυρίου 1 May the Lord grant to him to find mercy from the Lord If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the name “Onesiphorus” instead of the pronoun **him** to make it clear who is receiving mercy. Alternate translation: “May Onesiphorus receive mercy from the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
83 2TI 1 18 x2dk figs-metaphor εὑρεῖν ἔλεος παρὰ Κυρίου 1 to find mercy from the Lord Paul speaks of **mercy** as if it were an object that could be found. Paul is expressing his desire that God show **mercy** to Onesiphorus on the day of judgment. Alternate translation: “to receive mercy from the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
84 2TI 1 18 f3ep figs-explicit ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ 1 in that day The expression **that day** refers to the day when God will judge all people; at that time they will receive mercy from the Lord, as Paul mentions, or wrath. Alternate translation: “on the day of judgment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
85 2TI 1 18 p025 figs-explicit ὅσα ἐν Ἐφέσῳ διηκόνησεν, βέλτιον σὺ γινώσκεις 1 how much he served in Ephesus, you know very well Paul is reminding Timothy that Onesiphorus helped him earlier, **in Ephesus**. So, Paul is asking the Lord to bless Onesiphorus because he helped Paul several times. Alternate translation: “you know well how much he also helped me earlier when I was in Ephesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
86 2TI 2 intro k3zn 0 # 2 Timothy 2 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>In verses 11b–13, Paul may be quoting a poem or hymn. To show the reader that this may be a quotation, in your translation you may choose to set these verses farther to the right than the other verses in the chapter.<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### We will reign with him<br><br>Faithful Christians will reign with Christ in the future. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]])<br><br>## Important figures of speech in this chapter<br><br>### Analogies<br><br>In this chapter, Paul makes several analogies to teach about living as a Christian. He uses analogies of soldiers, athletes, and farmers. Later in the chapter, he uses the analogy of different kinds of containers in a house.
87 2TI 2 1 bll5 figs-metaphor τέκνον μου 1 my child Here, **child** is a term of great love and approval. Timothy is not Paul’s biological child. It is also likely that Paul introduced Timothy to Christ, and so this is why Paul considered him like his own child. Alternate translation: “who are like my child” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
88 2TI 2 1 p026 figs-activepassive ἐνδυναμοῦ 1 be strengthened You could express this with an active form, and you could state who would do the action. Alternate translation: “let God make you strong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
89 2TI 2 1 e6ex figs-abstractnouns ἐν τῇ χάριτι τῇ ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 in the grace that is in Christ Jesus Paul wants Timothy to experience the strength that God provides through his **grace** or kindness. Believers experience God’s grace through knowing Jesus Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **grace** with an adjective. Alternate translation: “as you allow Christ Jesus to kindly empower you through your relationship to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
90 2TI 2 2 ig9v figs-explicit διὰ πολλῶν μαρτύρων 1 along with many witnesses Paul is referring to teaching in a public setting with others present. The implication is that those others could testify as to what he taught. Alternate translation: “in the presence of people who can testify to what I said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
91 2TI 2 2 kv1m figs-metaphor ταῦτα παράθου 1 entrust these things to faithful men Paul speaks of his instructions to Timothy as if they were objects that Timothy could give to other people and trust them to use correctly. Alternate translation: “commit them” or “teach them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
92 2TI 2 2 p027 figs-gendernotations πιστοῖς ἀνθρώποις 1 to faithful men Here the term **men** has a generic sense that may include women. Alternate translation: “to faithful people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
93 2TI 2 3 yc1j figs-explicit συνκακοπάθησον 1 Suffer together Here, **together** could mean: (1) Timothy should suffer together with Paul. Alternate translation: “Suffer together with me” (2) Timothy should suffer together with all Christians who suffer. Alternate translation: “Suffer together with all believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
94 2TI 2 3 juu2 figs-metaphor ὡς καλὸς στρατιώτης Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 as a good soldier of Jesus Christ Paul compares suffering for Christ Jesus to the suffering that a good soldier endures. Alternate translation: “as if you were a soldier and Jesus Christ were your commander” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
95 2TI 2 4 a4x7 figs-metaphor οὐδεὶς στρατευόμενος ἐμπλέκεται ταῖς τοῦ βίου πραγματίαις 1 No one serving as a soldier gets entangled in the affairs of life To help Timothy understand something important about following Jesus, Paul introduces the metaphor of a **soldier** who has to decide between pleasing his leader or pleasing those outside the army. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this. Alternate translation: “Consider that no dedicated soldier allows the affairs of life to distract him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
96 2TI 2 4 p7n5 figs-metaphor ἐμπλέκεται ταῖς τοῦ βίου πραγματίαις 1 gets entangled in the affairs of life Paul speaks of being involved in other matters as if they were a net that trapped people and kept them from being able to move freely. Alternate translation: “allows the affairs of life to distract him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
97 2TI 2 4 p028 figs-activepassive ἐμπλέκεται ταῖς τοῦ βίου πραγματίαις 1 gets entangled in the affairs of life If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “allows the affairs of life to distract him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
98 2TI 2 4 p029 figs-explicit τοῦ βίου 1 of life By **life**, Paul means, in the context of this metaphor, “civilian life.” The implication is that Timothy and all believers should not allow competing concerns to keep them from serving Christ. Alternate translation: “of everyday life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
99 2TI 2 4 d2lg τῷ στρατολογήσαντι 1 the one who enlisted him Alternate translation: “his leader” or “the one who commands him”
100 2TI 2 5 d483 figs-metaphor ἐὰν & ἀθλῇ τις, οὐ στεφανοῦται, ἐὰν μὴ νομίμως ἀθλήσῃ 1 if anyone competes, he is not crowned if he has not competed lawfully To help Timothy understand something important about following Jesus, Paul introduces the metaphor of an athlete who has to decide between competing **lawfully** or not lawfully. The athlete will only receive the crown given to the winner if he competes lawfully. By making this comparison with an athlete competing in games, Paul is implicitly telling Timothy that Christ will not reward him unless he serves him **lawfully**, that is, unless he obeys him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this directly. Alternate translation: “consider that the officials only crown an athlete as the winner if he competes according to the rules” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
101 2TI 2 5 p031 figs-hypo ἐὰν & ἀθλῇ τις, οὐ στεφανοῦται, ἐὰν μὴ νομίμως ἀθλήσῃ 1 if anyone competes, he is not crowned if he has not competed lawfully Paul is also using a hypothetical situation to teach Timothy. Alternate translation: “suppose an athlete did not compete by the rules. Then he would not be crowned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
102 2TI 2 5 p032 ἐὰν & ἀθλῇ τις 1 if anyone competes Here, **competes** refers to competing in an athletic event. Alternate translation: “if an athlete competes in an event”
103 2TI 2 5 xbn6 figs-doublenegatives οὐ στεφανοῦται, ἐὰν μὴ νομίμως ἀθλήσῃ 1 he is not crowned if he has not competed lawfully If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this double negative by translating it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “the officials will only crown him if he competes by the rules” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
104 2TI 2 5 p033 figs-activepassive οὐ στεφανοῦται 1 he is not crowned If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “the officials will not crown him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
105 2TI 2 5 p034 figs-explicit οὐ στεφανοῦται 1 he is not crowned Paul assumes that Timothy will know that in this culture crowning indicated the winner of a competition. Alternate translation: “the officials will not crown him as the winner” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
106 2TI 2 5 lea8 translate-unknown οὐ στεφανοῦται 1 he is not crowned In Paul’s time, when athletes won competitions, they were **crowned** with wreaths made from the leaves of plants. You can express this idea in your translation by referring to the comparable custom in your own culture, or by using a general expression. Alternate translation: “the officials will not give him an award” or “the officials will not declare him to be the winner” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
107 2TI 2 5 reg6 figs-explicit μὴ νομίμως ἀθλήσῃ 1 he has competed lawfully Paul is referring to the rules that governed a competition. The athletes had to obey the rules or they would be removed from the competition and not have an opportunity to win. If it would be helpful in your language, you could mention these rules. Alternate translation: “he does not compete according to the rules” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
108 2TI 2 6 wz35 figs-metaphor τὸν κοπιῶντα γεωργὸν δεῖ πρῶτον τῶν καρπῶν μεταλαμβάνειν 1 The hardworking farmer ought to be first to receive of the crops To help Timothy understand something important about following Jesus, Paul introduces the metaphor of a **farmer** who has to decide between working hard or not working hard. The farmer will receive a share of the harvest if he is working hard. By making this comparison, Paul is encouraging Timothy to work hard in his service to Christ so that God will reward him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this directly. Alternate translation: “Consider that a farmer who works hard should receive a share of the crops before anyone else” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
109 2TI 2 6 p035 figs-explicit πρῶτον τῶν καρπῶν μεταλαμβάνειν 1 first to receive of the crops In this illustration, it seems that the hardworking farmer is working with other farmers who will all receive a part of the crop after the harvest. But since this farmer works harder than the others, he should receive before the others. It is implied that receiving first is best, possibly because the quality of the crop is better. Alternate translation: “receive the best share of the crops” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
110 2TI 2 7 bdk9 figs-explicit νόει ὃ λέγω, δώσει γάρ σοι ὁ Κύριος σύνεσιν 1 Think about what I am saying, for the Lord will give you understanding Paul gave Timothy three metaphors in verses 3–6, but he did not completely explain their implications. He expected Timothy to figure out, with God’s help, the lesson of these metaphors for Christ’s servants. For that reason, if you want to include an explanation of the meaning of the metaphors, we recommend that you state the meaning in a footnote rather than in the Bible text. Alternate translation: “you will have to think carefully about what I have just told you to understand it completely, but you can depend on God to help you to do that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
111 2TI 2 7 p036 figs-metonymy ὃ λέγω 1 what I am saying Paul refers to what he has just written in his letter with the verb **saying** to express the idea of communicating. Alternate translation: “what I have just told you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
112 2TI 2 7 a22q figs-explicit ἐν πᾶσιν 1 in everything Here, **in everything** refers to everything related to the three metaphors that Paul has written just before this. Alternate translation: “about everything that I have just said” or “about all that I said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
113 2TI 2 8 mh1k figs-metaphor ἐκ σπέρματος Δαυείδ 1 from the seed of David The phrase **from the seed of** refers to Jesus being descended from King David. Alternate translation: “who is a descendant of David” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
114 2TI 2 8 wt31 figs-idiom ἐγηγερμένον ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 raised from the dead The expression **raised from the dead** is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “whom God caused to live again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
115 2TI 2 8 p038 figs-activepassive ἐγηγερμένον ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 raised from the dead If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “whom God raised from the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
116 2TI 2 8 s4vh figs-possession κατὰ τὸ εὐαγγέλιόν μου 1 according to my gospel The term **my** conveys the idea that it is the gospel associated with Paul because he preaches it. Alternate translation: “according to the gospel message that I preach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
117 2TI 2 9 t2ax figs-metonymy μέχρι δεσμῶν 1 unto chains Paul uses the expression **unto chains** to express how far his suffering has gone: from being beaten, to being arrested, to being in chains in prison. Alternate translation: “to the point of being imprisoned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
118 2TI 2 9 p039 figs-simile ὡς κακοῦργος 1 like a criminal Paul compares his situation to the shameful one that a person would be in who had actually committed a crime. Alternate translation: “as if I were a criminal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
119 2TI 2 9 pc6t figs-metaphor ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ οὐ δέδεται 1 the word of God is not bound Here, **bound** means being held in chains as a prisoner, referring to Paul’s condition. Paul contrasts himself, an actual prisoner, with God’s message, which can never be held prisoner. Alternate translation: “nothing is holding back the message from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
120 2TI 2 9 p040 figs-activepassive ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ οὐ δέδεται 1 the word of God is not bound If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this idea. Alternate translation: “nothing is holding back the message from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
121 2TI 2 9 p041 figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the word of God Paul uses the term **word** to describe the message from God that he and others are communicating with words. Alternate translation: “the message from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
122 2TI 2 10 p042 figs-hyperbole πάντα ὑπομένω 1 I endure all things Here the term **all** is a generalization that likely refers to the sufferings that Paul describes in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “I endure all of these sufferings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
123 2TI 2 10 aa1x figs-nominaladj διὰ τοὺς ἐκλεκτούς 1 for the chosen The term **chosen** is an adjective that functions as a noun here and refers to a group of people. If your language would not use an adjective in that way, you could translate this term with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “for the people whom God has chosen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
124 2TI 2 10 j2bk καὶ αὐτοὶ σωτηρίας τύχωσιν τῆς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 they also may obtain the salvation that is in Christ Jesus The phrase **obtain salvation** could also be expressed with Christ Jesus, who grants salvation, as the subject. Alternate translation: “Christ Jesus may grant them salvation”
125 2TI 2 10 p043 figs-abstractnouns καὶ αὐτοὶ σωτηρίας τύχωσιν τῆς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 they also may obtain the salvation that is in Christ Jesus If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **salvation** with a verb. Alternate translation: “Christ Jesus may save them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
126 2TI 2 10 el68 figs-abstractnouns μετὰ δόξης αἰωνίου 1 with eternal glory The abstract noun **glory** refers to the wonderful condition that people will experience when they are in the presence of God. It comes from God himself and he shares it with those who are saved by Jesus Christ, and this condition is **eternal**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **glory** with an adjective. Alternate translation: “and know how glorious it is to be with God forever” or “and experience God’s wonderful presence forever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
127 2TI 2 11 nr7u πιστὸς ὁ λόγος 1 This word is trustworthy In this context, the term **word** refers to the statement of doctrine that follows. See how you translated this phrase in [1 Timothy 1:15](../1ti/01/15.md) Alternate translation: “This statement is dependable”
128 2TI 2 11 p044 πιστὸς ὁ λόγος 1 This word is trustworthy You could represent the meaning of the adjective **trustworthy** with an active verb, if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “you could trust this statement”
129 2TI 2 11 p045 figs-quotemarks πιστὸς ὁ λόγος 1 This word is trustworthy Paul uses this phrase to introduce a direct quotation. The words that follow in the rest of this verse and in [2:12](../02/12.md) and [2:13](../02/13.md) are a poem or hymn that expresses the message that Paul says is trustworthy. It may be helpful to your readers if you indicate this by marking these words as a direct quotation or by setting them farther to the right, as the General Notes at the beginning of this chapter suggest. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
130 2TI 2 11 g6e4 writing-poetry εἰ γὰρ συναπεθάνομεν, καὶ συνζήσομεν 1 For if we died with him, we will also live with him This is the beginning of a poem or hymn that Paul is probably quoting. If your language has a way of indicating that this is poetry, such as by setting individual phrases on separate lines, you could use it here and in [2:12](../02/12.md) and [2:13](../02/13.md). If not, you could translate this material as regular prose rather than as poetry. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-poetry]])
131 2TI 2 11 in38 figs-metaphor εἰ & συναπεθάνομεν 1 if we died with him Paul is speaking since he and Timothy and other believers who should trust this statement have not actually **died**. This could refer to: (1) the way that believers accept Jesus’ death for their sins when they trust him for salvation. This means that they have “died” to their old life of sin. Alternate translation: “if we have ended our old way of life by accepting Jesus’ death for us” (2) the way that people who believe in Jesus may suffer for him, possibly to the point of dying for him. Alternate translation: “if we are prepared to die for Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
132 2TI 2 11 p046 καὶ συνζήσομεν 1 we will also live with him Although Paul is referring to dying with Christ in a figurative sense, **live** is probably not figurative, but could refer to: (1) life after physical death. This seems most likely given Paul’s mention of “eternal glory” in the previous verse and “we will reign with him” in the next. Alternate translation: “then God will raise us from the dead to live with Jesus” (2) how believers will act in this life before physical death. Alternate translation: “we will not pursue our own desires, instead we will do what Jesus wants us to do”
133 2TI 2 12 p048 εἰ ἀρνησόμεθα 1 if we deny him Paul uses the term **deny** to refer to the action of believers saying that they do not know Jesus Christ during this present life. It is presented as the opposite of **endure**, so it refers to someone who gives in to persecution and denies being a follower of Jesus. Alternate translation: “if we say now that we do not know him”
134 2TI 2 12 p049 κἀκεῖνος ἀρνήσεται ἡμᾶς 1 he also will deny us In this second usage of the word **deny**, Paul is referring to the action of Jesus Christ on the day of final judgment. On that day, Jesus will either receive a faithful believer or reject those who are not true followers. Those who deny that they are followers of Jesus while on earth are not true followers. Alternate translation: “he will reject us on the day of judgment”
135 2TI 2 13 ke4w εἰ ἀπιστοῦμεν 1 if we are unfaithful Paul uses the word **unfaithful** to express the condition of believers who do not continue to obey Jesus, but rather disobey him. Alternate translation: “if we disobey Jesus” or “if we do not do what Jesus wants us to do”
136 2TI 2 13 p050 figs-explicit ἐκεῖνος πιστὸς μένει 1 he remains faithful This could mean : (1) he remains faithful to them. (2) he remains true to himself. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
137 2TI 2 13 ihd4 ἀρνήσασθαι & ἑαυτὸν οὐ δύναται 1 he is not able to deny himself Paul states that Jesus is not able to **deny himself**, meaning that Jesus is not able to go against his character and will remain true to what he said he would do. Paul may have one or both of the following ideas in mind. (1) Jesus’ character includes being the Savior who can forgive our unfaithfulness when we repent of it, as Peter experienced (John 21:15–19). This favors the interpretation of the previous phrase as “he remains faithful to us.” (2) Jesus’ character also includes being the holy God who judges people for their sin when they do not repent. This favors the interpretation of the previous phrase as “he remains true to himself.” Alternate translation: “he must always act according to his character”
138 2TI 2 14 u661 ὑπομίμνῃσκε 1 Remind them The word **{them}**, which is implicit in the Greek verb, probably refers to the people that Timothy has responsibility over. Alternate translation: “Remind the people there”
139 2TI 2 14 p051 figs-metaphor ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 before God Paul uses the expression **before God**, which means “in front of God,” to mean “where God can see.” Seeing, in turn, means attention and judgment. Alternate translation: “as God is watching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
140 2TI 2 14 r5lq figs-explicit ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 before God The implication is that Paul is telling Timothy to tell the believers, when he gives them this command, that God will be watching what they do. Alternate translation: “with God as their witness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
141 2TI 2 14 g6p7 figs-metaphor μὴ λογομαχεῖν 1 not to battle about words Paul uses the term **battle** to describe arguments. This could mean: (1) the believers are not to argue about unimportant things such as the words that someone uses to present the gospel message. That only distracts people from talking about important things, such as the gospel message itself. Alternate translation: “not to fight about small things like words” (2) the believers are not to argue about what words mean. Again, this causes disunity among the believers for no good reason. Alternate translation: “not to fight about the meanings of words” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
142 2TI 2 14 rke6 ἐπ’ οὐδὲν χρήσιμον 1 it is useful for nothing Paul adds that battling about words has no benefit for those involved. Alternate translation: “it does not benefit anyone”
143 2TI 2 14 ywty figs-abstractnouns ἐπὶ καταστροφῇ τῶν ἀκουόντων 1 to the destruction of those who hear If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **destruction** with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “it destroys those who hear” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
144 2TI 2 14 x7gx figs-metonymy ἐπὶ καταστροφῇ τῶν ἀκουόντων 1 to the destruction of those who hear Here, **destruction** refers not to physical harm, but to the spiritual harm that is done to believers who hear their teachers foolishly arguing about unimportant things. This teaches the believers that being seen as right about small things is more important than love and unity, and can cause them to have wrong ideas about the faith or to stop following Jesus altogether. Alternate translation: “and can make those who hear it want to stop following Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
145 2TI 2 15 m3vy σπούδασον σεαυτὸν, δόκιμον παραστῆσαι τῷ Θεῷ 1 Strive to present yourself approved to God Alternate translation: “Do your best to please God”
146 2TI 2 15 rj6y figs-metaphor ἐργάτην 1 a worker Paul says that Timothy will be a skilled workman if he correctly teaches God’s word. Alternate translation: “like a craftsman” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
147 2TI 2 15 xgz9 figs-metaphor ὀρθοτομοῦντα τὸν λόγον τῆς ἀληθείας 1 cutting the word of truth straight Paul refers to **the word of truth** as if it were a path that someone was cutting through difficult terrain. When such a path is **straight**, travelers can follow it directly to their destination. By contrast, the useless discussions that Paul describes in [2:14](../02/14.md) and [2:16](../02/16.md) would be needless detours in terms of this same metaphor. Alternate translation: “show people how to follow the Scriptures directly” or “teach the Scriptures correctly so that people can follow them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
148 2TI 2 15 p052 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τῆς ἀληθείας 1 the word of truth Paul uses the term **word** to refer to something that is expressed in words. This could refer to: (1) the message that Timothy is to teach. Alternate translation: “the true message” (2) the Scriptures. Alternate translation: “the true things that God has said in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
149 2TI 2 15 p053 figs-abstractnouns τὸν λόγον τῆς ἀληθείας 1 the word of truth If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **truth** with an adjective. Alternate translation: “the true message” or “the true things that God has said in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
150 2TI 2 16 e27q figs-metaphor ἐπὶ πλεῖον & προκόψουσιν ἀσεβείας 1 they will advance into greater ungodliness Paul speaks of these discussions as if they could physically progress in a certain direction, and he speaks of **ungodliness** as that direction. Paul is describing the effect that these discussions have on people. Alternate translation: “they cause people to become more and more ungodly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
151 2TI 2 17 i73t figs-simile ὁ λόγος αὐτῶν ὡς γάγγραινα νομὴν ἕξει 1 their word will have a spreading like gangrene This is a simile. It means that something will spread from person to person and harm the faith of all those who hear it. The thing that will spread could refer to: (1) the habit of having useless and godless discussions. (2) the things that the people were saying in these empty discussions, or both. Alternate translation: “these empty discussions will spread quickly and cause destruction like an infectious disease” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
152 2TI 2 17 p054 figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος αὐτῶν 1 their word Paul uses the term **word** to refer to something that is expressed in words. Alternate translation: “these discussions” or “what people who take part in these discussions say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
153 2TI 2 17 p055 translate-unknown ὡς γάγγραινα 1 like gangrene “Gangrene” is type of tissue death caused by infection or lack of blood circulation. It quickly spreads in a person’s body and can lead to death. If your readers would not know what **gangrene** is, you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “like an infectious disease” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
154 2TI 2 17 p056 writing-pronouns ὧν ἐστιν Ὑμέναιος, καὶ Φίλητος 1 among whom are Hymenaeus and Philetus Paul gives Timothy the names of **Hymenaeus** and **Philetus** examples of ungodliness and foolish talk. To make the relationship between these names and the preceding **their word** clear in your language, you may have to make this explicit. Alternate translation: “Hymeneus and Philetus are such people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
155 2TI 2 17 x2k6 translate-names Ὑμέναιος, καὶ Φίλητος 1 Hymenaeus and Philetus **Hymenaeus** and **Philetus** are names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
156 2TI 2 18 fi9z figs-metaphor οἵτινες περὶ τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἠστόχησαν 1 who have missed the mark regarding the truth Paul uses this expression to speak of faith in Christ as if it were a target at which people should aim. Those who have **missed the mark** do not believe or teach what is true. Alternate translation: “who are teaching things that are not true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
157 2TI 2 18 p057 figs-abstractnouns οἵτινες περὶ τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἠστόχησαν 1 who have missed the mark regarding the truth If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **truth** with an adjective. Alternate translation: “who teach things that are not true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
158 2TI 2 18 pu22 figs-abstractnouns ἀνάστασιν ἤδη γεγονέναι 1 the resurrection has already happened If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **resurrection** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “God has already raised the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
159 2TI 2 18 ura5 figs-metaphor ἀνατρέπουσιν τήν τινων πίστιν 1 who are destroying the faith of some Paul refers to **faith** as though it were an object that could be destroyed. Alternate translation: “they are causing some people to stop believing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
160 2TI 2 19 ir1z figs-metaphor ὁ & στερεὸς θεμέλιος τοῦ Θεοῦ ἕστηκεν 1 the firm foundation of God stands Paul uses the image of the **foundation** of a building to explain that even though a false and destructive message has been destroying the faith of some people, God has nevertheless given people who want to continue to follow him a true message, which provides for them a safe and secure “place to stand.” Alternate translation: “God has provided a secure basis for people to continue to believe in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
161 2TI 2 19 p058 figs-metonymy ἔχων τὴν σφραγῖδα ταύτην 1 having this seal Paul speaks of the inscription on this foundation as if it were a **seal**, since seals on the outside of documents often bore inscriptions describing their contents. Alternate translation: “having this inscription” or “which can be described in this way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
162 2TI 2 19 p059 figs-quotemarks ἔχων τὴν σφραγῖδα ταύτην 1 having this seal Paul uses this phrase to introduce two direct quotations. The statements that follow in the rest of this verse describe two aspects of the basis that God has provided for people to continue to believe in him. It may be helpful to your readers if you indicate this by marking these statements as quotations. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
163 2TI 2 19 nd7t figs-idiom ὁ ὀνομάζων τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου 1 who names the name of the Lord The expression **names the name of the Lord** is an idiom that refers to saying the name of the Lord in order to declare that one belongs to him. Alternate translation: “who says he believes in the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
164 2TI 2 19 y3bc figs-abstractnouns ἀποστήτω ἀπὸ ἀδικίας 1 must abstain from unrighteousness If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **unrighteousness** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “must stop doing evil things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
165 2TI 2 20 p060 figs-metaphor ἐν μεγάλῃ δὲ οἰκίᾳ, οὐκ ἔστιν μόνον σκεύη χρυσᾶ καὶ ἀργυρᾶ, ἀλλὰ καὶ ξύλινα καὶ ὀστράκινα 1 Now in a great house, there are not only gold and silver containers, but also wood and clay To help Timothy understand something important about following Jesus, Paul introduces the metaphor that compares the **containers** that are in the home of a wealthy person with people in the church. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that this is a metaphor or illustration. Alternate translation: “Consider this illustration: in the home of a wealthy person, there are containers made of gold and silver, and there are also containers made of wood and clay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
166 2TI 2 20 p061 figs-ellipsis ἀλλὰ καὶ ξύλινα καὶ ὀστράκινα 1 but also wood and clay Paul leaves out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. Alternate translation: “and there are also containers made of wood and clay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
167 2TI 2 20 j75l σκεύη 1 containers The word **container** is a general term for items used to hold other things, such as grain, food, drink, or refuse. If your language does not have a general word, you can use a specific word such as “bowl” or “pot.”
168 2TI 2 20 mt5e figs-abstractnouns ἃ μὲν εἰς τιμὴν, ἃ δὲ εἰς ἀτιμίαν 1 both some for honor and some for dishonor If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract nouns **honor** and **dishonor** by stating the ideas behind them with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “he uses the former at events to honor people and he uses the latter to do things that no one wants to see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
169 2TI 2 21 jm3p figs-metaphor ἐκκαθάρῃ ἑαυτὸν ἀπὸ τούτων 1 has cleansed himself from these Here Paul continues the metaphor that compares people in the church to containers in a great house that have different uses. Paul speaks of a person washing himself clean as though he had been a pot full of something bad. By this he means that the person has given up certain associations or activities. Here, **these** could refer to: (1) the false teachers who are destroying the faith of some people. Alternate translation: “has disassociated himself from these false teachers” (2) the activities of quarreling and false teaching that Paul has warned Timothy about. Alternate translation: “has stopped doing these ungodly actions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
170 2TI 2 21 g79f figs-metaphor ἔσται σκεῦος εἰς τιμήν 1 he will be a container for honor Paul speaks of a person who has given up these associations or activities as if he were a particular kind of **container**. Alternate translation: “he will be like a dish for special occasions” or “he will be like a dish that is used to honor people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
171 2TI 2 21 p062 figs-explicit ἔσται σκεῦος εἰς τιμήν 1 he will be a container for honor The implication is that God will be able to give important assignments to a person who is free from wrong associations or activities. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he will be someone to whom God can give important assignments” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
172 2TI 2 21 mh63 ἔσται σκεῦος εἰς τιμήν, ἡγιασμένον εὔχρηστον τῷ Δεσπότῃ, εἰς πᾶν ἔργον ἀγαθὸν ἡτοιμασμένον 1 he will be a container for honor, having been sanctified, useful to the Master, having been prepared for every good work These four phrases could mean: (1) the ones beginning with **having been** give the reason for the phrase before them. Alternate translation: “he will be a container for honor because he has been sanctified, and he will be useful to the Master because he has been prepared for every good work” (2) all four phrases could simply be describing the person. Alternate translation: “he will be a container for honor, someone who is sanctified, useful to the Master, and ready for every good work”
173 2TI 2 21 p063 figs-activepassive ἡγιασμένον 1 having been sanctified If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea, and you can state who did the action. Alternate translation: “whom God has set apart for himself” or “whom God has set apart for a special purpose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
174 2TI 2 21 nl5d figs-metaphor ἡγιασμένον 1 having been sanctified If this phrase is continuing the metaphor of objects in a house, then Paul is referring to a person who is free from wrong associations or activities as if he were a precious object whose owner keeps it in a special place. Whether this phrase is continuing the metaphor or not, it still expresses the idea of being “dedicated” for a special purpose. Alternate translation: “whom God has set apart for a special purpose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
175 2TI 2 21 p064 figs-metaphor εὔχρηστον τῷ Δεσπότῃ 1 useful to the Master In the context of the metaphor of the house, Paul speaks of God as the head of the household. Alternate translation: “useful to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
176 2TI 2 21 p065 figs-activepassive εἰς πᾶν ἔργον ἀγαθὸν ἡτοιμασμένον 1 having been prepared for every good work If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “who has gotten himself ready to do any good work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
177 2TI 2 22 h9p6 figs-metaphor τὰς & νεωτερικὰς ἐπιθυμίας φεῦγε 1 flee youthful lusts Paul speaks about **youthful** desires as if they were a dangerous person or animal that Timothy should run away from. Alternate translation: “control your youthful desires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
178 2TI 2 22 p066 figs-metonymy τὰς & νεωτερικὰς ἐπιθυμίας φεῦγε 1 flee youthful lusts Paul speaks of immoral activities by association with the desires that lead a person to engage in them. Alternate translation: “refuse to do the wrong things that young people want to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
179 2TI 2 22 srb7 figs-metaphor δίωκε δὲ δικαιοσύνην, πίστιν, ἀγάπην, εἰρήνην 1 and pursue righteousness, faith, love, and peace Paul is using the verb **pursue** in contrast to **flee**. He speaks of these positive things as if Timothy should run towards them because they will do him good. Alternate translation: “be eager to do what is right, to believe in God, to love God and others, and to live in peace with people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
180 2TI 2 22 p067 figs-abstractnouns δικαιοσύνην, πίστιν, ἀγάπην, εἰρήνην 1 righteousness, faith, love, and peace If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract nouns **righteousness**, **faith**, **love**, and **peace** by stating the ideas behind them with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “do what is right, believe in God, love other people, and live peacefully with other people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
181 2TI 2 22 hg99 μετὰ τῶν ἐπικαλουμένων τὸν Κύριον ἐκ καθαρᾶς καρδίας 1 with those who call on the Lord from a clean heart This likely means that Paul wants Timothy to pursue these positive things together with others who are sincere in their faith. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could put this phrase at the beginning of Paul’s command to Timothy, as in the UST, before **pursue**. Alternate translation: “together with those who worship the Lord with sincere intentions”
182 2TI 2 22 gl3q figs-idiom τῶν ἐπικαλουμένων τὸν Κύριον 1 those who call on the Lord The expression **calling on the Lord** is an idiom that means to trust and worship the Lord. Alternate translation: “those who worship the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
183 2TI 2 22 p068 figs-metonymy ἐκ καθαρᾶς καρδίας 1 from a clean heart Paul uses a physical part of the body, the **heart**, to represent the intentions and desires of a person. Alternate translation: “with sincere intentions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
184 2TI 2 22 b2ti figs-metaphor ἐκ καθαρᾶς καρδίας 1 from a clean heart Paul uses the word **clean** to describe the intentions or thoughts of a person as though they were an object that could be made clean. Alternate translation: “with sincere intentions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
185 2TI 2 23 tmf7 figs-metonymy τὰς & μωρὰς καὶ ἀπαιδεύτους ζητήσεις παραιτοῦ 1 avoid foolish and ignorant questions Paul refers to certain kinds of discussions by association with the kind of **questions** that people might ask that would lead to these discussions or by association with the kind of people that would ask these questions. Alternate translation: “do not become involved in foolish and ignorant discussions” or “do not allow people to involve you in discussions that they start because they are foolish and ignorant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
186 2TI 2 23 p069 figs-doublet μωρὰς καὶ ἀπαιδεύτους ζητήσεις 1 foolish and ignorant questions Paul may be using the words **foolish** and **ignorant** together to emphasize a single idea. Alternate translation: “very stupid questions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
187 2TI 2 23 kh6p figs-metaphor γεννῶσι μάχας 1 they give birth to battles Paul speaks of the **questions** as if they were women giving birth to children (the **battles**). Alternate translation: “they cause arguments” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
188 2TI 2 23 p070 figs-metaphor μάχας 1 battles Paul uses the term **battles** to describe arguments. Alternate translation: “they cause arguments” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
189 2TI 2 24 p071 figs-metaphor δοῦλον & Κυρίου 1 the slave of the Lord Paul is using the expression **slave of the Lord** to refer to leaders in the church, including Timothy, who do what God tells them to do. This includes teaching the believers and interacting with the quarrelsome teachers who challenge their authority and the truth. Alternate translation: “a leader in the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
190 2TI 2 24 p072 figs-metaphor οὐ δεῖ μάχεσθαι 1 must not battle Paul uses the term **battle** to describe arguments. Alternate translation: “must not argue” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
191 2TI 2 25 un9l figs-abstractnouns ἐν πραΰτητι 1 in meekness If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **meekness** in this expression with an adverb. Alternate translation: “meekly” or “gently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
192 2TI 2 25 u6rp παιδεύοντα 1 educating Paul presents **educating** as the godly response to quarrels. This term can mean “teach” or “correct.” Alternate translation: “teaching” or “correcting”
193 2TI 2 25 jt1r figs-metaphor μήποτε δώῃ αὐτοῖς ὁ Θεὸς μετάνοιαν 1 God may perhaps give them repentance Paul speaks of **repentance** as if it were an object that God could give people. Alternate translation: “God may cause them to repent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
194 2TI 2 25 u8dy εἰς ἐπίγνωσιν ἀληθείας 1 for the knowledge of the truth Paul speaks of the result of **repentance** as knowing the **truth**. Alternate translation: “so that they will know the truth”
195 2TI 2 26 p073 figs-ellipsis ἀνανήψωσιν ἐκ τῆς τοῦ διαβόλου παγίδος 1 they may become sober again from the trap of the devil As Paul moves from one metaphor into another, he leaves out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. Alternate translation: “they may become sober again and escape from the trap of the devil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
196 2TI 2 26 ef3q figs-metaphor ἀνανήψωσιν 1 they may become sober again Paul speaks of sinners learning to think correctly about God as if they were drunk people becoming **sober again**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
197 2TI 2 26 mql8 figs-metaphor ἐκ τῆς τοῦ διαβόλου παγίδος 1 from the trap of the devil Paul refers to the deception of **the devil** as a physical trap that sinners are captured in. Alternate translation: “and escape from the devil’s deception” or “and reject the devil’s deception” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
198 2TI 2 26 p074 figs-activepassive ἐζωγρημένοι ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ, εἰς τὸ ἐκείνου θέλημα 1 having been captured by him for his will If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “after the devil has captured them and made them do what he wanted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
199 2TI 2 26 dj4j figs-metaphor ἐζωγρημένοι ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ, εἰς τὸ ἐκείνου θέλημα 1 having been captured by him for his will Paul speaks of the devil’s deception as if the devil had physically **captured** them and made them do what he wanted. Alternate translation: “after the devil has deceived them and made them do what he wanted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
200 2TI 3 intro k2cr 0 # 2 Timothy 3 General Notes<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>Many scholars understand the **last days** to mean the entire time from when Jesus first came to when he will return, which includes Paul’s time. If so, then what Paul teaches in this chapter about being persecuted applies to all believers. But some scholars understand the **last days** to mean a time in the future just before Jesus returns. If that is the meaning, then Paul is prophesying in verses 1–9 and 13 about those days. If possible, translators should be careful not to let how they understand this issue affect how they translate these verses. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lastday]])
201 2TI 3 1 g65r figs-idiom ἐν ἐσχάταις ἡμέραις 1 in the last days Paul is using the term **days** to refer to a particular time. Alternate translation: “during the period of time before the end” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
202 2TI 3 1 n7gs figs-explicit ἐνστήσονται καιροὶ χαλεποί 1 there will be difficult times The implication from what Paul goes on to say about people becoming ungodly and violent is that it will be difficult for believers in this time period. Alternate translation: “believers will face difficult situations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
203 2TI 3 2 p075 figs-gendernotations οἱ ἄνθρωποι 1 men Here Paul is using the term **men** in a generic sense that includes all people. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
204 2TI 3 2 jb27 φίλαυτοι 1 self-loving Here, **self-loving** refers to loving oneself more than loving family or friends with a natural human love. This is not the kind of love that comes from God. Alternate translation: “self-centered”
205 2TI 3 3 u3n7 ἄστοργοι 1 unloving The term **unloving** means that they will not love other people whom they should love. Alternate translation: “they will not love their own families”
206 2TI 3 3 r2uv ἄσπονδοι 1 irreconcilable The term **irreconcilable** means they will not agree to make peace with others and will insist on living in a state of conflict in order to have their own way. Alternate translation: “they will not agree with anyone” or “they will not live in peace with anyone”
207 2TI 3 3 ks9y ἀφιλάγαθοι 1 not good-loving The phrase **not good-loving** could be translated by removing the negative **not** and replacing **loving** with the opposite term “hating.” Alternate translation: “They will hate what is good”
208 2TI 3 4 dw5z προπετεῖς 1 reckless The adjective **reckless** conveys the idea of doing things without thinking about the negative things that could happen as a result. Alternate translation: “heedless of consequences”
209 2TI 3 4 d6ng figs-metaphor τετυφωμένοι 1 puffed up The expression **puffed up** is a metaphor for being proud and considering oneself better than others. Alternate translation: “haughty” or “conceited” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
210 2TI 3 4 p076 figs-activepassive τετυφωμένοι 1 puffed up If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “haughty” or “conceited” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
211 2TI 3 5 k5dc figs-idiom ἔχοντες μόρφωσιν εὐσεβείας 1 having a form of godliness The expression **a form of** indicates that their **godliness** is not genuine or true. Alternate translation: “appearing to have godliness” or “appearing to honor God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
212 2TI 3 5 p077 grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 And Paul uses the word **And** to introduce the results of what the previous sentence described. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
213 2TI 3 5 p078 figs-nominaladj τούτους ἀποτρέπου 1 turn away from these The term **these** is a demonstrative adjective that refers to the people who show the ungodly qualities that Paul lists in the previous verses. Paul is using the term as a noun. If your language does not use adjectives in that way, you can add the word “people” in your translation. Alternate translation: “avoid these people” or “avoid such people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
214 2TI 3 5 xm1c figs-metaphor τούτους ἀποτρέπου 1 turn away from these The expression **turn away** is a metaphor for avoiding someone. Alternate translation: “avoid these people” or “avoid such people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
215 2TI 3 6 gu4b figs-metaphor αἰχμαλωτίζοντες 1 captivating Here Paul uses the term **captivating** to mean greatly influencing someone by the use of deception. Alternate translation: “manipulating” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
216 2TI 3 6 u9m5 γυναικάρια 1 foolish women The term **foolish women** refers to women who are spiritually weak and immature. They allow these men into their homes and listen to them because they are weak, idle, and have many sins. Alternate translation: “women who are spiritually weak”
217 2TI 3 6 e9ex figs-metaphor σεσωρευμένα ἁμαρτίαις 1 who are loaded with sins Paul speaks of these **sins** as if they were heaped up on the backs of these women. Paul is explaining why these men can easily influence these women. This could mean: (1) these women sin often or even continually. Alternate translation: “who sin often” (2) these women feel terrible guilt because they sin. Alternate translation: “who feel terrible guilt for their sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
218 2TI 3 6 p079 figs-activepassive σεσωρευμένα ἁμαρτίαις 1 who are loaded with sins If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “who sin often” or “who feel terrible guilt for their sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
219 2TI 3 6 p080 figs-activepassive ἀγόμενα ἐπιθυμίαις ποικίλαις 1 led away by various desires If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “various desires lead them away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
220 2TI 3 6 izz9 figs-personification ἀγόμενα ἐπιθυμίαις ποικίλαις 1 led away by various desires Paul speaks about these **various desires** as if they could physically lead a person away. He means that the women decide to do evil things in order to satisfy their desires. Alternate translation: “they decide to sin in various ways” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
221 2TI 3 7 p082 figs-metaphor μηδέποτε εἰς ἐπίγνωσιν ἀληθείας ἐλθεῖν δυνάμενα 1 never able to come to the knowledge of the truth Paul speaks of the **knowledge of the truth** as if it were a destination at which people could arrive. Alternate translation: “never able to understand the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
222 2TI 3 8 p083 ὃν τρόπον δὲ 1 And what way Alternate translation: “Just as”
223 2TI 3 8 b8el translate-names Ἰάννης καὶ Ἰαμβρῆς 1 Jannes and Jambres **Jannes** and **Jambres** are names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
224 2TI 3 8 p084 figs-explicit Ἰάννης καὶ Ἰαμβρῆς 1 Jannes and Jambres Paul assumes that Timothy will know that he is referring here to the magicians in Pharaoh’s court who tried to duplicate the miracles that Moses was doing. The Bible does not record their names, but according to Jewish tradition their names were Jannes and Jambres. These men wanted to show that Pharaoh did not have to listen to Moses or obey Yahweh. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could identify them more explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jannes and Jambres, Pharaoh’s magicians,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
225 2TI 3 8 p085 figs-nominaladj οὗτοι 1 these As in [3:5](../03/05.md), the term **these** is a demonstrative adjective that refers to the people who show the ungodly qualities that Paul has described. Paul is using the term as a noun. If your language does not use adjectives in that way, you can add the word “people” in your translation. Alternate translation: “these people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
226 2TI 3 8 p086 figs-abstractnouns τῇ ἀληθείᾳ 1 the truth If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **truth** with an adjective. Alternate translation: “what is true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
227 2TI 3 8 g4kk figs-metonymy ἄνθρωποι κατεφθαρμένοι τὸν νοῦν 1 men whose mind is corrupted Paul uses the word **mind** to refer to the way these evil men think. Alternate translation: “men who cannot think rightly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
228 2TI 3 8 p087 figs-activepassive ἄνθρωποι κατεφθαρμένοι τὸν νοῦν 1 men whose mind is corrupted If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “men who cannot think rightly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
229 2TI 3 8 pfh1 ἀδόκιμοι περὶ τὴν πίστιν 1 unapproved regarding the faith Paul uses the adjective **unapproved** to convey the idea that these men have been tested regarding how well they trust in Christ and obey him, and they have failed the test because their faith is not real. Alternate translation: “without sincere faith” or “whose faith is not genuine”
230 2TI 3 8 sppy figs-explicit ἀδόκιμοι περὶ τὴν πίστιν 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could start a new sentence here and say who does not approve of these men. Alternate translation: “God does approve of these men because they do not have a genuine faith in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
231 2TI 3 9 x9kx figs-explicit ἀλλ’ 1 But The word **But** indicates a contrast between this verse and the previous idea from [3:06](../03/06.md) that these men were able to sneak into homes and persuade people to believe wrong things. If you need to make this contrast clear, you could remind your readers of the previous idea here. Alternate translation: “But even though they have persuaded some people to believe wrong things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
232 2TI 3 9 c6xx figs-metaphor οὐ προκόψουσιν ἐπὶ πλεῖον 1 they will not advance unto more Paul uses an expression about physical movement to mean that the false teachers will not continue to have much success among the believers. Alternate translation: “they will not be able to continue teaching falsely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
233 2TI 3 9 mv4j figs-hyperbole ἡ & ἄνοια αὐτῶν ἔκδηλος ἔσται πᾶσιν 1 their foolishness will be obvious to all The word **all** is a generalization. Paul has just said that these men will have a little success in deceiving some people. But ultimately their foolishness will become widely apparent, as happened to Jannes and Jambres, who were publicly discredited when they were not able to equal the powerful miracles of Moses. Alternate translation: “their foolishness will become widely apparent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
234 2TI 3 9 z4fu figs-nominaladj ἐκείνων 1 of those The term **those** is a demonstrative adjective that refers to Jannes and Jambres. Paul is using the term as a noun. If your language does not use adjectives in that way, you can supply the names of the two men. Alternate translation: “of Jannes and Jambres” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
235 2TI 3 10 vw42 figs-metaphor σὺ & παρηκολούθησάς 1 you have followed Paul speaks of giving close attention to the things he lists in this verse as if one were physically following them as they moved. The idea is that Timothy is giving close attention to these things and imitating them. Alternate translation: “you have observed” or “you have paid close attention to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
236 2TI 3 10 wma6 figs-abstractnouns μου τῇ διδασκαλίᾳ 1 my teaching If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **teaching** with a relative clause. Alternate translation: “what I have taught others to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
237 2TI 3 10 lq3v figs-abstractnouns τῇ ἀγωγῇ 1 conduct If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **conduct** with a relative clause. Alternate translation: “how I live my life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
238 2TI 3 10 p088 figs-abstractnouns τῇ προθέσει 1 purpose If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **purpose** with a verbal clause. Alternate translation: “what I try to do with my life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
239 2TI 3 10 p089 figs-abstractnouns τῇ πίστει 1 faith If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **faith** with a relative clause. Alternate translation: “what I believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
240 2TI 3 10 p091 figs-abstractnouns τῇ μακροθυμίᾳ 1 patience If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **patience** with a relative clause. Alternate translation: “how I am patient with others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
241 2TI 3 10 p090 figs-abstractnouns τῇ ἀγάπῃ 1 love If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **love** with a relative clause. Alternate translation: “how I love others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
242 2TI 3 10 l4pp figs-abstractnouns τῇ ὑπομονῇ 1 longsuffering If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **endurance** with a relative clause. Alternate translation: “how I endure when I suffer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
243 2TI 3 11 p093 οἵους διωγμοὺς ὑπήνεγκα 1 what kind of persecutions I endured Paul is reminding Timothy that he knows of the various ways in which Paul suffered and how he endured until God rescued him. Alternate translation: “how I endured various persecutions”
244 2TI 3 11 r9vk figs-metaphor ἐκ πάντων, με ἐρρύσατο ὁ Κύριος 1 the Lord rescued me from them all Paul speaks as if God had physically removed him from a situation of danger. Alternate translation: “the Lord preserved me through them all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
245 2TI 3 12 ke7f ζῆν εὐσεβῶς 1 to live piously The term **piously** means in an obedient way that honors God. Alternate translation: “to live in a godly way”
246 2TI 3 12 xm9l figs-activepassive διωχθήσονται 1 will be persecuted If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “people will persecute” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
247 2TI 3 13 p094 figs-gendernotations ἄνθρωποι 1 men Here Paul is using the term **men** in a generic sense that can include both men and women. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
248 2TI 3 13 xo4q figs-hendiadys πονηροὶ & ἄνθρωποι καὶ γόητες 1 evil men and impostors This is probably a hendiadys, and the **evil men and impostors** are not two groups of people, but one group of people. Alternate translation: “evil people who only pretend to follow Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
249 2TI 3 13 s7f2 γόητες 1 impostors The term **impostors** refers here to a person who wants other people to think he is a true Christian when he is not. Alternate translation: “people who are pretending to be believers”
250 2TI 3 13 imc8 figs-metaphor προκόψουσιν ἐπὶ τὸ χεῖρον 1 will advance unto the worse Paul speaks of evil people and their character as something that moves forward physically, making gradual progress in a direction. Alternate translation: “will become worse and worse” or “will become even more evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
251 2TI 3 13 p095 figs-idiom ἐπὶ τὸ χεῖρον 1 unto the worse This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “worse and worse” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
252 2TI 3 13 eyx5 figs-metaphor πλανῶντες καὶ πλανώμενοι 1 leading astray and being led astray The expression **leading astray** uses the image of physically taking a person to a place that he didn’t think he was going to. This is a figurative reference to persuading someone to believe something that is not true. Alternate translation: “teaching lies and believing lies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
253 2TI 3 13 p096 figs-activepassive πλανῶντες καὶ πλανώμενοι 1 leading astray and being led astray If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “teaching lies and believing lies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
254 2TI 3 14 ytg9 figs-metaphor μένε ἐν οἷς ἔμαθες 1 remain in the things you have learned Paul speaks of biblical instruction as if it were a place in which Timothy could stay. Alternate translation: “continue doing what you have learned” or “continue believing what you have learned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
255 2TI 3 14 p097 figs-activepassive ἐπιστώθης 1 become convinced of If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “are confident about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
256 2TI 3 15 w9l5 figs-personification τὰ δυνάμενά σε σοφίσαι 1 which are able to make you wise Paul speaks of the Scriptures as if they were a teacher who could instruct people and help them become **wise**. It may be convenient in your translation to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “By studying them you can become wise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
257 2TI 3 15 p098 figs-abstractnouns εἰς σωτηρίαν διὰ πίστεως τῆς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 for salvation through the faith that is in Christ Jesus If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **salvation** with a verb such as “save.” Alternate translation: “so that you will know enough to trust Christ Jesus to save you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
258 2TI 3 16 s274 figs-metaphor πᾶσα Γραφὴ θεόπνευστος καὶ 1 All Scripture is God-breathed The term **God-breathed** uses the image of breathing to indicate that the Scriptures come directly from God through his Spirit. Characteristically in the Bible, the breath of God represents the Spirit of God. Alternate translation: “God produced all Scripture as his Spirit directed people what to write, and it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
259 2TI 3 16 hvr1 πᾶσα Γραφὴ θεόπνευστος 1 All Scripture is God-breathed By **All Scripture**, Paul is referring to every part of Scripture, which, at that time, was what we know as the Old Testament. If it is confusing to refer to all of the books of the Old Testament with the singular word **Scripture**, you could change it to a plural word as in the UST and make the verbs plural. Alternate translation: “All of the Holy Writings are God-breathed”
260 2TI 3 16 uv35 ὠφέλιμος 1 is profitable Paul refers to the Scripture as **profitable** to convey the idea that Timothy and all believers will benefit when they use the Scripture to teach, reprove, correct, and train. Alternate translation: “you will benefit from it as you use it” or “it benefits everyone when we use it”
261 2TI 3 16 vl2n figs-abstractnouns πρὸς ἐλεγμόν 1 for reproof Paul instructs Timothy to use the Scriptures as the standard for knowing what is right and wrong and showing people that they are wrong. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **reproof** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “for showing people that they are wrong” or “for helping us to know when we are wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
262 2TI 3 16 e5h9 figs-abstractnouns πρὸς ἐπανόρθωσιν 1 for correction Paul instructs Timothy to use the Scriptures as the standard for showing people how to make something right. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **correction** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “for showing people how to make things right” or “for showing us how to fix errors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
263 2TI 3 16 y1hf figs-abstractnouns πρὸς παιδείαν τὴν ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ 1 and for the training that is in righteousness Paul instructs Timothy to use the Scriptures as the standard for training people how to live lives that are right with God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **righteousness** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “and for training people how to do what is right” or “and for training us to do what is right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
264 2TI 3 17 nb12 figs-gendernotations ὁ τοῦ Θεοῦ ἄνθρωπος 1 the man of God Paul is using the word **man** here in a generic sense that includes all believers in God, whether male or female. Of course, Paul also intends for Timothy to apply this to himself. Alternate translation: “the person who serves God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
265 2TI 3 17 uu7i ἄρτιος 1 proficient Alternate translation: “fully capable”
266 2TI 3 17 p099 figs-activepassive ἐξηρτισμένος 1 equipped If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “and have everything he needs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
267 2TI 4 intro k2xa 0 # 2 Timothy 4 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and formatting<br><br>1. Paul gives a solemn charge to Timothy (4:1–8)<br>2. Paul tells Timothy how he is doing (4:9–18)<br>3. Paul sends personal greetings (4:19–22)<br><br>## Special concepts in this chapter<br><br>### “I adjure you”<br><br>With these words Paul challenges Timothy in the most serious way possible to do what he is telling him to do. It is a way of commanding Timothy, not by Paul’s own authority, but by the authority that he then refers to, that of God and Jesus Christ. In other words, Paul is saying that God and Jesus Christ are commanding Timothy through Paul.<br><br>### Crown<br><br>Scripture uses the image of a crown to represent different things. In this chapter, Paul describes Christ as awarding a crown to believers as a metaphor for the reward that Christ will give them for having lived rightly on this earth.
268 2TI 4 1 eh3x διαμαρτύρομαι 1 I adjure you The word translated **adjure** is used to place someone under a serious and binding obligation. Think about the words that you use to do this in your language. This could refer to: (1) placing someone under an oath to do something. Alternate translation: “I place you under an oath” or “I hereby obligate you” (2) solemnly commanding someone with great authority. Alternate translation: “I solemnly urge you”
269 2TI 4 1 cb15 figs-explicit ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 before God and Christ Jesus Here the word **before** means “in front of,” that is, “in the presence of.” The implication is that God and Christ Jesus will witness and approve this command or oath. Alternate translation: “in the presence of God and Christ Jesus” or “with God and Christ Jesus as the witnesses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
270 2TI 4 1 u32g figs-merism ζῶντας καὶ νεκρούς 1 the living and the dead Paul refers to **the living** and **the dead** together to mean all people, whether they are alive at the time of judgment or have died. Alternate translation: “those who are still alive and those who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
271 2TI 4 1 p100 figs-nominaladj ζῶντας καὶ νεκρούς 1 the living and the dead The terms **living** and **dead** are adjectives that Paul is using as nouns to refer to groups of people. If your language does not use adjectives in that way, you can translate these terms with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “those who are still alive and those who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
272 2TI 4 1 lwt2 figs-metonymy καὶ τὴν ἐπιφάνειαν αὐτοῦ, καὶ τὴν βασιλείαν αὐτοῦ 1 and by his appearing and his kingdom Paul refers to Christ’s return by association to the fact that he will appear once again to people on earth when he returns, and he refers to Christ’s rule as king by association to the **kingdom** that he will rule. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “and on Christ’s return and on his rule as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
273 2TI 4 1 anqh καὶ τὴν ἐπιφάνειαν αὐτοῦ, καὶ τὴν βασιλείαν αὐτοῦ 1 and by his appearing and his kingdom This can be understood in two different ways, depending on if Paul is placing Timothy under an oath or giving Timothy a command. (1) If Paul is placing Timothy under an oath, then he is saying that these are the things that Timothy would be denying if he fails to fulfill the oath. Alternate translation: “with an oath as strong as your desire for Christ’s return and for his rule as king” (2) If Paul is introducing a command in this verse, then Paul is appealing to these things to strengthen his command. Alternate translation: “and as surely as Christ will return and rule as king”
274 2TI 4 2 j2z7 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 the word Paul is using the term **word** to refer to the whole message about Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “the Gospel message” or “the Good News” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
275 2TI 4 2 zzh4 figs-merism εὐκαίρως, ἀκαίρως 1 opportunely, inopportunely Paul uses the opposite words **opportunely** and**inopportunely** to say that Timothy should be ready to preach about Jesus when it seems like a good time to do so and also when it does not seem like a good time. He is using the two types of occasions together to indicate all occasions. Alternate translation: “when it is convenient and when it is not convenient” or “at all times” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
276 2TI 4 2 g7ax figs-explicit ἔλεγξον 1 reprove The command to **reprove** implies that the action is directed toward people who have done something wrong and are in need of correction. Alternate translation: “correct those who have sinned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
277 2TI 4 2 p101 ἐπιτίμησον 1 rebuke The word **rebuke** involves telling someone that they have done something wrong and warning them not to do it again. Alternate translation: “tell them not to sin”
278 2TI 4 2 p102 figs-hendiadys ἐν πάσῃ μακροθυμίᾳ καὶ διδαχῇ 1 with all patience and teaching Here, **patience and teaching** is a hendiadys, with **patience** modifying **teaching**. Alternate translation: “do these things by teaching very patiently” or “always do these things by teaching patiently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
279 2TI 4 2 g5r0 figs-explicit ἐν πάσῃ μακροθυμίᾳ καὶ διδαχῇ 1 with all patience and teaching The implication is that this is how Timothy should preach, reprove, rebuke, and exhort. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “do these things by teaching very patiently” or “always do these things by teaching patiently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
280 2TI 4 2 p103 figs-hyperbole ἐν πάσῃ μακροθυμίᾳ καὶ διδαχῇ 1 with all patience and teaching Here, **all** could mean: (1) Timothy should always be patient when he teaches. Alternate translation: “always teaching patiently” (2) a generalization for emphasis, meaning that Timothy should be very patient. Alternate translation: “by teaching very patiently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
281 2TI 4 3 jv7a ἔσται & καιρὸς ὅτε 1 there will be a time when Alternate translation: “the time will come when”
282 2TI 4 3 u2cc οὐκ ἀνέξονται 1 they will not endure Alternate translation: “they will no longer listen patiently to”
283 2TI 4 3 ilx7 figs-explicit οὐκ ἀνέξονται 1 they will not endure The context indicates that **they** means people who are a part of the community of believers. Alternate translation: “some believers will no longer listen patiently to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
284 2TI 4 3 fyl3 figs-metonymy τῆς ὑγιαινούσης διδασκαλίας 1 healthy teaching The expression **healthy teaching** means “correct teaching” by association, since a healthy mind would recognize that correct teaching was reasonable. Alternate translation: “correct teaching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
285 2TI 4 3 e5t2 figs-metaphor κατὰ τὰς ἰδίας ἐπιθυμίας, ἑαυτοῖς ἐπισωρεύσουσιν διδασκάλους 1 they will heap up for themselves teachers according to their own desires Paul speaks of how people will obtain many teachers as if they were putting them into a heap or pile. They will want many teachers, but not value these teachers for how they live godly lives or how accurately they teach. Alternate translation: “they will gather many teachers for themselves who will teach what they want” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
286 2TI 4 3 s375 figs-idiom κνηθόμενοι τὴν ἀκοήν 1 their ear itching Paul speaks of people badly wanting to hear something as if their ears itched and could only be relieved if they found many teachers who would tell them what they wanted to hear. Alternate translation: “because they want to hear it so badly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
287 2TI 4 3 p104 figs-metonymy κνηθόμενοι τὴν ἀκοήν 1 their ear itching Paul uses the **ear** to mean hearing. Alternate translation: “because they want to hear it so badly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
288 2TI 4 4 rh2i figs-metaphor ἀπὸ μὲν τῆς ἀληθείας τὴν ἀκοὴν ἀποστρέψουσιν 1 will both turn their ear away from the truth Paul speaks about people no longer paying attention as if they were physically turning their ears away so that they could not hear. Alternate translation: “will no longer pay attention to the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
289 2TI 4 4 p105 figs-metonymy ἀπὸ μὲν τῆς ἀληθείας τὴν ἀκοὴν ἀποστρέψουσιν 1 will both turn their ear away from the truth Paul uses the **ear** to mean listening. Listening, in turn, means paying attention. Alternate translation: “will no longer pay attention to the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
290 2TI 4 4 xrv7 figs-metaphor ἐπὶ & τοὺς μύθους ἐκτραπήσονται 1 be turned aside to myths Paul speaks about people starting to pay attention to **myths** as if someone were getting them to wander off in the wrong direction. Alternate translation: “these teachers will get them to pay attention to stories that are not true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
291 2TI 4 4 p106 figs-activepassive ἐπὶ & τοὺς μύθους ἐκτραπήσονται 1 be turned aside to myths If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form, and you can state who would do the action. Alternate translation: “these teachers will get them to pay attention to stories that are not true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
292 2TI 4 5 ehz7 figs-metaphor νῆφε 1 be sober Paul wants his readers to think correctly about everything, and so he speaks as if he wanted them to **be sober** rather than drunk. Alternate translation: “think clearly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
293 2TI 4 5 tv3k εὐαγγελιστοῦ 1 of an evangelist Alternate translation: “of a person who proclaims the good news about Jesus”
294 2TI 4 6 p107 ἐγὼ & ἤδη σπένδομαι 1 I am already being poured out While Paul speaks of his death as **already** happening, he means that it is an event that will happen soon. Alternate translation: “I will soon be poured out”
295 2TI 4 6 sh23 figs-metaphor ἐγὼ & ἤδη σπένδομαι 1 I am already being poured out Paul speaks of himself as if he were wine in a cup that was **being poured out** as a sacrifice to God. Alternate translation: “the sacrifice of my life to God will soon be complete” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
296 2TI 4 6 p108 figs-activepassive ἐγὼ & ἤδη σπένδομαι 1 I am already being poured out If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “My life will soon end as a sacrifice to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
297 2TI 4 6 fb7l figs-euphemism ὁ καιρὸς τῆς ἀναλύσεώς μου ἐφέστηκεν 1 the time of my departure is here Paul refers to his death as a **departure**. This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant. Alternate translation: “soon I will die and leave this world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
298 2TI 4 7 d9ts figs-metaphor τὸν καλὸν ἀγῶνα ἠγώνισμαι 1 I have fought the good fight Paul speaks of himself as if he has been competing in an athletic contest. Here, **good** could mean: (1) the kind of effort Paul has made. Alternate translation: “I have done my best” (2) Paul has pursued a worthwhile endeavor. Alternate translation: “I have worked hard for what really matters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
299 2TI 4 7 kq83 figs-metaphor τὸν δρόμον τετέλεκα 1 I have finished the race Paul speaks of his life of service to God as if he had been running a **race** on foot. Alternate translation: “I have completed what I needed to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
300 2TI 4 7 vk2p figs-metaphor τὴν πίστιν τετήρηκα 1 I have kept the faith Paul speaks of **the faith**, by which he means his trust in Christ and his obedience to God, as if they were valuable objects that he has kept safe in his possession. This could mean: (1) Paul was faithful to do what God told him to do. Alternate translation: “I have remained faithful in doing my ministry” (2) Paul was faithful to teach the truth. Alternate translation: “I have preserved the teachings from any error” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
301 2TI 4 8 ujg5 figs-activepassive ἀπόκειταί μοι ὁ τῆς δικαιοσύνης στέφανος 1 the crown of righteousness has been reserved for me If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “God has reserved the crown of righteousness for me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
302 2TI 4 8 hg8i figs-metaphor τῆς δικαιοσύνης στέφανος 1 the crown of righteousness Here, the **crown** could: (1) represent the reward that God gives to people who have lived the right way. Alternate translation: “the reward for the righteous” (2) represent righteousness itself. Just as the judge of a race gives a crown to the winner, when Paul finishes his life, God will declare that Paul is righteous. Alternate translation: “the reward that is righteousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
303 2TI 4 8 dwn6 translate-unknown στέφανος 1 crown See how you translated **crown** in [2:5](../02/05.md). The **crown** that Paul is using as an illustration of the future award from God was a wreath made of laurel tree leaves that was given to winners of athletic contests. You can use a word in your language that would refer to a prize for winning a contest. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
304 2TI 4 8 n3k8 figs-explicit ἐν, ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ 1 on that day As in [1:12](../01/12.md), this refers to the **day** when Jesus returns to judge people. Alternate translation: “on the day of judgment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
305 2TI 4 8 uh88 πᾶσιν τοῖς ἠγαπηκόσι τὴν ἐπιφάνειαν αὐτοῦ 1 those who have loved his appearing Alternate translation: “to all those who are looking forward to his return”
306 2TI 4 8 p109 figs-metonymy τὴν ἐπιφάνειαν αὐτοῦ 1 his appearing See how you translated **his appearing** in [4:1](../04/01.md). Paul is referring to Christ’s return by association with the fact that he will appear once again to people on earth when he returns. Alternate translation: “his return” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
307 2TI 4 9 t8b7 σπούδασον ἐλθεῖν & ταχέως 1 come … quickly Alternate translation: “Come … as soon as possible”
308 2TI 4 10 e4xx translate-names Δημᾶς & Κρήσκης & Τίτος 1 Demas … Crescens … Titus **Demas**, **Crescens**, and **Titus** are names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
309 2TI 4 10 ji2l figs-metonymy τὸν νῦν αἰῶνα 1 the present age The expression **the present age** refers to worldly things as opposed to the things of God. Paul refers to these worldly things by association with the present time when people generally desire them, as opposed to the future time when the things of God will be established throughout the earth. Alternate translation: “the temporary comforts of this world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
310 2TI 4 10 u2qb figs-ellipsis Κρήσκης εἰς Γαλατίαν, Τίτος εἰς Δαλματίαν 1 Crescens to Galatia, Titus to Dalmatia Here Paul leaves out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. He means that like Demas, **Crescens** and **Titus** have left him. However, he is probably not saying that they did this because they also “loved this present age” like Demas. It is more likely that they are traveling to help the churches. Alternate translation: “Crescens has left me and gone to Galatia, and Titus has left me and gone to Dalmatia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
311 2TI 4 10 gs61 translate-names Γαλατίαν & Δαλματίαν 1 Galatia … Dalmatia This are the names of parts of the Roman empire. **Galatia** is an official Roman province and **Dalmatia** is an area in the southern part of the province of Illyricum. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
312 2TI 4 11 w21u μοι εὔχρηστος εἰς διακονίαν 1 he is useful to me for service This could mean: (1) Mark is **useful** in helping Paul to take care of his personal needs. Alternate translation: “he can help take care of my needs” (2) Mark is **useful** in helping Paul minister to others, especially by preaching and teaching. Alternate translation: “he is helpful to me in my ministry”
313 2TI 4 12 y60r ἀπέστειλα 1 I sent Timothy is at Ephesus when he receives this letter. It may be that Tychicus is the one who carried this letter to Timothy at Ephesus. If so, then Paul is writing from Timothy’s perspective, who would view Paul’s sending of Tychicus as a past event. If this is confusing in your language and you want to include this possibility, you may need to change the tense of the verb to future. Alternate translation: “soon I will be sending”
314 2TI 4 13 d5rw translate-unknown φελόνην 1 cloak The term **cloak** refers to a heavy garment worn over clothes. Alternate translation: “coat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
315 2TI 4 13 v9b6 translate-names Κάρπῳ 1 Carpus **Carpus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
316 2TI 4 13 k6tj translate-unknown τὰ βιβλία 1 the books The term **books** refers to scrolls. A scroll was a type of book made of a long sheet of papyrus or leather. After writing on a scroll or reading it, people would roll it up using rods on the ends. Alternate translation: “the scrolls” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
317 2TI 4 13 e395 translate-unknown μάλιστα τὰς μεμβράνας 1 especially the parchments The term **parchments** may refer to a specific type of scroll. Alternate translation: “especially those made from animal skins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
318 2TI 4 14 un4v translate-unknown Ἀλέξανδρος ὁ χαλκεὺς 1 Alexander the coppersmith The term **coppersmith** refers to a person who worked with things made of copper and other metals. Alternate translation: “Alexander, who works with metal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
319 2TI 4 14 kv94 translate-names Ἀλέξανδρος 1 Alexander **Alexander** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
320 2TI 4 14 wbx4 figs-metaphor ἀποδώσει αὐτῷ ὁ Κύριος κατὰ τὰ ἔργα αὐτοῦ 1 The Lord will repay him according to his deeds Paul speaks of punishment as if it were repayment. Alternate translation: “the Lord will give him the right punishment for what he has done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
321 2TI 4 15 i4aj figs-metonymy ἀντέστη τοῖς ἡμετέροις λόγοις 1 he … opposed our words The term **words** refers to the message that Paul and Timothy and their co-workers teach. Alternate translation: “he … opposed the message that we teach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
322 2TI 4 16 v847 ἐν τῇ πρώτῃ μου ἀπολογίᾳ 1 At my first defense Paul is referring to the opening session of his trial. By writing **first**, he is likely indicating that he will have to appear in court again. Alternate translation: “At the opening session of my trial” or “When I first appeared in court and explained my actions”
323 2TI 4 16 f2c3 οὐδείς μοι παρεγένετο 1 no one appeared with me Paul explains to Timothy that he had to go to court alone, without any supporters. Alternate translation: “no one testified on my behalf”
324 2TI 4 16 rm2t figs-activepassive μὴ αὐτοῖς λογισθείη 1 May it not be counted against them If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “May God not hold it against them” or “I pray that God does not punish those believers for deserting me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
325 2TI 4 17 t1fw figs-metaphor ὁ & Κύριός μοι παρέστη 1 the Lord stood with me Paul is speaking as if **the Lord** had physically **stood** with him. Alternate translation: “the Lord helped me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
326 2TI 4 17 y69m figs-activepassive ἵνα δι’ ἐμοῦ τὸ κήρυγμα πληροφορηθῇ 1 so that through me, the proclamation might be fully carried out If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. This could mean: (1) at his trial, Paul was able to explain the entire message God had given him to proclaim. Alternate translation: “so that I was able to proclaim all of the Lord’s message” (2) Paul was able to continue proclaiming God’s message right through to this time when he expected to lose his life. Alternate translation: “so that I was able to continue proclaiming the Lord’s message right to the end” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
327 2TI 4 17 p113 figs-hyperbole καὶ ἀκούσωσιν πάντα τὰ ἔθνη 1 and all the Gentiles might hear Here, **all** could be: (1) a figurative generalization. Alternate translation: “so that as many Gentiles as possible could hear it” (2) a reference to all the Gentiles in the court. Alternate translation: “so that all the Gentiles who were there might hear” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
328 2TI 4 17 gsr8 figs-metaphor ἐρύσθην ἐκ στόματος λέοντος 1 I was rescued out of the mouth of the lion Paul speaks as if he had been in danger of being killed by a **lion** at his court appearance. He could mean the physical danger of being sentenced to execution, or the spiritual danger of being tempted not to speak boldly for Jesus, or both. It would probably be best to leave both possibilities open in your translation. Alternate translation: “I was rescued from great danger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
329 2TI 4 17 p114 figs-activepassive ἐρύσθην ἐκ στόματος λέοντος 1 I was rescued out of the mouth of the lion If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “God rescued me from great danger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
330 2TI 4 18 p115 figs-idiom εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας τῶν αἰώνων 1 to the ages of the ages This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “forever and ever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
331 2TI 4 19 n4zc figs-metonymy τὸν Ὀνησιφόρου οἶκον 1 the household of Onesiphorus See how you translated this phrase in [1:16](../01/16.md). The word **household** refers to **Onesiphorus** and all the people in his family, possibly even his servants. Alternate translation: “Onesiphorus and everyone who lives with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
332 2TI 4 19 mef8 translate-names Ὀνησιφόρου 1 of Onesiphorus **Onesiphorus** is the name of a man. See how you translated this name in [1:16](../01/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
333 2TI 4 20 lie9 translate-names Ἔραστος & Τρόφιμον 1 Erastus … Trophimus **Erastus** and **Trophimus** are the names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
334 2TI 4 20 wp9h translate-names Μιλήτῳ 1 Miletus **Miletus** is the name of a city to the south of Ephesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
335 2TI 4 21 cvc7 σπούδασον & ἐλθεῖν 1 Hasten to come Alternate translation: “Do your best to come” or “Try as hard as you can to come”
336 2TI 4 21 eh95 figs-explicit πρὸ χειμῶνος 1 before winter The implication is that Timothy should try to come to Paul before the cold weather arrives and makes travel difficult or even impossible. If **winter** is the warm season in your area and summer is the cold season, or if your area does not have a cold season but a rainy season, you could use a more general expression. Alternate translation: “before the cold weather makes travel difficult” or “before the weather changes and makes travel difficult” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
337 2TI 4 21 z1j9 figs-ellipsis ἀσπάζεταί σε Εὔβουλος, καὶ Πούδης, καὶ Λίνος, καὶ Κλαυδία, καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ 1 Eubulus greets you, and Pudens, and Linus, and Claudia, and the brothers Here Paul leaves out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. To make sure that the meaning is clear, you could supply these words. The people listed after Eubulus are also greeting Timothy. Eubulus is not greeting them. Alternate translation: “Eubulus greets you, and so do Pudens, Linus, Claudia, and all the believers here” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
338 2TI 4 21 p7px translate-names Εὔβουλος & Πούδης & Λίνος 1 Eubulus … Pudens … Linus **Eubulus**, **Pudens**, and **Linus** are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
339 2TI 4 21 er77 translate-names Κλαυδία 1 Claudia **Claudia** is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
340 2TI 4 21 mk26 figs-gendernotations οἱ ἀδελφοὶ 1 the brothers The word **brothers** means all believers, whether male or female. Alternate translation: “all the believers here” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
341 2TI 4 22 tx26 figs-you ὁ Κύριος μετὰ τοῦ πνεύματός σου 1 The Lord be with your spirit Paul ends his letter with a blessing for Timothy. Here, **you** is singular and refers to Timothy. Alternate translation: “I pray that the Lord makes your spirit strong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
342 2TI 4 22 p119 figs-synecdoche ὁ Κύριος μετὰ τοῦ πνεύματός σου 1 The Lord be with your spirit Paul describes Timothy as a whole person by reference to his **spirit**, perhaps because he is wishing particularly for Timothy to receive spiritual strengthening. Alternate translation: “I pray that the Lord makes you strong” or “I pray that the Lord will strengthen you spiritually” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
343 2TI 4 22 k85y figs-you ἡ χάρις μεθ’ ὑμῶν 1 Grace be with you Paul ends his letter with a second blessing. The **you** here is plural and refers to all of the believers who are with Timothy. Alternate translation: “May grace be with all of you there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
344 2TI 4 22 p120 ἡ χάρις μεθ’ ὑμῶν 1 Grace be with you If it would be helpful in your language, you could state explicitly who Paul wishes will make this happen. Alternate translation: “May God give grace to all of you”

344
tn_2TI.tsv Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,344 @@
Reference ID Tags SupportReference Quote Occurrence Note
front:intro s7fk 0 # Introduction to 2 Timothy\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of the book of 2 Timothy\n\n1. Paul greets Timothy and encourages him to endure hardship as he serves God (1:1–2:13).\n2. Paul gives general instructions to Timothy (2:14–26).\n3. Paul warns Timothy about future events and instructs him about how to carry out his service to God (3:1–4:8).\n4. Paul makes personal remarks (4:9–22).\n\n### Who wrote the book of 2 Timothy?\n\nPaul wrote 2 Timothy. He was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.\n\nThis book is the second letter Paul wrote to Timothy. Timothy was his disciple and close friend. Paul wrote this letter while in prison in Rome. Paul would die soon after writing this letter.\n\n### What is the book of 2 Timothy about?\n\nPaul had left Timothy in the city of Ephesus to help the believers there. Paul wrote this letter to instruct Timothy about various matters. The topics he addressed include warnings about false teachers and advice about enduring difficult situations. This letter also shows how Paul was training Timothy to be a leader among the churches.\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\nTranslators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “2 Timothy” or “Second Timothy.” Or they may choose a different title, such as “Paul’s Second Letter to Timothy” or “The Second Letter to Timothy.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### What is the soldier imagery in 2 Timothy?\n\nAs Paul waited in prison, knowing he would die soon, he spoke of being a soldier of Jesus Christ. Soldiers have to obey to their leaders. In the same way, Christians have to obey Jesus. As “soldiers” of Christ, believers are to obey his commands, even if they die as a result.\n\n### What does it mean that God inspired Scripture?\n\nGod is the true author of Scripture. He inspired the human authors who wrote the books. That means God in some way caused the people to write what they wrote. This is why the Bible is also referred to as God’s word. This implies several things about it. First, everything that the Bible teaches is free from error and can be trusted. Second, God will always preserve his Scripture for every generation of people. Third, God’s word should be translated into all the world’s languages.\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### Singular and plural “you”\n\nIn this book, the word “I” refers to Paul. Here the word “you” is almost always singular and refers to Timothy. The exception to this is 4:22. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])\n\n### Inclusive and exclusive “we” and “us”\n\nIn this book, “we” and “us” include the writer, Paul, the recipient, Timothy, and all believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])\n\n### What did Paul mean by the expressions “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?\n\nPaul meant to express the idea of a very close union between Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.\n\n### What are the major textual issues in the text of the book of 2 Timothy?\n\nFor the following verses, the oldest Greek manuscripts differ from later Greek manuscripts. Modern translations may also differ depending on the Greek manuscript that they translate from. The ULT text translates the Greek from the oldest manuscripts, and puts the differences from later manuscripts in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible already exists in the general region, translators should consider following the decision in that translation. If not, translators are advised to follow the oldest Greek manuscripts as reflected in the ULT text.\n* “Because of this, I was appointed a preacher, an apostle, and a teacher” (1:11). Some later manuscripts read, “Because of this, I was appointed a preacher, an apostle, and a teacher to the Gentiles.”\n* “Warn them before God” (2:14). Some later manuscripts read, “Warn them before the Lord.”\n\n(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
1:intro p5lf 0 # 2 Timothy 1 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nPaul formally introduces this letter in verses 1–2. Writers often began letters in this way in the ancient Near East.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Spiritual children\n\nPaul discipled Timothy as a Christian and a church leader. Paul may also have led him to believe in Christ. Therefore, Paul calls Timothy “beloved child.” So even though Paul was not Timothy’s father, Paul speaks of his relationship with Timothy as that of a father and son in a spiritual sense. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### Persecution\n\nPaul was in prison when he wrote this letter. Paul encourages Timothy to be willing to suffer for the gospel.
1:1 ha4l Παῦλος 1 This letter follows the normal custom of the time by beginning with the name and identity of the author, then mentioning the recipient (in verse 2). Your language may have a particular way of introducing the author of a letter. If so, you could use it in your translation. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, am writing this letter”
1:1 vl2g διὰ θελήματος Θεοῦ 1 Paul became an apostle because God wanted him to be an apostle. Alternate translation: “because of God’s will” or “because God wanted it to be so”
1:1 e1lg κατ’ 1 This could mean: (1) God appointed Paul to tell others about the promise of life in Jesus. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of announcing” (2) Paul became an apostle because he himself received the promise of life in Jesus. Alternate translation: “as a result of receiving”
1:1 m9kv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ζωῆς τῆς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 Paul speaks of **life** as if it were an object inside of Jesus. This refers to the life people receive as a result of belonging to Christ Jesus. Alternate translation: “of the life that we receive as a result of belonging to Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:2 rp5u Τιμοθέῳ 1 Your language may have a particular way of introducing the person who receives a letter. If so, you could use it in your translation. Alternate translation: “This letter is for you, Timothy”
1:2 ey7g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀγαπητῷ τέκνῳ 1 Paul was not Timothy’s father, but he uses the term **child** to express his love and approval of Timothy. It is also likely that Paul introduced Timothy to Christ, and so Paul considered him his child in a spiritual sense. Alternate translation: “who is like a beloved son to me” or “you are like a dear child to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:2 w43q rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing χάρις, ἔλεος, εἰρήνη, ἀπὸ 1 After stating the name of the author and the person who is receiving it (Timothy), Paul adds a blessing to Timothy. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing in your language. Alternate translation: “may you experience kindness, mercy, and peace within you from” or “I pray that you will have grace, mercy, and peace from” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
1:2 p003 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns χάρις, ἔλεος, εἰρήνη 1 Paul’s blessing to Timothy includes the three abstract nouns **Grace**, **mercy**, and **peace**. Your language may have a particular way of expressing these concepts, such as with verbs. If so, you could use them in your translation. See the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:2 ub7c rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Θεοῦ Πατρὸς 1 **Father** is an important title for God. Here, **Father** could refer to: (1) the Father of Christ. (2) the Father of believers. Alternate translation: “God, who is the Father” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
1:2 dcr3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 In this book, unless otherwise noted, the words **we**, **us**, and **our** refer to Paul (the writer of this letter), Timothy (the one to whom this letter is written), and, by extension, all believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
1:3 p004 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns χάριν ἔχω τῷ Θεῷ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **gratitude** with a verb or an adjective. Alternate translation: “I thank God” or “I am thankful to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:3 tvb7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ᾧ λατρεύω ἀπὸ προγόνων 1 This is an idiom that means that Paul’s family has been serving God for many generations. Alternate translation: “whom my ancestors served and I serve, as well” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1:3 ha9d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν καθαρᾷ συνειδήσει 1 Paul speaks of his **conscience** as if it could be physically **clean**. A person with a **clean conscience** does not feel guilty because he has always tried to do what was right. Alternate translation: “knowing I have tried my hardest to do what is right” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:3 rz7s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ὡς ἀδιάλειπτον ἔχω τὴν περὶ σοῦ μνείαν 1 Paul speaks of the action of remembering by using the abstract noun **remembrance**. Your language may have a particular way of expressing this concept, such as with a verb. If so, you could use it in your translation. Alternate translation: “as I think about you constantly in my prayers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:3 p005 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular σοῦ 1 The word **you** is singular here and throughout the book, since Paul is addressing Timothy. A note will discuss the one exception in 4:22. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
1:3 pa6q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism νυκτὸς καὶ ἡμέρας 1 Here, **night and day** are used together to refer to all the time included in the night and the day. This means that Paul prays to God often, no matter what time it is. It does not mean that he prays all night and all day without ever stopping. Alternate translation: “at all times” Alternate translation: “always” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
1:4 p006 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μεμνημένος σου τῶν δακρύων 1 It is implied that Paul is referring here to the time when Paul was leaving Timothy. If this is unclear, you could include this information. Alternate translation: “remembering how you cried when I left you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:4 kk82 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy σου τῶν δακρύων 1 Here, **your tears** refers to the act of Timothy’s crying or being very sad. Alternate translation: “that you cried” or “your sadness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1:4 gu8c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor χαρᾶς πληρωθῶ 1 Paul speaks of himself as if he were a container that could be **filled**. Alternate translation: “I may be very joyful” or “I may rejoice a lot” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:4 p007 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive χαρᾶς πληρωθῶ 1 If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “joy may fill me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1:5 ayl4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ὑπόμνησιν λαβὼν 1 This is an idiom that simply means, “remembering.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1:5 buc3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῆς ἐν σοὶ ἀνυποκρίτου πίστεως 1 Paul refers to Timothy’s **faith** with an abstract noun. Your language may have a particular way of expressing this concept, such as with a verb. If so, you could use it in your translation. Alternate translation: “that you genuinely believe” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:5 p008 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τῆς ἐν σοὶ ἀνυποκρίτου πίστεως 1 Paul speaks of **faith** as if it were an object inside of Timothy. Paul is referring to Timothy’s faith in God here, not to anyone’s faith in Timothy. Alternate translation: “your genuine faith” or “your faith that is genuine” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:5 vgz2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἐν σοὶ ἀνυποκρίτου πίστεως, ἥτις ἐνῴκησεν πρῶτον ἐν τῇ μάμμῃ σου, Λωΐδι, καὶ τῇ μητρί σου, Εὐνίκῃ; πέπεισμαι δὲ ὅτι καὶ ἐν σοί 1 Paul is speaking of their **faith** as if it were something that was alive and lived **in** each of them. Alternate translation: “of the genuine faith that you have. Lois, your grandmother, and then Eunice, your mother, had this faith in God, and now I am confident that you have this same genuine faith as well” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
1:5 l8wc rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Λωΐδι 1 **Lois** is the name of a woman, Timothy’s grandmother, who is probably his mother’s mother. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1:5 p009 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Εὐνίκῃ 1 **Eunice** is the name of a woman, Timothy’s mother. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1:6 j58k δι’ ἣν αἰτίαν 1 Paul writes that the **reason** for asking Timothy to rekindle his gift is that he is confident of Timothy’s faith in Jesus. Alternate translation: “for this reason” or “because of your faith in Jesus”
1:6 h6eq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀναζωπυρεῖν τὸ χάρισμα 1 Paul speaks about Timothy’s need to start using his **gift** again as if he were restarting a fire. Alternate translation: “be eager once more to use the gift” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:6 i977 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction τὸ χάρισμα τοῦ Θεοῦ, ὅ ἐστιν ἐν σοὶ διὰ τῆς ἐπιθέσεως τῶν χειρῶν μου 1 Paul placed his **hands** on Timothy and prayed that God would give him power from God’s Spirit to enable him to do the work that God had called him to do. Then Timothy received the gift from the Holy Spirit. See how you translated this in 1 Tim 4:14. Alternate translation: “the gift of God that you received when I prayed for you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
1:6 p010 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸ χάρισμα τοῦ Θεοῦ, ὅ ἐστιν ἐν σοὶ διὰ τῆς ἐπιθέσεως τῶν χειρῶν μου 1 Paul speaks of **the gift** as an object inside of Timothy. If the words **that is in you** do not clearly communicate in your language that Timothy received the gift, you could translate it with a verb that expressing the idea of giving or receiving. Alternate translation: “the gift of God that you received when I laid my hands on you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:6 s6vb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸ χάρισμα τοῦ Θεοῦ, ὅ ἐστιν ἐν σοὶ διὰ τῆς ἐπιθέσεως τῶν χειρῶν μου 1 It is implied that this is a spiritual gift that enables Timothy to do the work of ministry that God has called him to do, and that Paul also prayed for Timothy as he laid his hands on him. If these things are not clear, you may want to include this information in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:7 u8vl rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, **For** indicates that this verse provides another reason for Paul’s instruction in the previous verse that Timothy should use his spiritual gift. If it would be helpful in your language, you could replace **For** with this information here. Alternate translation: “Another reason why I want you to start using again the gift God that gave you is that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1:7 h1z3 οὐ & ἔδωκεν ἡμῖν ὁ Θεὸς πνεῦμα δειλίας, ἀλλὰ δυνάμεως, καὶ ἀγάπης, καὶ σωφρονισμοῦ 1 Here, **spirit** could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “God’s Holy Spirit does not cause us to be afraid. He causes us to have power and love and discipline” (2) the character of a human being. Alternate translation: “God does not cause us to be afraid but to have power and love and discipline”
1:7 p011 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns δυνάμεως, καὶ ἀγάπης, καὶ σωφρονισμοῦ 1 Paul uses abstract nouns to refer to three things that Timothy should be able to do. Your language may have a particular way of expressing these concepts, such as with verbs. If so, you could use them in your translation. Alternate translation: “one that makes us able to obey, to love, and to control ourselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:7 k6g7 σωφρονισμοῦ 1 Here, **discipline** could refer to: (1) self-control. Alternate translation: “of the ability to control ourselves” (2) the power to correct or even to control others. Alternate translation: “of the ability to correct others”
1:8 fk9z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸ μαρτύριον 1 Paul may be using the word **testimony** to refer to the activity of telling others about the Lord and not to the message itself. Alternate translation: “of testifying” or “of telling others” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1:8 blk9 τὸν δέσμιον αὐτοῦ 1 Paul is not being held **prisoner** by the Lord. He is a prisoner because he has testified about the Lord. Alternate translation: “a prisoner for his sake” or “a prisoner for the Lord”
1:8 ry82 συνκακοπάθησον τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ 1 The term **together** could mean: (1) Timothy should suffer together with Paul. (2) Timothy should suffer together with all Christians who suffer.
1:8 xa86 συνκακοπάθησον τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ 1 Here, **for the gospel** means “for the sake of telling other people the good news about Jesus.” Alternate translation: “along with me, accept the suffering that results from telling other people the good news about Jesus”
1:8 hi9a τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ, κατὰ δύναμιν Θεοῦ 1 Paul is reminding Timothy that God provides people with **power** when they suffer so that they can endure the suffering. Alternate translation: “for the gospel, allowing God to make you strong”
1:9 ld55 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy καλέσαντος κλήσει ἁγίᾳ 1 Here, **with a holy calling** could refer to: (1) what results from the calling. The call produces holy people or people set apart for God. Alternate translation: “called us with a calling that sets us apart as holy to God” (2) the source of the calling, which is God, who is holy. Alternate translation: “called us by means of his own holy calling” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1:9 lmas οὐ κατὰ τὰ ἔργα ἡμῶν 1 It may be helpful to start a new sentence here. If you do start a new sentence, for clarity you may wish to repeat some words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “He did not save us and call us because of our works”
1:9 kyr5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys ἀλλὰ κατὰ ἰδίαν πρόθεσιν καὶ χάριν 1 Here the words **purpose** and **grace** work together to mean “gracious purpose.” Paul is saying that God’s purpose or plan for us includes showing us grace or kindness through Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “but because of his gracious purpose” or “but because he planned to show us kindness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
1:9 p012 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καὶ χάριν, τὴν δοθεῖσαν ἡμῖν ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “and grace, which God gave to us in Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1:9 pq1z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 Paul speaks of God’s **purpose and grace** or “gracious purpose” as if it were an object inside of **Christ Jesus**. This refers to God’s plan to save people that Jesus fulfilled. So when people begin a relationship with Jesus, then God saves them. Alternate translation: “through our relationship to Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:9 zq7m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom πρὸ χρόνων αἰωνίων 1 This is an idiom that indicates that God decided to save through faith in Christ before time and the creation of the world. Alternate translation: “before time began” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
1:10 h5e5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor φανερωθεῖσαν δὲ νῦν 1 Paul speaks of God’s gracious plan to save us as if it were an object that could be uncovered and shown to people through the arrival of Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “and which now people can know” or “and which now people can experience” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:10 p013 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive φανερωθεῖσαν δὲ νῦν 1 If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “which now God has revealed” or “which now God has allowed people to know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1:10 i3wl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor φωτίσαντος δὲ ζωὴν καὶ ἀφθαρσίαν διὰ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου 1 Paul refers to **life** and **immortality** as if they were objects that could be brought from darkness into light so that people could see them. He is speaking of revealing something or making it known to people. Alternate translation: “and revealed life and immortality through the gospel” or “and declared life and immortality through the gospel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:10 a1n7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys ζωὴν καὶ ἀφθαρσίαν 1 Here, **life** and **immortality** are probably working together to mean “immortal life.” Alternate translation: “eternal life” or “incorruptible life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
1:11 tb9b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐτέθην ἐγὼ κῆρυξ 1 If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “God chose me to be a herald” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
1:11 p014 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown κῆρυξ 1 A **herald** is someone who is sent out to announce a message. If your language does not have a similar term and your readers would not know what a **herald** is, you can use a general expression. Alternate translation: “a messenger” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
1:11 p015 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor κῆρυξ 1 Paul compares himself to a **herald** because God has sent him out to announce the gospel message. Alternate translation: “a preacher” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:12 j37g δι’ ἣν αἰτίαν 1 Paul provides the **reason** for his suffering by referring back to his status as an apostle. Alternate translation: “because I am an apostle”
1:12 y8l4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καὶ ταῦτα πάσχω 1 Paul does not mention the specific **things** that he is **suffering**, but from the context of the letter, the implication is that he is referring to suffering as a prisoner. Alternate translation: “I also suffer as a prisoner” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:12 td39 πέπεισμαι 1 Paul expresses that he is **certain** that God will make everything right in the end. Alternate translation: “I am sure”
1:12 p6pi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὴν παραθήκην μου φυλάξαι 1 Paul is using a metaphor of a person leaving something with another person who is supposed to protect it until he gives it back to the first person. The two people involved are Jesus and Paul, but it is not clear which one is holding the **deposit**. This could mean: (1) Paul is trusting Jesus to keep something safe that Paul has entrusted to Jesus. This could be Paul’s own life, or, more specifically, that Paul would remain faithful to Jesus all of his life. Alternate translation: “to keep me faithful to him” (2) Paul is trusting Jesus to preserve the good news that Jesus has deposited with Paul for Paul to preach. Alternate translation: “to help me keep preaching his message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:12 hhu5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὴν παραθήκην μου 1 The term **my** here conveys the idea that this **deposit** is associated with Paul in some way. The particular association depends on what we consider the deposit to be. This could mean: (1) the deposit is associated with Paul because it is Paul’s own life or Paul’s faith in Jesus. Alternate translation: “my faithfulness to him” (2) the deposit is associated with Paul because it is the gospel message that Paul preaches. Alternate translation: “the gospel message that he has entrusted to me to preach” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
1:12 qcu3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐκείνην τὴν ἡμέραν 1 This refers to the **day** when Jesus returns for judgment. Alternate translation: “the day of judgment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:13 h1qd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὑγιαινόντων λόγων 1 Paul wants Timothy to teach the things that he taught and thereby to follow his example. The expression **healthy words** means “the correct message” by association, since a healthy mind would recognize that the correct message was reasonable. Alternate translation: “of the correct message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1:13 p016 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy λόγων 1 Paul uses the term **words** to describe the expression in words of what Christians believe. Alternate translation: “of … message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1:13 p017 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν πίστει καὶ ἀγάπῃ τῇ ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 Paul uses two abstract nouns, **faith** and **love**, to refer to actions that Timothy should do. Your language may have a particular way of expressing these concepts, such as with verbs. If so, you could use them in your translation. Alternate translation: “trusting in Christ Jesus and loving others because you belong to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
1:13 b2ld ἐν πίστει καὶ ἀγάπῃ τῇ ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 Here, **love** could refer to: (1) the love that Timothy should show others. Alternate translation: “trusting in Christ Jesus and loving others because you belong to him” (2) the love that Timothy should show to God. Alternate translation: “trusting in Christ Jesus and loving him”
1:13 ix6w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 Paul speaks of **faith** and **love** as if they were objects inside of **Christ Jesus**. This refers to the faith and love that Jesus enables us to have when we belong to him. See how you translated this phrase in 1:9. Alternate translation: “ours through our relationship to Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:14 i5g5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὴν καλὴν παραθήκην 1 Here, **the good deposit** refers to the gospel message that God has entrusted to Timothy to share with his people. Alternate translation: “the good message entrusted to you for God’s people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:14 cb5q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὴν καλὴν παραθήκην φύλαξον 1 Timothy needs to be alert to protect the gospel message because people will oppose him and try to distort what he says and teaches, turning it into a different message. Alternate translation: “Protect the good deposit against those who will try to distort it” or “Because people will try to distort the gospel message, guard it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:14 a3v2 διὰ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 Here, **through** means “by means of” or “by the power of.” Alternate translation: “by means of the Holy Spirit” or “with the help of the Holy Spirit”
1:15 p018 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole πάντες οἱ ἐν τῇ Ἀσίᾳ 1 The word **all** could mean: (1) “many, but not all” in the strict sense, since Timothy and Onesiphorus did not turn away from him. So this would be an example of hyperbole. (2) the men who came to Rome with him from Asia Minor. Alternate translation: “all who came with me from Asia” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
1:15 p6f4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀπεστράφησάν με 1 This is a metaphor that means they left Paul and stopped helping him. Alternate translation: “have deserted me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:15 p020 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀπεστράφησάν με 1 Paul assumes that Timothy would know that the reason that the believers from Asia had abandoned him was because the authorities had put him in prison. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “have deserted me because I am in prison” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:15 x6cc rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Φύγελος & Ἑρμογένης 1 **Phygelus** and **Hermogenes** are the names of men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1:16 izk9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing δῴη ἔλεος ὁ Κύριος τῷ Ὀνησιφόρου οἴκῳ 1 Paul is asking God to bless the family of **Onesiphorus**. You can express this as either a blessing or a prayer, in whichever way is more natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I pray that the Lord will be kind to the family of Onesiphorus” or “May the Lord bless the family of Onesiphorus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
1:16 e6hl rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ὀνησιφόρου 1 **Onesiphorus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
1:16 zz44 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τῷ Ὀνησιφόρου οἴκῳ 1 The word **household** refers to **Onesiphorus** and to all the people in his family, possibly even his servants. Alternate translation: “to Onesiphorus and everyone who lives with him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1:16 td1q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὴν ἅλυσίν μου οὐκ ἐπησχύνθη 1 The word **chain** refers to being in prison. Onesiphorus was not ashamed that Paul was in prison but came to visit him frequently. Alternate translation: “was not ashamed of my imprisonment” or “was not ashamed of my being in prison” or “was not ashamed of me, even though I was in prison” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
1:17 xfg1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλὰ 1 Here, **but** indicates a contrast between the previous verse and this verse. Instead of being ashamed that Paul was in prison, Onesiphorus searched for Paul and found him there. Use whatever form is most natural in your language to show this contrast. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
1:18 p3di rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing δῴη αὐτῷ ὁ Κύριος, εὑρεῖν ἔλεος παρὰ Κυρίου 1 Paul is again asking for the Lord to **grant mercy** to Onesiphorus. You can express this as either a blessing or a prayer, in whichever way is more natural in your language. See how you translated this in [1:16](../01/16.md). Alternate translation: “I pray that the Lord will be merciful to Onesiphorus” or “May the Lord have mercy on Onesiphorus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
1:18 x0eo rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result (δῴη αὐτῷ ὁ Κύριος, εὑρεῖν ἔλεος παρὰ Κυρίου ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ), καὶ ὅσα ἐν Ἐφέσῳ διηκόνησεν, βέλτιον σὺ γινώσκεις 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could reverse the order of these sentences, since the second sentence gives the reason for the action that the first sentence describes. See the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
1:18 r54t rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns δῴη αὐτῷ ὁ Κύριος, εὑρεῖν ἔλεος παρὰ Κυρίου 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the name “Onesiphorus” instead of the pronoun **him** to make it clear who is receiving mercy. Alternate translation: “May Onesiphorus receive mercy from the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
1:18 x2dk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εὑρεῖν ἔλεος παρὰ Κυρίου 1 Paul speaks of **mercy** as if it were an object that could be found. Paul is expressing his desire that God show **mercy** to Onesiphorus on the day of judgment. Alternate translation: “to receive mercy from the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
1:18 f3ep rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ 1 The expression **that day** refers to the day when God will judge all people; at that time they will receive mercy from the Lord, as Paul mentions, or wrath. Alternate translation: “on the day of judgment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
1:18 p025 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὅσα ἐν Ἐφέσῳ διηκόνησεν, βέλτιον σὺ γινώσκεις 1 Paul is reminding Timothy that Onesiphorus helped him earlier, **in Ephesus**. So, Paul is asking the Lord to bless Onesiphorus because he helped Paul several times. Alternate translation: “you know well how much he also helped me earlier when I was in Ephesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:intro k3zn 0 # 2 Timothy 2 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nIn verses 11b–13, Paul may be quoting a poem or hymn. To show the reader that this may be a quotation, in your translation you may choose to set these verses farther to the right than the other verses in the chapter.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### We will reign with him\n\nFaithful Christians will reign with Christ in the future. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]])\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### Analogies\n\nIn this chapter, Paul makes several analogies to teach about living as a Christian. He uses analogies of soldiers, athletes, and farmers. Later in the chapter, he uses the analogy of different kinds of containers in a house.
2:1 bll5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τέκνον μου 1 Here, **child** is a term of great love and approval. Timothy is not Paul’s biological child. It is also likely that Paul introduced Timothy to Christ, and so this is why Paul considered him like his own child. Alternate translation: “who are like my child” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:1 p026 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐνδυναμοῦ 1 You could express this with an active form, and you could state who would do the action. Alternate translation: “let God make you strong” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:1 e6ex rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν τῇ χάριτι τῇ ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 Paul wants Timothy to experience the strength that God provides through his **grace** or kindness. Believers experience God’s grace through knowing Jesus Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **grace** with an adjective. Alternate translation: “as you allow Christ Jesus to kindly empower you through your relationship to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2:2 ig9v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit διὰ πολλῶν μαρτύρων 1 Paul is referring to teaching in a public setting with others present. The implication is that those others could testify as to what he taught. Alternate translation: “in the presence of people who can testify to what I said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:2 kv1m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ταῦτα παράθου 1 Paul speaks of his instructions to Timothy as if they were objects that Timothy could give to other people and trust them to use correctly. Alternate translation: “commit them” or “teach them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:2 p027 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations πιστοῖς ἀνθρώποις 1 Here the term **men** has a generic sense that may include women. Alternate translation: “to faithful people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
2:3 yc1j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit συνκακοπάθησον 1 Here, **together** could mean: (1) Timothy should suffer together with Paul. Alternate translation: “Suffer together with me” (2) Timothy should suffer together with all Christians who suffer. Alternate translation: “Suffer together with all believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:3 juu2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὡς καλὸς στρατιώτης Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Paul compares suffering for Christ Jesus to the suffering that a good soldier endures. Alternate translation: “as if you were a soldier and Jesus Christ were your commander” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:4 a4x7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὐδεὶς στρατευόμενος ἐμπλέκεται ταῖς τοῦ βίου πραγματίαις 1 To help Timothy understand something important about following Jesus, Paul introduces the metaphor of a **soldier** who has to decide between pleasing his leader or pleasing those outside the army. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this. Alternate translation: “Consider that no dedicated soldier allows the affairs of life to distract him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:4 p7n5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐμπλέκεται ταῖς τοῦ βίου πραγματίαις 1 Paul speaks of being involved in other matters as if they were a net that trapped people and kept them from being able to move freely. Alternate translation: “allows the affairs of life to distract him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:4 p028 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐμπλέκεται ταῖς τοῦ βίου πραγματίαις 1 If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “allows the affairs of life to distract him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:4 p029 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοῦ βίου 1 By **life**, Paul means, in the context of this metaphor, “civilian life.” The implication is that Timothy and all believers should not allow competing concerns to keep them from serving Christ. Alternate translation: “of everyday life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:4 d2lg τῷ στρατολογήσαντι 1 Alternate translation: “his leader” or “the one who commands him”
2:5 d483 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐὰν & ἀθλῇ τις, οὐ στεφανοῦται, ἐὰν μὴ νομίμως ἀθλήσῃ 1 To help Timothy understand something important about following Jesus, Paul introduces the metaphor of an athlete who has to decide between competing **lawfully** or not lawfully. The athlete will only receive the crown given to the winner if he competes lawfully. By making this comparison with an athlete competing in games, Paul is implicitly telling Timothy that Christ will not reward him unless he serves him **lawfully**, that is, unless he obeys him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this directly. Alternate translation: “consider that the officials only crown an athlete as the winner if he competes according to the rules” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:5 p031 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo ἐὰν & ἀθλῇ τις, οὐ στεφανοῦται, ἐὰν μὴ νομίμως ἀθλήσῃ 1 Paul is also using a hypothetical situation to teach Timothy. Alternate translation: “suppose an athlete did not compete by the rules. Then he would not be crowned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
2:5 p032 ἐὰν & ἀθλῇ τις 1 Here, **competes** refers to competing in an athletic event. Alternate translation: “if an athlete competes in an event”
2:5 xbn6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives οὐ στεφανοῦται, ἐὰν μὴ νομίμως ἀθλήσῃ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this double negative by translating it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “the officials will only crown him if he competes by the rules” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
2:5 p033 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οὐ στεφανοῦται 1 If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “the officials will not crown him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:5 p034 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐ στεφανοῦται 1 Paul assumes that Timothy will know that in this culture crowning indicated the winner of a competition. Alternate translation: “the officials will not crown him as the winner” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:5 lea8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown οὐ στεφανοῦται 1 In Paul’s time, when athletes won competitions, they were **crowned** with wreaths made from the leaves of plants. You can express this idea in your translation by referring to the comparable custom in your own culture, or by using a general expression. Alternate translation: “the officials will not give him an award” or “the officials will not declare him to be the winner” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2:5 reg6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μὴ νομίμως ἀθλήσῃ 1 Paul is referring to the rules that governed a competition. The athletes had to obey the rules or they would be removed from the competition and not have an opportunity to win. If it would be helpful in your language, you could mention these rules. Alternate translation: “he does not compete according to the rules” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:6 wz35 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸν κοπιῶντα γεωργὸν δεῖ πρῶτον τῶν καρπῶν μεταλαμβάνειν 1 To help Timothy understand something important about following Jesus, Paul introduces the metaphor of a **farmer** who has to decide between working hard or not working hard. The farmer will receive a share of the harvest if he is working hard. By making this comparison, Paul is encouraging Timothy to work hard in his service to Christ so that God will reward him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this directly. Alternate translation: “Consider that a farmer who works hard should receive a share of the crops before anyone else” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:6 p035 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πρῶτον τῶν καρπῶν μεταλαμβάνειν 1 In this illustration, it seems that the hardworking farmer is working with other farmers who will all receive a part of the crop after the harvest. But since this farmer works harder than the others, he should receive before the others. It is implied that receiving first is best, possibly because the quality of the crop is better. Alternate translation: “receive the best share of the crops” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:7 bdk9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit νόει ὃ λέγω, δώσει γάρ σοι ὁ Κύριος σύνεσιν 1 Paul gave Timothy three metaphors in verses 3–6, but he did not completely explain their implications. He expected Timothy to figure out, with God’s help, the lesson of these metaphors for Christ’s servants. For that reason, if you want to include an explanation of the meaning of the metaphors, we recommend that you state the meaning in a footnote rather than in the Bible text. Alternate translation: “you will have to think carefully about what I have just told you to understand it completely, but you can depend on God to help you to do that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:7 p036 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὃ λέγω 1 Paul refers to what he has just written in his letter with the verb **saying** to express the idea of communicating. Alternate translation: “what I have just told you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2:7 a22q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν πᾶσιν 1 Here, **in everything** refers to everything related to the three metaphors that Paul has written just before this. Alternate translation: “about everything that I have just said” or “about all that I said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:8 mh1k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐκ σπέρματος Δαυείδ 1 The phrase **from the seed of** refers to Jesus being descended from King David. Alternate translation: “who is a descendant of David” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:8 wt31 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐγηγερμένον ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 The expression **raised from the dead** is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “whom God caused to live again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2:8 p038 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐγηγερμένον ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “whom God raised from the dead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:8 s4vh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession κατὰ τὸ εὐαγγέλιόν μου 1 The term **my** conveys the idea that it is the gospel associated with Paul because he preaches it. Alternate translation: “according to the gospel message that I preach” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
2:9 t2ax rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy μέχρι δεσμῶν 1 Paul uses the expression **unto chains** to express how far his suffering has gone: from being beaten, to being arrested, to being in chains in prison. Alternate translation: “to the point of being imprisoned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2:9 p039 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile ὡς κακοῦργος 1 Paul compares his situation to the shameful one that a person would be in who had actually committed a crime. Alternate translation: “as if I were a criminal” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
2:9 pc6t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ οὐ δέδεται 1 Here, **bound** means being held in chains as a prisoner, referring to Paul’s condition. Paul contrasts himself, an actual prisoner, with God’s message, which can never be held prisoner. Alternate translation: “nothing is holding back the message from God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:9 p040 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ οὐ δέδεται 1 If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this idea. Alternate translation: “nothing is holding back the message from God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:9 p041 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Paul uses the term **word** to describe the message from God that he and others are communicating with words. Alternate translation: “the message from God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2:10 p042 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole πάντα ὑπομένω 1 Here the term **all** is a generalization that likely refers to the sufferings that Paul describes in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “I endure all of these sufferings” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
2:10 aa1x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj διὰ τοὺς ἐκλεκτούς 1 The term **chosen** is an adjective that functions as a noun here and refers to a group of people. If your language would not use an adjective in that way, you could translate this term with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “for the people whom God has chosen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
2:10 j2bk καὶ αὐτοὶ σωτηρίας τύχωσιν τῆς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 The phrase **obtain salvation** could also be expressed with Christ Jesus, who grants salvation, as the subject. Alternate translation: “Christ Jesus may grant them salvation”
2:10 p043 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns καὶ αὐτοὶ σωτηρίας τύχωσιν τῆς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **salvation** with a verb. Alternate translation: “Christ Jesus may save them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2:10 el68 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns μετὰ δόξης αἰωνίου 1 The abstract noun **glory** refers to the wonderful condition that people will experience when they are in the presence of God. It comes from God himself and he shares it with those who are saved by Jesus Christ, and this condition is **eternal**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **glory** with an adjective. Alternate translation: “and know how glorious it is to be with God forever” or “and experience God’s wonderful presence forever” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2:11 nr7u πιστὸς ὁ λόγος 1 In this context, the term **word** refers to the statement of doctrine that follows. See how you translated this phrase in [1 Timothy 1:15](../1ti/01/15.md) Alternate translation: “This statement is dependable”
2:11 p044 πιστὸς ὁ λόγος 1 You could represent the meaning of the adjective **trustworthy** with an active verb, if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “you could trust this statement”
2:11 p045 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks πιστὸς ὁ λόγος 1 Paul uses this phrase to introduce a direct quotation. The words that follow in the rest of this verse and in [2:12](../02/12.md) and [2:13](../02/13.md) are a poem or hymn that expresses the message that Paul says is trustworthy. It may be helpful to your readers if you indicate this by marking these words as a direct quotation or by setting them farther to the right, as the General Notes at the beginning of this chapter suggest. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
2:11 g6e4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-poetry εἰ γὰρ συναπεθάνομεν, καὶ συνζήσομεν 1 This is the beginning of a poem or hymn that Paul is probably quoting. If your language has a way of indicating that this is poetry, such as by setting individual phrases on separate lines, you could use it here and in [2:12](../02/12.md) and [2:13](../02/13.md). If not, you could translate this material as regular prose rather than as poetry. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-poetry]])
2:11 in38 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἰ & συναπεθάνομεν 1 Paul is speaking since he and Timothy and other believers who should trust this statement have not actually **died**. This could refer to: (1) the way that believers accept Jesus’ death for their sins when they trust him for salvation. This means that they have “died” to their old life of sin. Alternate translation: “if we have ended our old way of life by accepting Jesus’ death for us” (2) the way that people who believe in Jesus may suffer for him, possibly to the point of dying for him. Alternate translation: “if we are prepared to die for Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:11 p046 καὶ συνζήσομεν 1 Although Paul is referring to dying with Christ in a figurative sense, **live** is probably not figurative, but could refer to: (1) life after physical death. This seems most likely given Paul’s mention of “eternal glory” in the previous verse and “we will reign with him” in the next. Alternate translation: “then God will raise us from the dead to live with Jesus” (2) how believers will act in this life before physical death. Alternate translation: “we will not pursue our own desires, instead we will do what Jesus wants us to do”
2:12 p048 εἰ ἀρνησόμεθα 1 Paul uses the term **deny** to refer to the action of believers saying that they do not know Jesus Christ during this present life. It is presented as the opposite of **endure**, so it refers to someone who gives in to persecution and denies being a follower of Jesus. Alternate translation: “if we say now that we do not know him”
2:12 p049 κἀκεῖνος ἀρνήσεται ἡμᾶς 1 In this second usage of the word **deny**, Paul is referring to the action of Jesus Christ on the day of final judgment. On that day, Jesus will either receive a faithful believer or reject those who are not true followers. Those who deny that they are followers of Jesus while on earth are not true followers. Alternate translation: “he will reject us on the day of judgment”
2:13 ke4w εἰ ἀπιστοῦμεν 1 Paul uses the word **unfaithful** to express the condition of believers who do not continue to obey Jesus, but rather disobey him. Alternate translation: “if we disobey Jesus” or “if we do not do what Jesus wants us to do”
2:13 p050 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐκεῖνος πιστὸς μένει 1 This could mean : (1) he remains faithful to them. (2) he remains true to himself. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:13 ihd4 ἀρνήσασθαι & ἑαυτὸν οὐ δύναται 1 Paul states that Jesus is not able to **deny himself**, meaning that Jesus is not able to go against his character and will remain true to what he said he would do. Paul may have one or both of the following ideas in mind. (1) Jesus’ character includes being the Savior who can forgive our unfaithfulness when we repent of it, as Peter experienced (John 21:15–19). This favors the interpretation of the previous phrase as “he remains faithful to us.” (2) Jesus’ character also includes being the holy God who judges people for their sin when they do not repent. This favors the interpretation of the previous phrase as “he remains true to himself.” Alternate translation: “he must always act according to his character”
2:14 u661 ὑπομίμνῃσκε 1 The word **{them}**, which is implicit in the Greek verb, probably refers to the people that Timothy has responsibility over. Alternate translation: “Remind the people there”
2:14 p051 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Paul uses the expression **before God**, which means “in front of God,” to mean “where God can see.” Seeing, in turn, means attention and judgment. Alternate translation: “as God is watching” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:14 r5lq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 The implication is that Paul is telling Timothy to tell the believers, when he gives them this command, that God will be watching what they do. Alternate translation: “with God as their witness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:14 g6p7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor μὴ λογομαχεῖν 1 Paul uses the term **battle** to describe arguments. This could mean: (1) the believers are not to argue about unimportant things such as the words that someone uses to present the gospel message. That only distracts people from talking about important things, such as the gospel message itself. Alternate translation: “not to fight about small things like words” (2) the believers are not to argue about what words mean. Again, this causes disunity among the believers for no good reason. Alternate translation: “not to fight about the meanings of words” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:14 rke6 ἐπ’ οὐδὲν χρήσιμον 1 Paul adds that battling about words has no benefit for those involved. Alternate translation: “it does not benefit anyone”
2:14 ywty rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐπὶ καταστροφῇ τῶν ἀκουόντων 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **destruction** with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “it destroys those who hear” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2:14 x7gx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐπὶ καταστροφῇ τῶν ἀκουόντων 1 Here, **destruction** refers not to physical harm, but to the spiritual harm that is done to believers who hear their teachers foolishly arguing about unimportant things. This teaches the believers that being seen as right about small things is more important than love and unity, and can cause them to have wrong ideas about the faith or to stop following Jesus altogether. Alternate translation: “and can make those who hear it want to stop following Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2:15 m3vy σπούδασον σεαυτὸν, δόκιμον παραστῆσαι τῷ Θεῷ 1 Alternate translation: “Do your best to please God”
2:15 rj6y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐργάτην 1 Paul says that Timothy will be a skilled workman if he correctly teaches God’s word. Alternate translation: “like a craftsman” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:15 xgz9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὀρθοτομοῦντα τὸν λόγον τῆς ἀληθείας 1 Paul refers to **the word of truth** as if it were a path that someone was cutting through difficult terrain. When such a path is **straight**, travelers can follow it directly to their destination. By contrast, the useless discussions that Paul describes in [2:14](../02/14.md) and [2:16](../02/16.md) would be needless detours in terms of this same metaphor. Alternate translation: “show people how to follow the Scriptures directly” or “teach the Scriptures correctly so that people can follow them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:15 p052 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τῆς ἀληθείας 1 Paul uses the term **word** to refer to something that is expressed in words. This could refer to: (1) the message that Timothy is to teach. Alternate translation: “the true message” (2) the Scriptures. Alternate translation: “the true things that God has said in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2:15 p053 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὸν λόγον τῆς ἀληθείας 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **truth** with an adjective. Alternate translation: “the true message” or “the true things that God has said in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2:16 e27q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐπὶ πλεῖον & προκόψουσιν ἀσεβείας 1 Paul speaks of these discussions as if they could physically progress in a certain direction, and he speaks of **ungodliness** as that direction. Paul is describing the effect that these discussions have on people. Alternate translation: “they cause people to become more and more ungodly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:17 i73t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile ὁ λόγος αὐτῶν ὡς γάγγραινα νομὴν ἕξει 1 This is a simile. It means that something will spread from person to person and harm the faith of all those who hear it. The thing that will spread could refer to: (1) the habit of having useless and godless discussions. (2) the things that the people were saying in these empty discussions, or both. Alternate translation: “these empty discussions will spread quickly and cause destruction like an infectious disease” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
2:17 p054 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος αὐτῶν 1 Paul uses the term **word** to refer to something that is expressed in words. Alternate translation: “these discussions” or “what people who take part in these discussions say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2:17 p055 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ὡς γάγγραινα 1 “Gangrene” is type of tissue death caused by infection or lack of blood circulation. It quickly spreads in a person’s body and can lead to death. If your readers would not know what **gangrene** is, you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “like an infectious disease” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
2:17 p056 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ὧν ἐστιν Ὑμέναιος, καὶ Φίλητος 1 Paul gives Timothy the names of **Hymenaeus** and **Philetus** examples of ungodliness and foolish talk. To make the relationship between these names and the preceding **their word** clear in your language, you may have to make this explicit. Alternate translation: “Hymeneus and Philetus are such people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
2:17 x2k6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ὑμέναιος, καὶ Φίλητος 1 **Hymenaeus** and **Philetus** are names of men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
2:18 fi9z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οἵτινες περὶ τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἠστόχησαν 1 Paul uses this expression to speak of faith in Christ as if it were a target at which people should aim. Those who have **missed the mark** do not believe or teach what is true. Alternate translation: “who are teaching things that are not true” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:18 p057 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns οἵτινες περὶ τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἠστόχησαν 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **truth** with an adjective. Alternate translation: “who teach things that are not true” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2:18 pu22 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἀνάστασιν ἤδη γεγονέναι 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **resurrection** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “God has already raised the dead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2:18 ura5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀνατρέπουσιν τήν τινων πίστιν 1 Paul refers to **faith** as though it were an object that could be destroyed. Alternate translation: “they are causing some people to stop believing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:19 ir1z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὁ & στερεὸς θεμέλιος τοῦ Θεοῦ ἕστηκεν 1 Paul uses the image of the **foundation** of a building to explain that even though a false and destructive message has been destroying the faith of some people, God has nevertheless given people who want to continue to follow him a true message, which provides for them a safe and secure “place to stand.” Alternate translation: “God has provided a secure basis for people to continue to believe in him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:19 p058 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἔχων τὴν σφραγῖδα ταύτην 1 Paul speaks of the inscription on this foundation as if it were a **seal**, since seals on the outside of documents often bore inscriptions describing their contents. Alternate translation: “having this inscription” or “which can be described in this way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2:19 p059 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks ἔχων τὴν σφραγῖδα ταύτην 1 Paul uses this phrase to introduce two direct quotations. The statements that follow in the rest of this verse describe two aspects of the basis that God has provided for people to continue to believe in him. It may be helpful to your readers if you indicate this by marking these statements as quotations. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
2:19 nd7t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ὁ ὀνομάζων τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου 1 The expression **names the name of the Lord** is an idiom that refers to saying the name of the Lord in order to declare that one belongs to him. Alternate translation: “who says he believes in the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2:19 y3bc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἀποστήτω ἀπὸ ἀδικίας 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **unrighteousness** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “must stop doing evil things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2:20 p060 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν μεγάλῃ δὲ οἰκίᾳ, οὐκ ἔστιν μόνον σκεύη χρυσᾶ καὶ ἀργυρᾶ, ἀλλὰ καὶ ξύλινα καὶ ὀστράκινα 1 To help Timothy understand something important about following Jesus, Paul introduces the metaphor that compares the **containers** that are in the home of a wealthy person with people in the church. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that this is a metaphor or illustration. Alternate translation: “Consider this illustration: in the home of a wealthy person, there are containers made of gold and silver, and there are also containers made of wood and clay” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:20 p061 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἀλλὰ καὶ ξύλινα καὶ ὀστράκινα 1 Paul leaves out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. Alternate translation: “and there are also containers made of wood and clay” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2:20 j75l σκεύη 1 The word **container** is a general term for items used to hold other things, such as grain, food, drink, or refuse. If your language does not have a general word, you can use a specific word such as “bowl” or “pot.”
2:20 mt5e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἃ μὲν εἰς τιμὴν, ἃ δὲ εἰς ἀτιμίαν 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract nouns **honor** and **dishonor** by stating the ideas behind them with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “he uses the former at events to honor people and he uses the latter to do things that no one wants to see” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2:21 jm3p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐκκαθάρῃ ἑαυτὸν ἀπὸ τούτων 1 Here Paul continues the metaphor that compares people in the church to containers in a great house that have different uses. Paul speaks of a person washing himself clean as though he had been a pot full of something bad. By this he means that the person has given up certain associations or activities. Here, **these** could refer to: (1) the false teachers who are destroying the faith of some people. Alternate translation: “has disassociated himself from these false teachers” (2) the activities of quarreling and false teaching that Paul has warned Timothy about. Alternate translation: “has stopped doing these ungodly actions” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:21 g79f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἔσται σκεῦος εἰς τιμήν 1 Paul speaks of a person who has given up these associations or activities as if he were a particular kind of **container**. Alternate translation: “he will be like a dish for special occasions” or “he will be like a dish that is used to honor people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:21 p062 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἔσται σκεῦος εἰς τιμήν 1 The implication is that God will be able to give important assignments to a person who is free from wrong associations or activities. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he will be someone to whom God can give important assignments” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
2:21 mh63 ἔσται σκεῦος εἰς τιμήν, ἡγιασμένον εὔχρηστον τῷ Δεσπότῃ, εἰς πᾶν ἔργον ἀγαθὸν ἡτοιμασμένον 1 These four phrases could mean: (1) the ones beginning with **having been** give the reason for the phrase before them. Alternate translation: “he will be a container for honor because he has been sanctified, and he will be useful to the Master because he has been prepared for every good work” (2) all four phrases could simply be describing the person. Alternate translation: “he will be a container for honor, someone who is sanctified, useful to the Master, and ready for every good work”
2:21 p063 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἡγιασμένον 1 If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea, and you can state who did the action. Alternate translation: “whom God has set apart for himself” or “whom God has set apart for a special purpose” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:21 nl5d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἡγιασμένον 1 If this phrase is continuing the metaphor of objects in a house, then Paul is referring to a person who is free from wrong associations or activities as if he were a precious object whose owner keeps it in a special place. Whether this phrase is continuing the metaphor or not, it still expresses the idea of being “dedicated” for a special purpose. Alternate translation: “whom God has set apart for a special purpose” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:21 p064 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εὔχρηστον τῷ Δεσπότῃ 1 In the context of the metaphor of the house, Paul speaks of God as the head of the household. Alternate translation: “useful to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:21 p065 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive εἰς πᾶν ἔργον ἀγαθὸν ἡτοιμασμένον 1 If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “who has gotten himself ready to do any good work” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:22 h9p6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὰς & νεωτερικὰς ἐπιθυμίας φεῦγε 1 Paul speaks about **youthful** desires as if they were a dangerous person or animal that Timothy should run away from. Alternate translation: “control your youthful desires” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:22 p066 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὰς & νεωτερικὰς ἐπιθυμίας φεῦγε 1 Paul speaks of immoral activities by association with the desires that lead a person to engage in them. Alternate translation: “refuse to do the wrong things that young people want to do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2:22 srb7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor δίωκε δὲ δικαιοσύνην, πίστιν, ἀγάπην, εἰρήνην 1 Paul is using the verb **pursue** in contrast to **flee**. He speaks of these positive things as if Timothy should run towards them because they will do him good. Alternate translation: “be eager to do what is right, to believe in God, to love God and others, and to live in peace with people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:22 p067 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns δικαιοσύνην, πίστιν, ἀγάπην, εἰρήνην 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract nouns **righteousness**, **faith**, **love**, and **peace** by stating the ideas behind them with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “do what is right, believe in God, love other people, and live peacefully with other people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2:22 hg99 μετὰ τῶν ἐπικαλουμένων τὸν Κύριον ἐκ καθαρᾶς καρδίας 1 This likely means that Paul wants Timothy to pursue these positive things together with others who are sincere in their faith. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could put this phrase at the beginning of Paul’s command to Timothy, as in the UST, before **pursue**. Alternate translation: “together with those who worship the Lord with sincere intentions”
2:22 gl3q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τῶν ἐπικαλουμένων τὸν Κύριον 1 The expression **calling on the Lord** is an idiom that means to trust and worship the Lord. Alternate translation: “those who worship the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
2:22 p068 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐκ καθαρᾶς καρδίας 1 Paul uses a physical part of the body, the **heart**, to represent the intentions and desires of a person. Alternate translation: “with sincere intentions” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2:22 b2ti rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐκ καθαρᾶς καρδίας 1 Paul uses the word **clean** to describe the intentions or thoughts of a person as though they were an object that could be made clean. Alternate translation: “with sincere intentions” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:23 tmf7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὰς & μωρὰς καὶ ἀπαιδεύτους ζητήσεις παραιτοῦ 1 Paul refers to certain kinds of discussions by association with the kind of **questions** that people might ask that would lead to these discussions or by association with the kind of people that would ask these questions. Alternate translation: “do not become involved in foolish and ignorant discussions” or “do not allow people to involve you in discussions that they start because they are foolish and ignorant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
2:23 p069 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet μωρὰς καὶ ἀπαιδεύτους ζητήσεις 1 Paul may be using the words **foolish** and **ignorant** together to emphasize a single idea. Alternate translation: “very stupid questions” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
2:23 kh6p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor γεννῶσι μάχας 1 Paul speaks of the **questions** as if they were women giving birth to children (the **battles**). Alternate translation: “they cause arguments” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:23 p070 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor μάχας 1 Paul uses the term **battles** to describe arguments. Alternate translation: “they cause arguments” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:24 p071 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor δοῦλον & Κυρίου 1 Paul is using the expression **slave of the Lord** to refer to leaders in the church, including Timothy, who do what God tells them to do. This includes teaching the believers and interacting with the quarrelsome teachers who challenge their authority and the truth. Alternate translation: “a leader in the church” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:24 p072 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὐ δεῖ μάχεσθαι 1 Paul uses the term **battle** to describe arguments. Alternate translation: “must not argue” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:25 un9l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν πραΰτητι 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **meekness** in this expression with an adverb. Alternate translation: “meekly” or “gently” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
2:25 u6rp παιδεύοντα 1 Paul presents **educating** as the godly response to quarrels. This term can mean “teach” or “correct.” Alternate translation: “teaching” or “correcting”
2:25 jt1r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor μήποτε δώῃ αὐτοῖς ὁ Θεὸς μετάνοιαν 1 Paul speaks of **repentance** as if it were an object that God could give people. Alternate translation: “God may cause them to repent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:25 u8dy εἰς ἐπίγνωσιν ἀληθείας 1 Paul speaks of the result of **repentance** as knowing the **truth**. Alternate translation: “so that they will know the truth”
2:26 p073 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἀνανήψωσιν ἐκ τῆς τοῦ διαβόλου παγίδος 1 As Paul moves from one metaphor into another, he leaves out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. Alternate translation: “they may become sober again and escape from the trap of the devil” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
2:26 ef3q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀνανήψωσιν 1 Paul speaks of sinners learning to think correctly about God as if they were drunk people becoming **sober again**. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:26 mql8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐκ τῆς τοῦ διαβόλου παγίδος 1 Paul refers to the deception of **the devil** as a physical trap that sinners are captured in. Alternate translation: “and escape from the devil’s deception” or “and reject the devil’s deception” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
2:26 p074 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐζωγρημένοι ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ, εἰς τὸ ἐκείνου θέλημα 1 If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “after the devil has captured them and made them do what he wanted” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
2:26 dj4j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐζωγρημένοι ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ, εἰς τὸ ἐκείνου θέλημα 1 Paul speaks of the devil’s deception as if the devil had physically **captured** them and made them do what he wanted. Alternate translation: “after the devil has deceived them and made them do what he wanted” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:intro k2cr 0 # 2 Timothy 3 General Notes\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\nMany scholars understand the **last days** to mean the entire time from when Jesus first came to when he will return, which includes Paul’s time. If so, then what Paul teaches in this chapter about being persecuted applies to all believers. But some scholars understand the **last days** to mean a time in the future just before Jesus returns. If that is the meaning, then Paul is prophesying in verses 1–9 and 13 about those days. If possible, translators should be careful not to let how they understand this issue affect how they translate these verses. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/lastday]])
3:1 g65r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐν ἐσχάταις ἡμέραις 1 Paul is using the term **days** to refer to a particular time. Alternate translation: “during the period of time before the end” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3:1 n7gs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐνστήσονται καιροὶ χαλεποί 1 The implication from what Paul goes on to say about people becoming ungodly and violent is that it will be difficult for believers in this time period. Alternate translation: “believers will face difficult situations” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3:2 p075 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations οἱ ἄνθρωποι 1 Here Paul is using the term **men** in a generic sense that includes all people. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
3:2 jb27 φίλαυτοι 1 Here, **self-loving** refers to loving oneself more than loving family or friends with a natural human love. This is not the kind of love that comes from God. Alternate translation: “self-centered”
3:3 u3n7 ἄστοργοι 1 The term **unloving** means that they will not love other people whom they should love. Alternate translation: “they will not love their own families”
3:3 r2uv ἄσπονδοι 1 The term **irreconcilable** means they will not agree to make peace with others and will insist on living in a state of conflict in order to have their own way. Alternate translation: “they will not agree with anyone” or “they will not live in peace with anyone”
3:3 ks9y ἀφιλάγαθοι 1 The phrase **not good-loving** could be translated by removing the negative **not** and replacing **loving** with the opposite term “hating.” Alternate translation: “They will hate what is good”
3:4 dw5z προπετεῖς 1 The adjective **reckless** conveys the idea of doing things without thinking about the negative things that could happen as a result. Alternate translation: “heedless of consequences”
3:4 d6ng rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τετυφωμένοι 1 The expression **puffed up** is a metaphor for being proud and considering oneself better than others. Alternate translation: “haughty” or “conceited” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:4 p076 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τετυφωμένοι 1 If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “haughty” or “conceited” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3:5 k5dc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἔχοντες μόρφωσιν εὐσεβείας 1 The expression **a form of** indicates that their **godliness** is not genuine or true. Alternate translation: “appearing to have godliness” or “appearing to honor God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3:5 p077 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 Paul uses the word **And** to introduce the results of what the previous sentence described. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
3:5 p078 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τούτους ἀποτρέπου 1 The term **these** is a demonstrative adjective that refers to the people who show the ungodly qualities that Paul lists in the previous verses. Paul is using the term as a noun. If your language does not use adjectives in that way, you can add the word “people” in your translation. Alternate translation: “avoid these people” or “avoid such people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
3:5 xm1c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τούτους ἀποτρέπου 1 The expression **turn away** is a metaphor for avoiding someone. Alternate translation: “avoid these people” or “avoid such people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:6 gu4b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor αἰχμαλωτίζοντες 1 Here Paul uses the term **captivating** to mean greatly influencing someone by the use of deception. Alternate translation: “manipulating” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:6 u9m5 γυναικάρια 1 The term **foolish women** refers to women who are spiritually weak and immature. They allow these men into their homes and listen to them because they are weak, idle, and have many sins. Alternate translation: “women who are spiritually weak”
3:6 e9ex rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor σεσωρευμένα ἁμαρτίαις 1 Paul speaks of these **sins** as if they were heaped up on the backs of these women. Paul is explaining why these men can easily influence these women. This could mean: (1) these women sin often or even continually. Alternate translation: “who sin often” (2) these women feel terrible guilt because they sin. Alternate translation: “who feel terrible guilt for their sins” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:6 p079 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive σεσωρευμένα ἁμαρτίαις 1 If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “who sin often” or “who feel terrible guilt for their sins” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3:6 p080 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀγόμενα ἐπιθυμίαις ποικίλαις 1 If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “various desires lead them away” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3:6 izz9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἀγόμενα ἐπιθυμίαις ποικίλαις 1 Paul speaks about these **various desires** as if they could physically lead a person away. He means that the women decide to do evil things in order to satisfy their desires. Alternate translation: “they decide to sin in various ways” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
3:7 p082 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor μηδέποτε εἰς ἐπίγνωσιν ἀληθείας ἐλθεῖν δυνάμενα 1 Paul speaks of the **knowledge of the truth** as if it were a destination at which people could arrive. Alternate translation: “never able to understand the truth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:8 p083 ὃν τρόπον δὲ 1 Alternate translation: “Just as”
3:8 b8el rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἰάννης καὶ Ἰαμβρῆς 1 **Jannes** and **Jambres** are names of men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
3:8 p084 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Ἰάννης καὶ Ἰαμβρῆς 1 Paul assumes that Timothy will know that he is referring here to the magicians in Pharaoh’s court who tried to duplicate the miracles that Moses was doing. The Bible does not record their names, but according to Jewish tradition their names were Jannes and Jambres. These men wanted to show that Pharaoh did not have to listen to Moses or obey Yahweh. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could identify them more explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jannes and Jambres, Pharaoh’s magicians,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3:8 p085 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj οὗτοι 1 As in [3:5](../03/05.md), the term **these** is a demonstrative adjective that refers to the people who show the ungodly qualities that Paul has described. Paul is using the term as a noun. If your language does not use adjectives in that way, you can add the word “people” in your translation. Alternate translation: “these people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
3:8 p086 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῇ ἀληθείᾳ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **truth** with an adjective. Alternate translation: “what is true” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3:8 g4kk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἄνθρωποι κατεφθαρμένοι τὸν νοῦν 1 Paul uses the word **mind** to refer to the way these evil men think. Alternate translation: “men who cannot think rightly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
3:8 p087 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἄνθρωποι κατεφθαρμένοι τὸν νοῦν 1 If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “men who cannot think rightly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3:8 pfh1 ἀδόκιμοι περὶ τὴν πίστιν 1 Paul uses the adjective **unapproved** to convey the idea that these men have been tested regarding how well they trust in Christ and obey him, and they have failed the test because their faith is not real. Alternate translation: “without sincere faith” or “whose faith is not genuine”
3:8 sppy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀδόκιμοι περὶ τὴν πίστιν 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could start a new sentence here and say who does not approve of these men. Alternate translation: “God does approve of these men because they do not have a genuine faith in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3:9 x9kx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀλλ’ 1 The word **But** indicates a contrast between this verse and the previous idea from [3:06](../03/06.md) that these men were able to sneak into homes and persuade people to believe wrong things. If you need to make this contrast clear, you could remind your readers of the previous idea here. Alternate translation: “But even though they have persuaded some people to believe wrong things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
3:9 c6xx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὐ προκόψουσιν ἐπὶ πλεῖον 1 Paul uses an expression about physical movement to mean that the false teachers will not continue to have much success among the believers. Alternate translation: “they will not be able to continue teaching falsely” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:9 mv4j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ἡ & ἄνοια αὐτῶν ἔκδηλος ἔσται πᾶσιν 1 The word **all** is a generalization. Paul has just said that these men will have a little success in deceiving some people. But ultimately their foolishness will become widely apparent, as happened to Jannes and Jambres, who were publicly discredited when they were not able to equal the powerful miracles of Moses. Alternate translation: “their foolishness will become widely apparent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
3:9 z4fu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj ἐκείνων 1 The term **those** is a demonstrative adjective that refers to Jannes and Jambres. Paul is using the term as a noun. If your language does not use adjectives in that way, you can supply the names of the two men. Alternate translation: “of Jannes and Jambres” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
3:10 vw42 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor σὺ & παρηκολούθησάς 1 Paul speaks of giving close attention to the things he lists in this verse as if one were physically following them as they moved. The idea is that Timothy is giving close attention to these things and imitating them. Alternate translation: “you have observed” or “you have paid close attention to” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:10 wma6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns μου τῇ διδασκαλίᾳ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **teaching** with a relative clause. Alternate translation: “what I have taught others to do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3:10 lq3v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῇ ἀγωγῇ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **conduct** with a relative clause. Alternate translation: “how I live my life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3:10 p088 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῇ προθέσει 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **purpose** with a verbal clause. Alternate translation: “what I try to do with my life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3:10 p089 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῇ πίστει 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **faith** with a relative clause. Alternate translation: “what I believe” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3:10 p091 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῇ μακροθυμίᾳ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **patience** with a relative clause. Alternate translation: “how I am patient with others” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3:10 p090 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῇ ἀγάπῃ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **love** with a relative clause. Alternate translation: “how I love others” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3:10 l4pp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῇ ὑπομονῇ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **endurance** with a relative clause. Alternate translation: “how I endure when I suffer” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3:11 p093 οἵους διωγμοὺς ὑπήνεγκα 1 Paul is reminding Timothy that he knows of the various ways in which Paul suffered and how he endured until God rescued him. Alternate translation: “how I endured various persecutions”
3:11 r9vk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐκ πάντων, με ἐρρύσατο ὁ Κύριος 1 Paul speaks as if God had physically removed him from a situation of danger. Alternate translation: “the Lord preserved me through them all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:12 ke7f ζῆν εὐσεβῶς 1 The term **piously** means in an obedient way that honors God. Alternate translation: “to live in a godly way”
3:12 xm9l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive διωχθήσονται 1 If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “people will persecute” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3:13 p094 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἄνθρωποι 1 Here Paul is using the term **men** in a generic sense that can include both men and women. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
3:13 xo4q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys πονηροὶ & ἄνθρωποι καὶ γόητες 1 This is probably a hendiadys, and the **evil men and impostors** are not two groups of people, but one group of people. Alternate translation: “evil people who only pretend to follow Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
3:13 s7f2 γόητες 1 The term **impostors** refers here to a person who wants other people to think he is a true Christian when he is not. Alternate translation: “people who are pretending to be believers”
3:13 imc8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor προκόψουσιν ἐπὶ τὸ χεῖρον 1 Paul speaks of evil people and their character as something that moves forward physically, making gradual progress in a direction. Alternate translation: “will become worse and worse” or “will become even more evil” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:13 p095 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐπὶ τὸ χεῖρον 1 This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “worse and worse” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
3:13 eyx5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πλανῶντες καὶ πλανώμενοι 1 The expression **leading astray** uses the image of physically taking a person to a place that he didn’t think he was going to. This is a figurative reference to persuading someone to believe something that is not true. Alternate translation: “teaching lies and believing lies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:13 p096 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive πλανῶντες καὶ πλανώμενοι 1 If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “teaching lies and believing lies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3:14 ytg9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor μένε ἐν οἷς ἔμαθες 1 Paul speaks of biblical instruction as if it were a place in which Timothy could stay. Alternate translation: “continue doing what you have learned” or “continue believing what you have learned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:14 p097 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐπιστώθης 1 If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “are confident about” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
3:15 w9l5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification τὰ δυνάμενά σε σοφίσαι 1 Paul speaks of the Scriptures as if they were a teacher who could instruct people and help them become **wise**. It may be convenient in your translation to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “By studying them you can become wise” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
3:15 p098 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns εἰς σωτηρίαν διὰ πίστεως τῆς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **salvation** with a verb such as “save.” Alternate translation: “so that you will know enough to trust Christ Jesus to save you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3:16 s274 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πᾶσα Γραφὴ θεόπνευστος καὶ 1 The term **God-breathed** uses the image of breathing to indicate that the Scriptures come directly from God through his Spirit. Characteristically in the Bible, the breath of God represents the Spirit of God. Alternate translation: “God produced all Scripture as his Spirit directed people what to write, and it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
3:16 hvr1 πᾶσα Γραφὴ θεόπνευστος 1 By **All Scripture**, Paul is referring to every part of Scripture, which, at that time, was what we know as the Old Testament. If it is confusing to refer to all of the books of the Old Testament with the singular word **Scripture**, you could change it to a plural word as in the UST and make the verbs plural. Alternate translation: “All of the Holy Writings are God-breathed”
3:16 uv35 ὠφέλιμος 1 Paul refers to the Scripture as **profitable** to convey the idea that Timothy and all believers will benefit when they use the Scripture to teach, reprove, correct, and train. Alternate translation: “you will benefit from it as you use it” or “it benefits everyone when we use it”
3:16 vl2n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πρὸς ἐλεγμόν 1 Paul instructs Timothy to use the Scriptures as the standard for knowing what is right and wrong and showing people that they are wrong. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **reproof** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “for showing people that they are wrong” or “for helping us to know when we are wrong” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3:16 e5h9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πρὸς ἐπανόρθωσιν 1 Paul instructs Timothy to use the Scriptures as the standard for showing people how to make something right. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **correction** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “for showing people how to make things right” or “for showing us how to fix errors” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3:16 y1hf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πρὸς παιδείαν τὴν ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ 1 Paul instructs Timothy to use the Scriptures as the standard for training people how to live lives that are right with God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **righteousness** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “and for training people how to do what is right” or “and for training us to do what is right” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
3:17 nb12 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ὁ τοῦ Θεοῦ ἄνθρωπος 1 Paul is using the word **man** here in a generic sense that includes all believers in God, whether male or female. Of course, Paul also intends for Timothy to apply this to himself. Alternate translation: “the person who serves God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
3:17 uu7i ἄρτιος 1 Alternate translation: “fully capable”
3:17 p099 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐξηρτισμένος 1 If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “and have everything he needs” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4:intro k2xa 0 # 2 Timothy 4 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\n1. Paul gives a solemn charge to Timothy (4:1–8)\n2. Paul tells Timothy how he is doing (4:9–18)\n3. Paul sends personal greetings (4:19–22)\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### “I adjure you”\n\nWith these words Paul challenges Timothy in the most serious way possible to do what he is telling him to do. It is a way of commanding Timothy, not by Paul’s own authority, but by the authority that he then refers to, that of God and Jesus Christ. In other words, Paul is saying that God and Jesus Christ are commanding Timothy through Paul.\n\n### Crown\n\nScripture uses the image of a crown to represent different things. In this chapter, Paul describes Christ as awarding a crown to believers as a metaphor for the reward that Christ will give them for having lived rightly on this earth.
4:1 eh3x διαμαρτύρομαι 1 The word translated **adjure** is used to place someone under a serious and binding obligation. Think about the words that you use to do this in your language. This could refer to: (1) placing someone under an oath to do something. Alternate translation: “I place you under an oath” or “I hereby obligate you” (2) solemnly commanding someone with great authority. Alternate translation: “I solemnly urge you”
4:1 cb15 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 Here the word **before** means “in front of,” that is, “in the presence of.” The implication is that God and Christ Jesus will witness and approve this command or oath. Alternate translation: “in the presence of God and Christ Jesus” or “with God and Christ Jesus as the witnesses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4:1 u32g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism ζῶντας καὶ νεκρούς 1 Paul refers to **the living** and **the dead** together to mean all people, whether they are alive at the time of judgment or have died. Alternate translation: “those who are still alive and those who have died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
4:1 p100 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj ζῶντας καὶ νεκρούς 1 The terms **living** and **dead** are adjectives that Paul is using as nouns to refer to groups of people. If your language does not use adjectives in that way, you can translate these terms with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “those who are still alive and those who have died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
4:1 lwt2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy καὶ τὴν ἐπιφάνειαν αὐτοῦ, καὶ τὴν βασιλείαν αὐτοῦ 1 Paul refers to Christ’s return by association to the fact that he will appear once again to people on earth when he returns, and he refers to Christ’s rule as king by association to the **kingdom** that he will rule. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “and on Christ’s return and on his rule as king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
4:1 anqh καὶ τὴν ἐπιφάνειαν αὐτοῦ, καὶ τὴν βασιλείαν αὐτοῦ 1 This can be understood in two different ways, depending on if Paul is placing Timothy under an oath or giving Timothy a command. (1) If Paul is placing Timothy under an oath, then he is saying that these are the things that Timothy would be denying if he fails to fulfill the oath. Alternate translation: “with an oath as strong as your desire for Christ’s return and for his rule as king” (2) If Paul is introducing a command in this verse, then Paul is appealing to these things to strengthen his command. Alternate translation: “and as surely as Christ will return and rule as king”
4:2 j2z7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 Paul is using the term **word** to refer to the whole message about Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “the Gospel message” or “the Good News” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
4:2 zzh4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism εὐκαίρως, ἀκαίρως 1 Paul uses the opposite words **opportunely** and**inopportunely** to say that Timothy should be ready to preach about Jesus when it seems like a good time to do so and also when it does not seem like a good time. He is using the two types of occasions together to indicate all occasions. Alternate translation: “when it is convenient and when it is not convenient” or “at all times” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
4:2 g7ax rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἔλεγξον 1 The command to **reprove** implies that the action is directed toward people who have done something wrong and are in need of correction. Alternate translation: “correct those who have sinned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4:2 p101 ἐπιτίμησον 1 The word **rebuke** involves telling someone that they have done something wrong and warning them not to do it again. Alternate translation: “tell them not to sin”
4:2 p102 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys ἐν πάσῃ μακροθυμίᾳ καὶ διδαχῇ 1 Here, **patience and teaching** is a hendiadys, with **patience** modifying **teaching**. Alternate translation: “do these things by teaching very patiently” or “always do these things by teaching patiently” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
4:2 g5r0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν πάσῃ μακροθυμίᾳ καὶ διδαχῇ 1 The implication is that this is how Timothy should preach, reprove, rebuke, and exhort. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “do these things by teaching very patiently” or “always do these things by teaching patiently” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4:2 p103 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ἐν πάσῃ μακροθυμίᾳ καὶ διδαχῇ 1 Here, **all** could mean: (1) Timothy should always be patient when he teaches. Alternate translation: “always teaching patiently” (2) a generalization for emphasis, meaning that Timothy should be very patient. Alternate translation: “by teaching very patiently” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
4:3 jv7a ἔσται & καιρὸς ὅτε 1 Alternate translation: “the time will come when”
4:3 u2cc οὐκ ἀνέξονται 1 Alternate translation: “they will no longer listen patiently to”
4:3 ilx7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐκ ἀνέξονται 1 The context indicates that **they** means people who are a part of the community of believers. Alternate translation: “some believers will no longer listen patiently to” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4:3 fyl3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τῆς ὑγιαινούσης διδασκαλίας 1 The expression **healthy teaching** means “correct teaching” by association, since a healthy mind would recognize that correct teaching was reasonable. Alternate translation: “correct teaching” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
4:3 e5t2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor κατὰ τὰς ἰδίας ἐπιθυμίας, ἑαυτοῖς ἐπισωρεύσουσιν διδασκάλους 1 Paul speaks of how people will obtain many teachers as if they were putting them into a heap or pile. They will want many teachers, but not value these teachers for how they live godly lives or how accurately they teach. Alternate translation: “they will gather many teachers for themselves who will teach what they want” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
4:3 s375 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom κνηθόμενοι τὴν ἀκοήν 1 Paul speaks of people badly wanting to hear something as if their ears itched and could only be relieved if they found many teachers who would tell them what they wanted to hear. Alternate translation: “because they want to hear it so badly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
4:3 p104 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy κνηθόμενοι τὴν ἀκοήν 1 Paul uses the **ear** to mean hearing. Alternate translation: “because they want to hear it so badly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
4:4 rh2i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀπὸ μὲν τῆς ἀληθείας τὴν ἀκοὴν ἀποστρέψουσιν 1 Paul speaks about people no longer paying attention as if they were physically turning their ears away so that they could not hear. Alternate translation: “will no longer pay attention to the truth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
4:4 p105 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἀπὸ μὲν τῆς ἀληθείας τὴν ἀκοὴν ἀποστρέψουσιν 1 Paul uses the **ear** to mean listening. Listening, in turn, means paying attention. Alternate translation: “will no longer pay attention to the truth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
4:4 xrv7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐπὶ & τοὺς μύθους ἐκτραπήσονται 1 Paul speaks about people starting to pay attention to **myths** as if someone were getting them to wander off in the wrong direction. Alternate translation: “these teachers will get them to pay attention to stories that are not true” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
4:4 p106 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐπὶ & τοὺς μύθους ἐκτραπήσονται 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form, and you can state who would do the action. Alternate translation: “these teachers will get them to pay attention to stories that are not true” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4:5 ehz7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor νῆφε 1 Paul wants his readers to think correctly about everything, and so he speaks as if he wanted them to **be sober** rather than drunk. Alternate translation: “think clearly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
4:5 tv3k εὐαγγελιστοῦ 1 Alternate translation: “of a person who proclaims the good news about Jesus”
4:6 p107 ἐγὼ & ἤδη σπένδομαι 1 While Paul speaks of his death as **already** happening, he means that it is an event that will happen soon. Alternate translation: “I will soon be poured out”
4:6 sh23 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐγὼ & ἤδη σπένδομαι 1 Paul speaks of himself as if he were wine in a cup that was **being poured out** as a sacrifice to God. Alternate translation: “the sacrifice of my life to God will soon be complete” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
4:6 p108 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐγὼ & ἤδη σπένδομαι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “My life will soon end as a sacrifice to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4:6 fb7l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism ὁ καιρὸς τῆς ἀναλύσεώς μου ἐφέστηκεν 1 Paul refers to his death as a **departure**. This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant. Alternate translation: “soon I will die and leave this world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
4:7 d9ts rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸν καλὸν ἀγῶνα ἠγώνισμαι 1 Paul speaks of himself as if he has been competing in an athletic contest. Here, **good** could mean: (1) the kind of effort Paul has made. Alternate translation: “I have done my best” (2) Paul has pursued a worthwhile endeavor. Alternate translation: “I have worked hard for what really matters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
4:7 kq83 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸν δρόμον τετέλεκα 1 Paul speaks of his life of service to God as if he had been running a **race** on foot. Alternate translation: “I have completed what I needed to do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
4:7 vk2p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὴν πίστιν τετήρηκα 1 Paul speaks of **the faith**, by which he means his trust in Christ and his obedience to God, as if they were valuable objects that he has kept safe in his possession. This could mean: (1) Paul was faithful to do what God told him to do. Alternate translation: “I have remained faithful in doing my ministry” (2) Paul was faithful to teach the truth. Alternate translation: “I have preserved the teachings from any error” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
4:8 ujg5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀπόκειταί μοι ὁ τῆς δικαιοσύνης στέφανος 1 If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “God has reserved the crown of righteousness for me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4:8 hg8i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τῆς δικαιοσύνης στέφανος 1 Here, the **crown** could: (1) represent the reward that God gives to people who have lived the right way. Alternate translation: “the reward for the righteous” (2) represent righteousness itself. Just as the judge of a race gives a crown to the winner, when Paul finishes his life, God will declare that Paul is righteous. Alternate translation: “the reward that is righteousness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
4:8 dwn6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown στέφανος 1 See how you translated **crown** in [2:5](../02/05.md). The **crown** that Paul is using as an illustration of the future award from God was a wreath made of laurel tree leaves that was given to winners of athletic contests. You can use a word in your language that would refer to a prize for winning a contest. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
4:8 n3k8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν, ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ 1 As in [1:12](../01/12.md), this refers to the **day** when Jesus returns to judge people. Alternate translation: “on the day of judgment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4:8 uh88 πᾶσιν τοῖς ἠγαπηκόσι τὴν ἐπιφάνειαν αὐτοῦ 1 Alternate translation: “to all those who are looking forward to his return”
4:8 p109 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὴν ἐπιφάνειαν αὐτοῦ 1 See how you translated **his appearing** in [4:1](../04/01.md). Paul is referring to Christ’s return by association with the fact that he will appear once again to people on earth when he returns. Alternate translation: “his return” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
4:9 t8b7 σπούδασον ἐλθεῖν & ταχέως 1 Alternate translation: “Come … as soon as possible”
4:10 e4xx rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Δημᾶς & Κρήσκης & Τίτος 1 **Demas**, **Crescens**, and **Titus** are names of men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
4:10 ji2l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸν νῦν αἰῶνα 1 The expression **the present age** refers to worldly things as opposed to the things of God. Paul refers to these worldly things by association with the present time when people generally desire them, as opposed to the future time when the things of God will be established throughout the earth. Alternate translation: “the temporary comforts of this world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
4:10 u2qb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis Κρήσκης εἰς Γαλατίαν, Τίτος εἰς Δαλματίαν 1 Here Paul leaves out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. He means that like Demas, **Crescens** and **Titus** have left him. However, he is probably not saying that they did this because they also “loved this present age” like Demas. It is more likely that they are traveling to help the churches. Alternate translation: “Crescens has left me and gone to Galatia, and Titus has left me and gone to Dalmatia” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
4:10 gs61 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Γαλατίαν & Δαλματίαν 1 This are the names of parts of the Roman empire. **Galatia** is an official Roman province and **Dalmatia** is an area in the southern part of the province of Illyricum. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
4:11 w21u μοι εὔχρηστος εἰς διακονίαν 1 This could mean: (1) Mark is **useful** in helping Paul to take care of his personal needs. Alternate translation: “he can help take care of my needs” (2) Mark is **useful** in helping Paul minister to others, especially by preaching and teaching. Alternate translation: “he is helpful to me in my ministry”
4:12 y60r ἀπέστειλα 1 Timothy is at Ephesus when he receives this letter. It may be that Tychicus is the one who carried this letter to Timothy at Ephesus. If so, then Paul is writing from Timothy’s perspective, who would view Paul’s sending of Tychicus as a past event. If this is confusing in your language and you want to include this possibility, you may need to change the tense of the verb to future. Alternate translation: “soon I will be sending”
4:13 d5rw rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown φελόνην 1 The term **cloak** refers to a heavy garment worn over clothes. Alternate translation: “coat” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
4:13 v9b6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Κάρπῳ 1 **Carpus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
4:13 k6tj rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown τὰ βιβλία 1 The term **books** refers to scrolls. A scroll was a type of book made of a long sheet of papyrus or leather. After writing on a scroll or reading it, people would roll it up using rods on the ends. Alternate translation: “the scrolls” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
4:13 e395 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown μάλιστα τὰς μεμβράνας 1 The term **parchments** may refer to a specific type of scroll. Alternate translation: “especially those made from animal skins” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
4:14 un4v rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown Ἀλέξανδρος ὁ χαλκεὺς 1 The term **coppersmith** refers to a person who worked with things made of copper and other metals. Alternate translation: “Alexander, who works with metal” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
4:14 kv94 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἀλέξανδρος 1 **Alexander** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
4:14 wbx4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀποδώσει αὐτῷ ὁ Κύριος κατὰ τὰ ἔργα αὐτοῦ 1 Paul speaks of punishment as if it were repayment. Alternate translation: “the Lord will give him the right punishment for what he has done” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
4:15 i4aj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἀντέστη τοῖς ἡμετέροις λόγοις 1 The term **words** refers to the message that Paul and Timothy and their co-workers teach. Alternate translation: “he … opposed the message that we teach” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
4:16 v847 ἐν τῇ πρώτῃ μου ἀπολογίᾳ 1 Paul is referring to the opening session of his trial. By writing **first**, he is likely indicating that he will have to appear in court again. Alternate translation: “At the opening session of my trial” or “When I first appeared in court and explained my actions”
4:16 f2c3 οὐδείς μοι παρεγένετο 1 Paul explains to Timothy that he had to go to court alone, without any supporters. Alternate translation: “no one testified on my behalf”
4:16 rm2t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive μὴ αὐτοῖς λογισθείη 1 If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “May God not hold it against them” or “I pray that God does not punish those believers for deserting me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4:17 t1fw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὁ & Κύριός μοι παρέστη 1 Paul is speaking as if **the Lord** had physically **stood** with him. Alternate translation: “the Lord helped me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
4:17 y69m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἵνα δι’ ἐμοῦ τὸ κήρυγμα πληροφορηθῇ 1 If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. This could mean: (1) at his trial, Paul was able to explain the entire message God had given him to proclaim. Alternate translation: “so that I was able to proclaim all of the Lord’s message” (2) Paul was able to continue proclaiming God’s message right through to this time when he expected to lose his life. Alternate translation: “so that I was able to continue proclaiming the Lord’s message right to the end” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4:17 p113 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole καὶ ἀκούσωσιν πάντα τὰ ἔθνη 1 Here, **all** could be: (1) a figurative generalization. Alternate translation: “so that as many Gentiles as possible could hear it” (2) a reference to all the Gentiles in the court. Alternate translation: “so that all the Gentiles who were there might hear” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
4:17 gsr8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐρύσθην ἐκ στόματος λέοντος 1 Paul speaks as if he had been in danger of being killed by a **lion** at his court appearance. He could mean the physical danger of being sentenced to execution, or the spiritual danger of being tempted not to speak boldly for Jesus, or both. It would probably be best to leave both possibilities open in your translation. Alternate translation: “I was rescued from great danger” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
4:17 p114 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐρύσθην ἐκ στόματος λέοντος 1 If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “God rescued me from great danger” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
4:18 p115 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας τῶν αἰώνων 1 This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “forever and ever” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
4:19 n4zc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸν Ὀνησιφόρου οἶκον 1 See how you translated this phrase in [1:16](../01/16.md). The word **household** refers to **Onesiphorus** and all the people in his family, possibly even his servants. Alternate translation: “Onesiphorus and everyone who lives with him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
4:19 mef8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ὀνησιφόρου 1 **Onesiphorus** is the name of a man. See how you translated this name in [1:16](../01/16.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
4:20 lie9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἔραστος & Τρόφιμον 1 **Erastus** and **Trophimus** are the names of men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
4:20 wp9h rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Μιλήτῳ 1 **Miletus** is the name of a city to the south of Ephesus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
4:21 cvc7 σπούδασον & ἐλθεῖν 1 Alternate translation: “Do your best to come” or “Try as hard as you can to come”
4:21 eh95 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πρὸ χειμῶνος 1 The implication is that Timothy should try to come to Paul before the cold weather arrives and makes travel difficult or even impossible. If **winter** is the warm season in your area and summer is the cold season, or if your area does not have a cold season but a rainy season, you could use a more general expression. Alternate translation: “before the cold weather makes travel difficult” or “before the weather changes and makes travel difficult” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
4:21 z1j9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἀσπάζεταί σε Εὔβουλος, καὶ Πούδης, καὶ Λίνος, καὶ Κλαυδία, καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ 1 Here Paul leaves out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. To make sure that the meaning is clear, you could supply these words. The people listed after Eubulus are also greeting Timothy. Eubulus is not greeting them. Alternate translation: “Eubulus greets you, and so do Pudens, Linus, Claudia, and all the believers here” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
4:21 p7px rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Εὔβουλος & Πούδης & Λίνος 1 **Eubulus**, **Pudens**, and **Linus** are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
4:21 er77 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Κλαυδία 1 **Claudia** is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
4:21 mk26 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations οἱ ἀδελφοὶ 1 The word **brothers** means all believers, whether male or female. Alternate translation: “all the believers here” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
4:22 tx26 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you ὁ Κύριος μετὰ τοῦ πνεύματός σου 1 Paul ends his letter with a blessing for Timothy. Here, **you** is singular and refers to Timothy. Alternate translation: “I pray that the Lord makes your spirit strong” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
4:22 p119 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ὁ Κύριος μετὰ τοῦ πνεύματός σου 1 Paul describes Timothy as a whole person by reference to his **spirit**, perhaps because he is wishing particularly for Timothy to receive spiritual strengthening. Alternate translation: “I pray that the Lord makes you strong” or “I pray that the Lord will strengthen you spiritually” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
4:22 k85y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you ἡ χάρις μεθ’ ὑμῶν 1 Paul ends his letter with a second blessing. The **you** here is plural and refers to all of the believers who are with Timothy. Alternate translation: “May grace be with all of you there” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
4:22 p120 ἡ χάρις μεθ’ ὑμῶν 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state explicitly who Paul wishes will make this happen. Alternate translation: “May God give grace to all of you”
1 Reference ID Tags SupportReference Quote Occurrence Note
2 front:intro s7fk 0 # Introduction to 2 Timothy\n\n## Part 1: General Introduction\n\n### Outline of the book of 2 Timothy\n\n1. Paul greets Timothy and encourages him to endure hardship as he serves God (1:1–2:13).\n2. Paul gives general instructions to Timothy (2:14–26).\n3. Paul warns Timothy about future events and instructs him about how to carry out his service to God (3:1–4:8).\n4. Paul makes personal remarks (4:9–22).\n\n### Who wrote the book of 2 Timothy?\n\nPaul wrote 2 Timothy. He was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.\n\nThis book is the second letter Paul wrote to Timothy. Timothy was his disciple and close friend. Paul wrote this letter while in prison in Rome. Paul would die soon after writing this letter.\n\n### What is the book of 2 Timothy about?\n\nPaul had left Timothy in the city of Ephesus to help the believers there. Paul wrote this letter to instruct Timothy about various matters. The topics he addressed include warnings about false teachers and advice about enduring difficult situations. This letter also shows how Paul was training Timothy to be a leader among the churches.\n\n### How should the title of this book be translated?\n\nTranslators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “2 Timothy” or “Second Timothy.” Or they may choose a different title, such as “Paul’s Second Letter to Timothy” or “The Second Letter to Timothy.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])\n\n## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts\n\n### What is the soldier imagery in 2 Timothy?\n\nAs Paul waited in prison, knowing he would die soon, he spoke of being a soldier of Jesus Christ. Soldiers have to obey to their leaders. In the same way, Christians have to obey Jesus. As “soldiers” of Christ, believers are to obey his commands, even if they die as a result.\n\n### What does it mean that God inspired Scripture?\n\nGod is the true author of Scripture. He inspired the human authors who wrote the books. That means God in some way caused the people to write what they wrote. This is why the Bible is also referred to as God’s word. This implies several things about it. First, everything that the Bible teaches is free from error and can be trusted. Second, God will always preserve his Scripture for every generation of people. Third, God’s word should be translated into all the world’s languages.\n\n## Part 3: Important Translation Issues\n\n### Singular and plural “you”\n\nIn this book, the word “I” refers to Paul. Here the word “you” is almost always singular and refers to Timothy. The exception to this is 4:22. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])\n\n### Inclusive and exclusive “we” and “us”\n\nIn this book, “we” and “us” include the writer, Paul, the recipient, Timothy, and all believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])\n\n### What did Paul mean by the expressions “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?\n\nPaul meant to express the idea of a very close union between Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.\n\n### What are the major textual issues in the text of the book of 2 Timothy?\n\nFor the following verses, the oldest Greek manuscripts differ from later Greek manuscripts. Modern translations may also differ depending on the Greek manuscript that they translate from. The ULT text translates the Greek from the oldest manuscripts, and puts the differences from later manuscripts in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible already exists in the general region, translators should consider following the decision in that translation. If not, translators are advised to follow the oldest Greek manuscripts as reflected in the ULT text.\n* “Because of this, I was appointed a preacher, an apostle, and a teacher” (1:11). Some later manuscripts read, “Because of this, I was appointed a preacher, an apostle, and a teacher to the Gentiles.”\n* “Warn them before God” (2:14). Some later manuscripts read, “Warn them before the Lord.”\n\n(See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
3 1:intro p5lf 0 # 2 Timothy 1 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nPaul formally introduces this letter in verses 1–2. Writers often began letters in this way in the ancient Near East.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### Spiritual children\n\nPaul discipled Timothy as a Christian and a church leader. Paul may also have led him to believe in Christ. Therefore, Paul calls Timothy “beloved child.” So even though Paul was not Timothy’s father, Paul speaks of his relationship with Timothy as that of a father and son in a spiritual sense. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])\n\n## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter\n\n### Persecution\n\nPaul was in prison when he wrote this letter. Paul encourages Timothy to be willing to suffer for the gospel.
4 1:1 ha4l Παῦλος 1 This letter follows the normal custom of the time by beginning with the name and identity of the author, then mentioning the recipient (in verse 2). Your language may have a particular way of introducing the author of a letter. If so, you could use it in your translation. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, am writing this letter”
5 1:1 vl2g διὰ θελήματος Θεοῦ 1 Paul became an apostle because God wanted him to be an apostle. Alternate translation: “because of God’s will” or “because God wanted it to be so”
6 1:1 e1lg κατ’ 1 This could mean: (1) God appointed Paul to tell others about the promise of life in Jesus. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of announcing” (2) Paul became an apostle because he himself received the promise of life in Jesus. Alternate translation: “as a result of receiving”
7 1:1 m9kv rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ζωῆς τῆς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 Paul speaks of **life** as if it were an object inside of Jesus. This refers to the life people receive as a result of belonging to Christ Jesus. Alternate translation: “of the life that we receive as a result of belonging to Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
8 1:2 rp5u Τιμοθέῳ 1 Your language may have a particular way of introducing the person who receives a letter. If so, you could use it in your translation. Alternate translation: “This letter is for you, Timothy”
9 1:2 ey7g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀγαπητῷ τέκνῳ 1 Paul was not Timothy’s father, but he uses the term **child** to express his love and approval of Timothy. It is also likely that Paul introduced Timothy to Christ, and so Paul considered him his child in a spiritual sense. Alternate translation: “who is like a beloved son to me” or “you are like a dear child to me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
10 1:2 w43q rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing χάρις, ἔλεος, εἰρήνη, ἀπὸ 1 After stating the name of the author and the person who is receiving it (Timothy), Paul adds a blessing to Timothy. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing in your language. Alternate translation: “may you experience kindness, mercy, and peace within you from” or “I pray that you will have grace, mercy, and peace from” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
11 1:2 p003 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns χάρις, ἔλεος, εἰρήνη 1 Paul’s blessing to Timothy includes the three abstract nouns **Grace**, **mercy**, and **peace**. Your language may have a particular way of expressing these concepts, such as with verbs. If so, you could use them in your translation. See the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
12 1:2 ub7c rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Θεοῦ Πατρὸς 1 **Father** is an important title for God. Here, **Father** could refer to: (1) the Father of Christ. (2) the Father of believers. Alternate translation: “God, who is the Father” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
13 1:2 dcr3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 In this book, unless otherwise noted, the words **we**, **us**, and **our** refer to Paul (the writer of this letter), Timothy (the one to whom this letter is written), and, by extension, all believers. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
14 1:3 p004 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns χάριν ἔχω τῷ Θεῷ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **gratitude** with a verb or an adjective. Alternate translation: “I thank God” or “I am thankful to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
15 1:3 tvb7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ᾧ λατρεύω ἀπὸ προγόνων 1 This is an idiom that means that Paul’s family has been serving God for many generations. Alternate translation: “whom my ancestors served and I serve, as well” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
16 1:3 ha9d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν καθαρᾷ συνειδήσει 1 Paul speaks of his **conscience** as if it could be physically **clean**. A person with a **clean conscience** does not feel guilty because he has always tried to do what was right. Alternate translation: “knowing I have tried my hardest to do what is right” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
17 1:3 rz7s rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ὡς ἀδιάλειπτον ἔχω τὴν περὶ σοῦ μνείαν 1 Paul speaks of the action of remembering by using the abstract noun **remembrance**. Your language may have a particular way of expressing this concept, such as with a verb. If so, you could use it in your translation. Alternate translation: “as I think about you constantly in my prayers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
18 1:3 p005 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular σοῦ 1 The word **you** is singular here and throughout the book, since Paul is addressing Timothy. A note will discuss the one exception in 4:22. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
19 1:3 pa6q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism νυκτὸς καὶ ἡμέρας 1 Here, **night and day** are used together to refer to all the time included in the night and the day. This means that Paul prays to God often, no matter what time it is. It does not mean that he prays all night and all day without ever stopping. Alternate translation: “at all times” Alternate translation: “always” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
20 1:4 p006 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μεμνημένος σου τῶν δακρύων 1 It is implied that Paul is referring here to the time when Paul was leaving Timothy. If this is unclear, you could include this information. Alternate translation: “remembering how you cried when I left you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
21 1:4 kk82 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy σου τῶν δακρύων 1 Here, **your tears** refers to the act of Timothy’s crying or being very sad. Alternate translation: “that you cried” or “your sadness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
22 1:4 gu8c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor χαρᾶς πληρωθῶ 1 Paul speaks of himself as if he were a container that could be **filled**. Alternate translation: “I may be very joyful” or “I may rejoice a lot” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
23 1:4 p007 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive χαρᾶς πληρωθῶ 1 If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “joy may fill me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
24 1:5 ayl4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ὑπόμνησιν λαβὼν 1 This is an idiom that simply means, “remembering.” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
25 1:5 buc3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῆς ἐν σοὶ ἀνυποκρίτου πίστεως 1 Paul refers to Timothy’s **faith** with an abstract noun. Your language may have a particular way of expressing this concept, such as with a verb. If so, you could use it in your translation. Alternate translation: “that you genuinely believe” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
26 1:5 p008 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τῆς ἐν σοὶ ἀνυποκρίτου πίστεως 1 Paul speaks of **faith** as if it were an object inside of Timothy. Paul is referring to Timothy’s faith in God here, not to anyone’s faith in Timothy. Alternate translation: “your genuine faith” or “your faith that is genuine” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
27 1:5 vgz2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἐν σοὶ ἀνυποκρίτου πίστεως, ἥτις ἐνῴκησεν πρῶτον ἐν τῇ μάμμῃ σου, Λωΐδι, καὶ τῇ μητρί σου, Εὐνίκῃ; πέπεισμαι δὲ ὅτι καὶ ἐν σοί 1 Paul is speaking of their **faith** as if it were something that was alive and lived **in** each of them. Alternate translation: “of the genuine faith that you have. Lois, your grandmother, and then Eunice, your mother, had this faith in God, and now I am confident that you have this same genuine faith as well” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
28 1:5 l8wc rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Λωΐδι 1 **Lois** is the name of a woman, Timothy’s grandmother, who is probably his mother’s mother. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
29 1:5 p009 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Εὐνίκῃ 1 **Eunice** is the name of a woman, Timothy’s mother. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
30 1:6 j58k δι’ ἣν αἰτίαν 1 Paul writes that the **reason** for asking Timothy to rekindle his gift is that he is confident of Timothy’s faith in Jesus. Alternate translation: “for this reason” or “because of your faith in Jesus”
31 1:6 h6eq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀναζωπυρεῖν τὸ χάρισμα 1 Paul speaks about Timothy’s need to start using his **gift** again as if he were restarting a fire. Alternate translation: “be eager once more to use the gift” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
32 1:6 i977 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction τὸ χάρισμα τοῦ Θεοῦ, ὅ ἐστιν ἐν σοὶ διὰ τῆς ἐπιθέσεως τῶν χειρῶν μου 1 Paul placed his **hands** on Timothy and prayed that God would give him power from God’s Spirit to enable him to do the work that God had called him to do. Then Timothy received the gift from the Holy Spirit. See how you translated this in 1 Tim 4:14. Alternate translation: “the gift of God that you received when I prayed for you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
33 1:6 p010 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸ χάρισμα τοῦ Θεοῦ, ὅ ἐστιν ἐν σοὶ διὰ τῆς ἐπιθέσεως τῶν χειρῶν μου 1 Paul speaks of **the gift** as an object inside of Timothy. If the words **that is in you** do not clearly communicate in your language that Timothy received the gift, you could translate it with a verb that expressing the idea of giving or receiving. Alternate translation: “the gift of God that you received when I laid my hands on you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
34 1:6 s6vb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὸ χάρισμα τοῦ Θεοῦ, ὅ ἐστιν ἐν σοὶ διὰ τῆς ἐπιθέσεως τῶν χειρῶν μου 1 It is implied that this is a spiritual gift that enables Timothy to do the work of ministry that God has called him to do, and that Paul also prayed for Timothy as he laid his hands on him. If these things are not clear, you may want to include this information in your translation. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
35 1:7 u8vl rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 Here, **For** indicates that this verse provides another reason for Paul’s instruction in the previous verse that Timothy should use his spiritual gift. If it would be helpful in your language, you could replace **For** with this information here. Alternate translation: “Another reason why I want you to start using again the gift God that gave you is that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
36 1:7 h1z3 οὐ & ἔδωκεν ἡμῖν ὁ Θεὸς πνεῦμα δειλίας, ἀλλὰ δυνάμεως, καὶ ἀγάπης, καὶ σωφρονισμοῦ 1 Here, **spirit** could refer to: (1) the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “God’s Holy Spirit does not cause us to be afraid. He causes us to have power and love and discipline” (2) the character of a human being. Alternate translation: “God does not cause us to be afraid but to have power and love and discipline”
37 1:7 p011 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns δυνάμεως, καὶ ἀγάπης, καὶ σωφρονισμοῦ 1 Paul uses abstract nouns to refer to three things that Timothy should be able to do. Your language may have a particular way of expressing these concepts, such as with verbs. If so, you could use them in your translation. Alternate translation: “one that makes us able to obey, to love, and to control ourselves” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
38 1:7 k6g7 σωφρονισμοῦ 1 Here, **discipline** could refer to: (1) self-control. Alternate translation: “of the ability to control ourselves” (2) the power to correct or even to control others. Alternate translation: “of the ability to correct others”
39 1:8 fk9z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸ μαρτύριον 1 Paul may be using the word **testimony** to refer to the activity of telling others about the Lord and not to the message itself. Alternate translation: “of testifying” or “of telling others” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
40 1:8 blk9 τὸν δέσμιον αὐτοῦ 1 Paul is not being held **prisoner** by the Lord. He is a prisoner because he has testified about the Lord. Alternate translation: “a prisoner for his sake” or “a prisoner for the Lord”
41 1:8 ry82 συνκακοπάθησον τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ 1 The term **together** could mean: (1) Timothy should suffer together with Paul. (2) Timothy should suffer together with all Christians who suffer.
42 1:8 xa86 συνκακοπάθησον τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ 1 Here, **for the gospel** means “for the sake of telling other people the good news about Jesus.” Alternate translation: “along with me, accept the suffering that results from telling other people the good news about Jesus”
43 1:8 hi9a τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ, κατὰ δύναμιν Θεοῦ 1 Paul is reminding Timothy that God provides people with **power** when they suffer so that they can endure the suffering. Alternate translation: “for the gospel, allowing God to make you strong”
44 1:9 ld55 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy καλέσαντος κλήσει ἁγίᾳ 1 Here, **with a holy calling** could refer to: (1) what results from the calling. The call produces holy people or people set apart for God. Alternate translation: “called us with a calling that sets us apart as holy to God” (2) the source of the calling, which is God, who is holy. Alternate translation: “called us by means of his own holy calling” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
45 1:9 lmas οὐ κατὰ τὰ ἔργα ἡμῶν 1 It may be helpful to start a new sentence here. If you do start a new sentence, for clarity you may wish to repeat some words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “He did not save us and call us because of our works”
46 1:9 kyr5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys ἀλλὰ κατὰ ἰδίαν πρόθεσιν καὶ χάριν 1 Here the words **purpose** and **grace** work together to mean “gracious purpose.” Paul is saying that God’s purpose or plan for us includes showing us grace or kindness through Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “but because of his gracious purpose” or “but because he planned to show us kindness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
47 1:9 p012 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive καὶ χάριν, τὴν δοθεῖσαν ἡμῖν ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “and grace, which God gave to us in Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
48 1:9 pq1z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 Paul speaks of God’s **purpose and grace** or “gracious purpose” as if it were an object inside of **Christ Jesus**. This refers to God’s plan to save people that Jesus fulfilled. So when people begin a relationship with Jesus, then God saves them. Alternate translation: “through our relationship to Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
49 1:9 zq7m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom πρὸ χρόνων αἰωνίων 1 This is an idiom that indicates that God decided to save through faith in Christ before time and the creation of the world. Alternate translation: “before time began” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
50 1:10 h5e5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor φανερωθεῖσαν δὲ νῦν 1 Paul speaks of God’s gracious plan to save us as if it were an object that could be uncovered and shown to people through the arrival of Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “and which now people can know” or “and which now people can experience” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
51 1:10 p013 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive φανερωθεῖσαν δὲ νῦν 1 If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “which now God has revealed” or “which now God has allowed people to know” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
52 1:10 i3wl rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor φωτίσαντος δὲ ζωὴν καὶ ἀφθαρσίαν διὰ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου 1 Paul refers to **life** and **immortality** as if they were objects that could be brought from darkness into light so that people could see them. He is speaking of revealing something or making it known to people. Alternate translation: “and revealed life and immortality through the gospel” or “and declared life and immortality through the gospel” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
53 1:10 a1n7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys ζωὴν καὶ ἀφθαρσίαν 1 Here, **life** and **immortality** are probably working together to mean “immortal life.” Alternate translation: “eternal life” or “incorruptible life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
54 1:11 tb9b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐτέθην ἐγὼ κῆρυξ 1 If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “God chose me to be a herald” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
55 1:11 p014 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown κῆρυξ 1 A **herald** is someone who is sent out to announce a message. If your language does not have a similar term and your readers would not know what a **herald** is, you can use a general expression. Alternate translation: “a messenger” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
56 1:11 p015 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor κῆρυξ 1 Paul compares himself to a **herald** because God has sent him out to announce the gospel message. Alternate translation: “a preacher” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
57 1:12 j37g δι’ ἣν αἰτίαν 1 Paul provides the **reason** for his suffering by referring back to his status as an apostle. Alternate translation: “because I am an apostle”
58 1:12 y8l4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit καὶ ταῦτα πάσχω 1 Paul does not mention the specific **things** that he is **suffering**, but from the context of the letter, the implication is that he is referring to suffering as a prisoner. Alternate translation: “I also suffer as a prisoner” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
59 1:12 td39 πέπεισμαι 1 Paul expresses that he is **certain** that God will make everything right in the end. Alternate translation: “I am sure”
60 1:12 p6pi rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὴν παραθήκην μου φυλάξαι 1 Paul is using a metaphor of a person leaving something with another person who is supposed to protect it until he gives it back to the first person. The two people involved are Jesus and Paul, but it is not clear which one is holding the **deposit**. This could mean: (1) Paul is trusting Jesus to keep something safe that Paul has entrusted to Jesus. This could be Paul’s own life, or, more specifically, that Paul would remain faithful to Jesus all of his life. Alternate translation: “to keep me faithful to him” (2) Paul is trusting Jesus to preserve the good news that Jesus has deposited with Paul for Paul to preach. Alternate translation: “to help me keep preaching his message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
61 1:12 hhu5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession τὴν παραθήκην μου 1 The term **my** here conveys the idea that this **deposit** is associated with Paul in some way. The particular association depends on what we consider the deposit to be. This could mean: (1) the deposit is associated with Paul because it is Paul’s own life or Paul’s faith in Jesus. Alternate translation: “my faithfulness to him” (2) the deposit is associated with Paul because it is the gospel message that Paul preaches. Alternate translation: “the gospel message that he has entrusted to me to preach” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
62 1:12 qcu3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐκείνην τὴν ἡμέραν 1 This refers to the **day** when Jesus returns for judgment. Alternate translation: “the day of judgment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
63 1:13 h1qd rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὑγιαινόντων λόγων 1 Paul wants Timothy to teach the things that he taught and thereby to follow his example. The expression **healthy words** means “the correct message” by association, since a healthy mind would recognize that the correct message was reasonable. Alternate translation: “of the correct message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
64 1:13 p016 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy λόγων 1 Paul uses the term **words** to describe the expression in words of what Christians believe. Alternate translation: “of … message” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
65 1:13 p017 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν πίστει καὶ ἀγάπῃ τῇ ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 Paul uses two abstract nouns, **faith** and **love**, to refer to actions that Timothy should do. Your language may have a particular way of expressing these concepts, such as with verbs. If so, you could use them in your translation. Alternate translation: “trusting in Christ Jesus and loving others because you belong to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
66 1:13 b2ld ἐν πίστει καὶ ἀγάπῃ τῇ ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 Here, **love** could refer to: (1) the love that Timothy should show others. Alternate translation: “trusting in Christ Jesus and loving others because you belong to him” (2) the love that Timothy should show to God. Alternate translation: “trusting in Christ Jesus and loving him”
67 1:13 ix6w rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 Paul speaks of **faith** and **love** as if they were objects inside of **Christ Jesus**. This refers to the faith and love that Jesus enables us to have when we belong to him. See how you translated this phrase in 1:9. Alternate translation: “ours through our relationship to Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
68 1:14 i5g5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὴν καλὴν παραθήκην 1 Here, **the good deposit** refers to the gospel message that God has entrusted to Timothy to share with his people. Alternate translation: “the good message entrusted to you for God’s people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
69 1:14 cb5q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τὴν καλὴν παραθήκην φύλαξον 1 Timothy needs to be alert to protect the gospel message because people will oppose him and try to distort what he says and teaches, turning it into a different message. Alternate translation: “Protect the good deposit against those who will try to distort it” or “Because people will try to distort the gospel message, guard it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
70 1:14 a3v2 διὰ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 Here, **through** means “by means of” or “by the power of.” Alternate translation: “by means of the Holy Spirit” or “with the help of the Holy Spirit”
71 1:15 p018 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole πάντες οἱ ἐν τῇ Ἀσίᾳ 1 The word **all** could mean: (1) “many, but not all” in the strict sense, since Timothy and Onesiphorus did not turn away from him. So this would be an example of hyperbole. (2) the men who came to Rome with him from Asia Minor. Alternate translation: “all who came with me from Asia” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
72 1:15 p6f4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀπεστράφησάν με 1 This is a metaphor that means they left Paul and stopped helping him. Alternate translation: “have deserted me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
73 1:15 p020 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀπεστράφησάν με 1 Paul assumes that Timothy would know that the reason that the believers from Asia had abandoned him was because the authorities had put him in prison. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “have deserted me because I am in prison” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
74 1:15 x6cc rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Φύγελος & Ἑρμογένης 1 **Phygelus** and **Hermogenes** are the names of men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
75 1:16 izk9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing δῴη ἔλεος ὁ Κύριος τῷ Ὀνησιφόρου οἴκῳ 1 Paul is asking God to bless the family of **Onesiphorus**. You can express this as either a blessing or a prayer, in whichever way is more natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I pray that the Lord will be kind to the family of Onesiphorus” or “May the Lord bless the family of Onesiphorus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
76 1:16 e6hl rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ὀνησιφόρου 1 **Onesiphorus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
77 1:16 zz44 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τῷ Ὀνησιφόρου οἴκῳ 1 The word **household** refers to **Onesiphorus** and to all the people in his family, possibly even his servants. Alternate translation: “to Onesiphorus and everyone who lives with him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
78 1:16 td1q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὴν ἅλυσίν μου οὐκ ἐπησχύνθη 1 The word **chain** refers to being in prison. Onesiphorus was not ashamed that Paul was in prison but came to visit him frequently. Alternate translation: “was not ashamed of my imprisonment” or “was not ashamed of my being in prison” or “was not ashamed of me, even though I was in prison” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
79 1:17 xfg1 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλὰ 1 Here, **but** indicates a contrast between the previous verse and this verse. Instead of being ashamed that Paul was in prison, Onesiphorus searched for Paul and found him there. Use whatever form is most natural in your language to show this contrast. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
80 1:18 p3di rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing δῴη αὐτῷ ὁ Κύριος, εὑρεῖν ἔλεος παρὰ Κυρίου 1 Paul is again asking for the Lord to **grant mercy** to Onesiphorus. You can express this as either a blessing or a prayer, in whichever way is more natural in your language. See how you translated this in [1:16](../01/16.md). Alternate translation: “I pray that the Lord will be merciful to Onesiphorus” or “May the Lord have mercy on Onesiphorus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
81 1:18 x0eo rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result (δῴη αὐτῷ ὁ Κύριος, εὑρεῖν ἔλεος παρὰ Κυρίου ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ), καὶ ὅσα ἐν Ἐφέσῳ διηκόνησεν, βέλτιον σὺ γινώσκεις 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could reverse the order of these sentences, since the second sentence gives the reason for the action that the first sentence describes. See the UST. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
82 1:18 r54t rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns δῴη αὐτῷ ὁ Κύριος, εὑρεῖν ἔλεος παρὰ Κυρίου 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could use the name “Onesiphorus” instead of the pronoun **him** to make it clear who is receiving mercy. Alternate translation: “May Onesiphorus receive mercy from the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
83 1:18 x2dk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εὑρεῖν ἔλεος παρὰ Κυρίου 1 Paul speaks of **mercy** as if it were an object that could be found. Paul is expressing his desire that God show **mercy** to Onesiphorus on the day of judgment. Alternate translation: “to receive mercy from the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
84 1:18 f3ep rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ 1 The expression **that day** refers to the day when God will judge all people; at that time they will receive mercy from the Lord, as Paul mentions, or wrath. Alternate translation: “on the day of judgment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
85 1:18 p025 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ὅσα ἐν Ἐφέσῳ διηκόνησεν, βέλτιον σὺ γινώσκεις 1 Paul is reminding Timothy that Onesiphorus helped him earlier, **in Ephesus**. So, Paul is asking the Lord to bless Onesiphorus because he helped Paul several times. Alternate translation: “you know well how much he also helped me earlier when I was in Ephesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
86 2:intro k3zn 0 # 2 Timothy 2 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\nIn verses 11b–13, Paul may be quoting a poem or hymn. To show the reader that this may be a quotation, in your translation you may choose to set these verses farther to the right than the other verses in the chapter.\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### We will reign with him\n\nFaithful Christians will reign with Christ in the future. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]])\n\n## Important figures of speech in this chapter\n\n### Analogies\n\nIn this chapter, Paul makes several analogies to teach about living as a Christian. He uses analogies of soldiers, athletes, and farmers. Later in the chapter, he uses the analogy of different kinds of containers in a house.
87 2:1 bll5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τέκνον μου 1 Here, **child** is a term of great love and approval. Timothy is not Paul’s biological child. It is also likely that Paul introduced Timothy to Christ, and so this is why Paul considered him like his own child. Alternate translation: “who are like my child” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
88 2:1 p026 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐνδυναμοῦ 1 You could express this with an active form, and you could state who would do the action. Alternate translation: “let God make you strong” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
89 2:1 e6ex rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν τῇ χάριτι τῇ ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 Paul wants Timothy to experience the strength that God provides through his **grace** or kindness. Believers experience God’s grace through knowing Jesus Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **grace** with an adjective. Alternate translation: “as you allow Christ Jesus to kindly empower you through your relationship to him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
90 2:2 ig9v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit διὰ πολλῶν μαρτύρων 1 Paul is referring to teaching in a public setting with others present. The implication is that those others could testify as to what he taught. Alternate translation: “in the presence of people who can testify to what I said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
91 2:2 kv1m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ταῦτα παράθου 1 Paul speaks of his instructions to Timothy as if they were objects that Timothy could give to other people and trust them to use correctly. Alternate translation: “commit them” or “teach them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
92 2:2 p027 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations πιστοῖς ἀνθρώποις 1 Here the term **men** has a generic sense that may include women. Alternate translation: “to faithful people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
93 2:3 yc1j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit συνκακοπάθησον 1 Here, **together** could mean: (1) Timothy should suffer together with Paul. Alternate translation: “Suffer together with me” (2) Timothy should suffer together with all Christians who suffer. Alternate translation: “Suffer together with all believers” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
94 2:3 juu2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὡς καλὸς στρατιώτης Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Paul compares suffering for Christ Jesus to the suffering that a good soldier endures. Alternate translation: “as if you were a soldier and Jesus Christ were your commander” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
95 2:4 a4x7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὐδεὶς στρατευόμενος ἐμπλέκεται ταῖς τοῦ βίου πραγματίαις 1 To help Timothy understand something important about following Jesus, Paul introduces the metaphor of a **soldier** who has to decide between pleasing his leader or pleasing those outside the army. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this. Alternate translation: “Consider that no dedicated soldier allows the affairs of life to distract him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
96 2:4 p7n5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐμπλέκεται ταῖς τοῦ βίου πραγματίαις 1 Paul speaks of being involved in other matters as if they were a net that trapped people and kept them from being able to move freely. Alternate translation: “allows the affairs of life to distract him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
97 2:4 p028 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐμπλέκεται ταῖς τοῦ βίου πραγματίαις 1 If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “allows the affairs of life to distract him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
98 2:4 p029 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit τοῦ βίου 1 By **life**, Paul means, in the context of this metaphor, “civilian life.” The implication is that Timothy and all believers should not allow competing concerns to keep them from serving Christ. Alternate translation: “of everyday life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
99 2:4 d2lg τῷ στρατολογήσαντι 1 Alternate translation: “his leader” or “the one who commands him”
100 2:5 d483 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐὰν & ἀθλῇ τις, οὐ στεφανοῦται, ἐὰν μὴ νομίμως ἀθλήσῃ 1 To help Timothy understand something important about following Jesus, Paul introduces the metaphor of an athlete who has to decide between competing **lawfully** or not lawfully. The athlete will only receive the crown given to the winner if he competes lawfully. By making this comparison with an athlete competing in games, Paul is implicitly telling Timothy that Christ will not reward him unless he serves him **lawfully**, that is, unless he obeys him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this directly. Alternate translation: “consider that the officials only crown an athlete as the winner if he competes according to the rules” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
101 2:5 p031 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo ἐὰν & ἀθλῇ τις, οὐ στεφανοῦται, ἐὰν μὴ νομίμως ἀθλήσῃ 1 Paul is also using a hypothetical situation to teach Timothy. Alternate translation: “suppose an athlete did not compete by the rules. Then he would not be crowned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
102 2:5 p032 ἐὰν & ἀθλῇ τις 1 Here, **competes** refers to competing in an athletic event. Alternate translation: “if an athlete competes in an event”
103 2:5 xbn6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives οὐ στεφανοῦται, ἐὰν μὴ νομίμως ἀθλήσῃ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this double negative by translating it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “the officials will only crown him if he competes by the rules” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
104 2:5 p033 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive οὐ στεφανοῦται 1 If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “the officials will not crown him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
105 2:5 p034 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐ στεφανοῦται 1 Paul assumes that Timothy will know that in this culture crowning indicated the winner of a competition. Alternate translation: “the officials will not crown him as the winner” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
106 2:5 lea8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown οὐ στεφανοῦται 1 In Paul’s time, when athletes won competitions, they were **crowned** with wreaths made from the leaves of plants. You can express this idea in your translation by referring to the comparable custom in your own culture, or by using a general expression. Alternate translation: “the officials will not give him an award” or “the officials will not declare him to be the winner” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
107 2:5 reg6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit μὴ νομίμως ἀθλήσῃ 1 Paul is referring to the rules that governed a competition. The athletes had to obey the rules or they would be removed from the competition and not have an opportunity to win. If it would be helpful in your language, you could mention these rules. Alternate translation: “he does not compete according to the rules” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
108 2:6 wz35 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸν κοπιῶντα γεωργὸν δεῖ πρῶτον τῶν καρπῶν μεταλαμβάνειν 1 To help Timothy understand something important about following Jesus, Paul introduces the metaphor of a **farmer** who has to decide between working hard or not working hard. The farmer will receive a share of the harvest if he is working hard. By making this comparison, Paul is encouraging Timothy to work hard in his service to Christ so that God will reward him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this directly. Alternate translation: “Consider that a farmer who works hard should receive a share of the crops before anyone else” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
109 2:6 p035 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πρῶτον τῶν καρπῶν μεταλαμβάνειν 1 In this illustration, it seems that the hardworking farmer is working with other farmers who will all receive a part of the crop after the harvest. But since this farmer works harder than the others, he should receive before the others. It is implied that receiving first is best, possibly because the quality of the crop is better. Alternate translation: “receive the best share of the crops” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
110 2:7 bdk9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit νόει ὃ λέγω, δώσει γάρ σοι ὁ Κύριος σύνεσιν 1 Paul gave Timothy three metaphors in verses 3–6, but he did not completely explain their implications. He expected Timothy to figure out, with God’s help, the lesson of these metaphors for Christ’s servants. For that reason, if you want to include an explanation of the meaning of the metaphors, we recommend that you state the meaning in a footnote rather than in the Bible text. Alternate translation: “you will have to think carefully about what I have just told you to understand it completely, but you can depend on God to help you to do that” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
111 2:7 p036 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὃ λέγω 1 Paul refers to what he has just written in his letter with the verb **saying** to express the idea of communicating. Alternate translation: “what I have just told you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
112 2:7 a22q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν πᾶσιν 1 Here, **in everything** refers to everything related to the three metaphors that Paul has written just before this. Alternate translation: “about everything that I have just said” or “about all that I said” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
113 2:8 mh1k rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐκ σπέρματος Δαυείδ 1 The phrase **from the seed of** refers to Jesus being descended from King David. Alternate translation: “who is a descendant of David” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
114 2:8 wt31 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐγηγερμένον ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 The expression **raised from the dead** is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “whom God caused to live again” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
115 2:8 p038 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐγηγερμένον ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “whom God raised from the dead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
116 2:8 s4vh rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession κατὰ τὸ εὐαγγέλιόν μου 1 The term **my** conveys the idea that it is the gospel associated with Paul because he preaches it. Alternate translation: “according to the gospel message that I preach” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
117 2:9 t2ax rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy μέχρι δεσμῶν 1 Paul uses the expression **unto chains** to express how far his suffering has gone: from being beaten, to being arrested, to being in chains in prison. Alternate translation: “to the point of being imprisoned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
118 2:9 p039 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile ὡς κακοῦργος 1 Paul compares his situation to the shameful one that a person would be in who had actually committed a crime. Alternate translation: “as if I were a criminal” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
119 2:9 pc6t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ οὐ δέδεται 1 Here, **bound** means being held in chains as a prisoner, referring to Paul’s condition. Paul contrasts himself, an actual prisoner, with God’s message, which can never be held prisoner. Alternate translation: “nothing is holding back the message from God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
120 2:9 p040 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ οὐ δέδεται 1 If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this idea. Alternate translation: “nothing is holding back the message from God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
121 2:9 p041 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Paul uses the term **word** to describe the message from God that he and others are communicating with words. Alternate translation: “the message from God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
122 2:10 p042 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole πάντα ὑπομένω 1 Here the term **all** is a generalization that likely refers to the sufferings that Paul describes in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “I endure all of these sufferings” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
123 2:10 aa1x rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj διὰ τοὺς ἐκλεκτούς 1 The term **chosen** is an adjective that functions as a noun here and refers to a group of people. If your language would not use an adjective in that way, you could translate this term with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “for the people whom God has chosen” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
124 2:10 j2bk καὶ αὐτοὶ σωτηρίας τύχωσιν τῆς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 The phrase **obtain salvation** could also be expressed with Christ Jesus, who grants salvation, as the subject. Alternate translation: “Christ Jesus may grant them salvation”
125 2:10 p043 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns καὶ αὐτοὶ σωτηρίας τύχωσιν τῆς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **salvation** with a verb. Alternate translation: “Christ Jesus may save them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
126 2:10 el68 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns μετὰ δόξης αἰωνίου 1 The abstract noun **glory** refers to the wonderful condition that people will experience when they are in the presence of God. It comes from God himself and he shares it with those who are saved by Jesus Christ, and this condition is **eternal**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **glory** with an adjective. Alternate translation: “and know how glorious it is to be with God forever” or “and experience God’s wonderful presence forever” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
127 2:11 nr7u πιστὸς ὁ λόγος 1 In this context, the term **word** refers to the statement of doctrine that follows. See how you translated this phrase in [1 Timothy 1:15](../1ti/01/15.md) Alternate translation: “This statement is dependable”
128 2:11 p044 πιστὸς ὁ λόγος 1 You could represent the meaning of the adjective **trustworthy** with an active verb, if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “you could trust this statement”
129 2:11 p045 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks πιστὸς ὁ λόγος 1 Paul uses this phrase to introduce a direct quotation. The words that follow in the rest of this verse and in [2:12](../02/12.md) and [2:13](../02/13.md) are a poem or hymn that expresses the message that Paul says is trustworthy. It may be helpful to your readers if you indicate this by marking these words as a direct quotation or by setting them farther to the right, as the General Notes at the beginning of this chapter suggest. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
130 2:11 g6e4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-poetry εἰ γὰρ συναπεθάνομεν, καὶ συνζήσομεν 1 This is the beginning of a poem or hymn that Paul is probably quoting. If your language has a way of indicating that this is poetry, such as by setting individual phrases on separate lines, you could use it here and in [2:12](../02/12.md) and [2:13](../02/13.md). If not, you could translate this material as regular prose rather than as poetry. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-poetry]])
131 2:11 in38 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εἰ & συναπεθάνομεν 1 Paul is speaking since he and Timothy and other believers who should trust this statement have not actually **died**. This could refer to: (1) the way that believers accept Jesus’ death for their sins when they trust him for salvation. This means that they have “died” to their old life of sin. Alternate translation: “if we have ended our old way of life by accepting Jesus’ death for us” (2) the way that people who believe in Jesus may suffer for him, possibly to the point of dying for him. Alternate translation: “if we are prepared to die for Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
132 2:11 p046 καὶ συνζήσομεν 1 Although Paul is referring to dying with Christ in a figurative sense, **live** is probably not figurative, but could refer to: (1) life after physical death. This seems most likely given Paul’s mention of “eternal glory” in the previous verse and “we will reign with him” in the next. Alternate translation: “then God will raise us from the dead to live with Jesus” (2) how believers will act in this life before physical death. Alternate translation: “we will not pursue our own desires, instead we will do what Jesus wants us to do”
133 2:12 p048 εἰ ἀρνησόμεθα 1 Paul uses the term **deny** to refer to the action of believers saying that they do not know Jesus Christ during this present life. It is presented as the opposite of **endure**, so it refers to someone who gives in to persecution and denies being a follower of Jesus. Alternate translation: “if we say now that we do not know him”
134 2:12 p049 κἀκεῖνος ἀρνήσεται ἡμᾶς 1 In this second usage of the word **deny**, Paul is referring to the action of Jesus Christ on the day of final judgment. On that day, Jesus will either receive a faithful believer or reject those who are not true followers. Those who deny that they are followers of Jesus while on earth are not true followers. Alternate translation: “he will reject us on the day of judgment”
135 2:13 ke4w εἰ ἀπιστοῦμεν 1 Paul uses the word **unfaithful** to express the condition of believers who do not continue to obey Jesus, but rather disobey him. Alternate translation: “if we disobey Jesus” or “if we do not do what Jesus wants us to do”
136 2:13 p050 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐκεῖνος πιστὸς μένει 1 This could mean : (1) he remains faithful to them. (2) he remains true to himself. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
137 2:13 ihd4 ἀρνήσασθαι & ἑαυτὸν οὐ δύναται 1 Paul states that Jesus is not able to **deny himself**, meaning that Jesus is not able to go against his character and will remain true to what he said he would do. Paul may have one or both of the following ideas in mind. (1) Jesus’ character includes being the Savior who can forgive our unfaithfulness when we repent of it, as Peter experienced (John 21:15–19). This favors the interpretation of the previous phrase as “he remains faithful to us.” (2) Jesus’ character also includes being the holy God who judges people for their sin when they do not repent. This favors the interpretation of the previous phrase as “he remains true to himself.” Alternate translation: “he must always act according to his character”
138 2:14 u661 ὑπομίμνῃσκε 1 The word **{them}**, which is implicit in the Greek verb, probably refers to the people that Timothy has responsibility over. Alternate translation: “Remind the people there”
139 2:14 p051 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Paul uses the expression **before God**, which means “in front of God,” to mean “where God can see.” Seeing, in turn, means attention and judgment. Alternate translation: “as God is watching” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
140 2:14 r5lq rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 The implication is that Paul is telling Timothy to tell the believers, when he gives them this command, that God will be watching what they do. Alternate translation: “with God as their witness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
141 2:14 g6p7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor μὴ λογομαχεῖν 1 Paul uses the term **battle** to describe arguments. This could mean: (1) the believers are not to argue about unimportant things such as the words that someone uses to present the gospel message. That only distracts people from talking about important things, such as the gospel message itself. Alternate translation: “not to fight about small things like words” (2) the believers are not to argue about what words mean. Again, this causes disunity among the believers for no good reason. Alternate translation: “not to fight about the meanings of words” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
142 2:14 rke6 ἐπ’ οὐδὲν χρήσιμον 1 Paul adds that battling about words has no benefit for those involved. Alternate translation: “it does not benefit anyone”
143 2:14 ywty rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐπὶ καταστροφῇ τῶν ἀκουόντων 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **destruction** with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “it destroys those who hear” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
144 2:14 x7gx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐπὶ καταστροφῇ τῶν ἀκουόντων 1 Here, **destruction** refers not to physical harm, but to the spiritual harm that is done to believers who hear their teachers foolishly arguing about unimportant things. This teaches the believers that being seen as right about small things is more important than love and unity, and can cause them to have wrong ideas about the faith or to stop following Jesus altogether. Alternate translation: “and can make those who hear it want to stop following Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
145 2:15 m3vy σπούδασον σεαυτὸν, δόκιμον παραστῆσαι τῷ Θεῷ 1 Alternate translation: “Do your best to please God”
146 2:15 rj6y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐργάτην 1 Paul says that Timothy will be a skilled workman if he correctly teaches God’s word. Alternate translation: “like a craftsman” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
147 2:15 xgz9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὀρθοτομοῦντα τὸν λόγον τῆς ἀληθείας 1 Paul refers to **the word of truth** as if it were a path that someone was cutting through difficult terrain. When such a path is **straight**, travelers can follow it directly to their destination. By contrast, the useless discussions that Paul describes in [2:14](../02/14.md) and [2:16](../02/16.md) would be needless detours in terms of this same metaphor. Alternate translation: “show people how to follow the Scriptures directly” or “teach the Scriptures correctly so that people can follow them” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
148 2:15 p052 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τῆς ἀληθείας 1 Paul uses the term **word** to refer to something that is expressed in words. This could refer to: (1) the message that Timothy is to teach. Alternate translation: “the true message” (2) the Scriptures. Alternate translation: “the true things that God has said in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
149 2:15 p053 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τὸν λόγον τῆς ἀληθείας 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **truth** with an adjective. Alternate translation: “the true message” or “the true things that God has said in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
150 2:16 e27q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐπὶ πλεῖον & προκόψουσιν ἀσεβείας 1 Paul speaks of these discussions as if they could physically progress in a certain direction, and he speaks of **ungodliness** as that direction. Paul is describing the effect that these discussions have on people. Alternate translation: “they cause people to become more and more ungodly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
151 2:17 i73t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile ὁ λόγος αὐτῶν ὡς γάγγραινα νομὴν ἕξει 1 This is a simile. It means that something will spread from person to person and harm the faith of all those who hear it. The thing that will spread could refer to: (1) the habit of having useless and godless discussions. (2) the things that the people were saying in these empty discussions, or both. Alternate translation: “these empty discussions will spread quickly and cause destruction like an infectious disease” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
152 2:17 p054 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος αὐτῶν 1 Paul uses the term **word** to refer to something that is expressed in words. Alternate translation: “these discussions” or “what people who take part in these discussions say” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
153 2:17 p055 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown ὡς γάγγραινα 1 “Gangrene” is type of tissue death caused by infection or lack of blood circulation. It quickly spreads in a person’s body and can lead to death. If your readers would not know what **gangrene** is, you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “like an infectious disease” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
154 2:17 p056 rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns ὧν ἐστιν Ὑμέναιος, καὶ Φίλητος 1 Paul gives Timothy the names of **Hymenaeus** and **Philetus** examples of ungodliness and foolish talk. To make the relationship between these names and the preceding **their word** clear in your language, you may have to make this explicit. Alternate translation: “Hymeneus and Philetus are such people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
155 2:17 x2k6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ὑμέναιος, καὶ Φίλητος 1 **Hymenaeus** and **Philetus** are names of men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
156 2:18 fi9z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οἵτινες περὶ τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἠστόχησαν 1 Paul uses this expression to speak of faith in Christ as if it were a target at which people should aim. Those who have **missed the mark** do not believe or teach what is true. Alternate translation: “who are teaching things that are not true” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
157 2:18 p057 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns οἵτινες περὶ τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἠστόχησαν 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **truth** with an adjective. Alternate translation: “who teach things that are not true” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
158 2:18 pu22 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἀνάστασιν ἤδη γεγονέναι 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **resurrection** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “God has already raised the dead” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
159 2:18 ura5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀνατρέπουσιν τήν τινων πίστιν 1 Paul refers to **faith** as though it were an object that could be destroyed. Alternate translation: “they are causing some people to stop believing” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
160 2:19 ir1z rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὁ & στερεὸς θεμέλιος τοῦ Θεοῦ ἕστηκεν 1 Paul uses the image of the **foundation** of a building to explain that even though a false and destructive message has been destroying the faith of some people, God has nevertheless given people who want to continue to follow him a true message, which provides for them a safe and secure “place to stand.” Alternate translation: “God has provided a secure basis for people to continue to believe in him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
161 2:19 p058 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἔχων τὴν σφραγῖδα ταύτην 1 Paul speaks of the inscription on this foundation as if it were a **seal**, since seals on the outside of documents often bore inscriptions describing their contents. Alternate translation: “having this inscription” or “which can be described in this way” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
162 2:19 p059 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks ἔχων τὴν σφραγῖδα ταύτην 1 Paul uses this phrase to introduce two direct quotations. The statements that follow in the rest of this verse describe two aspects of the basis that God has provided for people to continue to believe in him. It may be helpful to your readers if you indicate this by marking these statements as quotations. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
163 2:19 nd7t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ὁ ὀνομάζων τὸ ὄνομα Κυρίου 1 The expression **names the name of the Lord** is an idiom that refers to saying the name of the Lord in order to declare that one belongs to him. Alternate translation: “who says he believes in the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
164 2:19 y3bc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἀποστήτω ἀπὸ ἀδικίας 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **unrighteousness** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “must stop doing evil things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
165 2:20 p060 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐν μεγάλῃ δὲ οἰκίᾳ, οὐκ ἔστιν μόνον σκεύη χρυσᾶ καὶ ἀργυρᾶ, ἀλλὰ καὶ ξύλινα καὶ ὀστράκινα 1 To help Timothy understand something important about following Jesus, Paul introduces the metaphor that compares the **containers** that are in the home of a wealthy person with people in the church. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that this is a metaphor or illustration. Alternate translation: “Consider this illustration: in the home of a wealthy person, there are containers made of gold and silver, and there are also containers made of wood and clay” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
166 2:20 p061 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἀλλὰ καὶ ξύλινα καὶ ὀστράκινα 1 Paul leaves out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. Alternate translation: “and there are also containers made of wood and clay” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
167 2:20 j75l σκεύη 1 The word **container** is a general term for items used to hold other things, such as grain, food, drink, or refuse. If your language does not have a general word, you can use a specific word such as “bowl” or “pot.”
168 2:20 mt5e rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἃ μὲν εἰς τιμὴν, ἃ δὲ εἰς ἀτιμίαν 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract nouns **honor** and **dishonor** by stating the ideas behind them with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “he uses the former at events to honor people and he uses the latter to do things that no one wants to see” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
169 2:21 jm3p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐκκαθάρῃ ἑαυτὸν ἀπὸ τούτων 1 Here Paul continues the metaphor that compares people in the church to containers in a great house that have different uses. Paul speaks of a person washing himself clean as though he had been a pot full of something bad. By this he means that the person has given up certain associations or activities. Here, **these** could refer to: (1) the false teachers who are destroying the faith of some people. Alternate translation: “has disassociated himself from these false teachers” (2) the activities of quarreling and false teaching that Paul has warned Timothy about. Alternate translation: “has stopped doing these ungodly actions” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
170 2:21 g79f rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἔσται σκεῦος εἰς τιμήν 1 Paul speaks of a person who has given up these associations or activities as if he were a particular kind of **container**. Alternate translation: “he will be like a dish for special occasions” or “he will be like a dish that is used to honor people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
171 2:21 p062 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἔσται σκεῦος εἰς τιμήν 1 The implication is that God will be able to give important assignments to a person who is free from wrong associations or activities. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “he will be someone to whom God can give important assignments” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
172 2:21 mh63 ἔσται σκεῦος εἰς τιμήν, ἡγιασμένον εὔχρηστον τῷ Δεσπότῃ, εἰς πᾶν ἔργον ἀγαθὸν ἡτοιμασμένον 1 These four phrases could mean: (1) the ones beginning with **having been** give the reason for the phrase before them. Alternate translation: “he will be a container for honor because he has been sanctified, and he will be useful to the Master because he has been prepared for every good work” (2) all four phrases could simply be describing the person. Alternate translation: “he will be a container for honor, someone who is sanctified, useful to the Master, and ready for every good work”
173 2:21 p063 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἡγιασμένον 1 If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea, and you can state who did the action. Alternate translation: “whom God has set apart for himself” or “whom God has set apart for a special purpose” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
174 2:21 nl5d rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἡγιασμένον 1 If this phrase is continuing the metaphor of objects in a house, then Paul is referring to a person who is free from wrong associations or activities as if he were a precious object whose owner keeps it in a special place. Whether this phrase is continuing the metaphor or not, it still expresses the idea of being “dedicated” for a special purpose. Alternate translation: “whom God has set apart for a special purpose” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
175 2:21 p064 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor εὔχρηστον τῷ Δεσπότῃ 1 In the context of the metaphor of the house, Paul speaks of God as the head of the household. Alternate translation: “useful to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
176 2:21 p065 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive εἰς πᾶν ἔργον ἀγαθὸν ἡτοιμασμένον 1 If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “who has gotten himself ready to do any good work” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
177 2:22 h9p6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὰς & νεωτερικὰς ἐπιθυμίας φεῦγε 1 Paul speaks about **youthful** desires as if they were a dangerous person or animal that Timothy should run away from. Alternate translation: “control your youthful desires” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
178 2:22 p066 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὰς & νεωτερικὰς ἐπιθυμίας φεῦγε 1 Paul speaks of immoral activities by association with the desires that lead a person to engage in them. Alternate translation: “refuse to do the wrong things that young people want to do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
179 2:22 srb7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor δίωκε δὲ δικαιοσύνην, πίστιν, ἀγάπην, εἰρήνην 1 Paul is using the verb **pursue** in contrast to **flee**. He speaks of these positive things as if Timothy should run towards them because they will do him good. Alternate translation: “be eager to do what is right, to believe in God, to love God and others, and to live in peace with people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
180 2:22 p067 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns δικαιοσύνην, πίστιν, ἀγάπην, εἰρήνην 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the abstract nouns **righteousness**, **faith**, **love**, and **peace** by stating the ideas behind them with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “do what is right, believe in God, love other people, and live peacefully with other people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
181 2:22 hg99 μετὰ τῶν ἐπικαλουμένων τὸν Κύριον ἐκ καθαρᾶς καρδίας 1 This likely means that Paul wants Timothy to pursue these positive things together with others who are sincere in their faith. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could put this phrase at the beginning of Paul’s command to Timothy, as in the UST, before **pursue**. Alternate translation: “together with those who worship the Lord with sincere intentions”
182 2:22 gl3q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom τῶν ἐπικαλουμένων τὸν Κύριον 1 The expression **calling on the Lord** is an idiom that means to trust and worship the Lord. Alternate translation: “those who worship the Lord” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
183 2:22 p068 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἐκ καθαρᾶς καρδίας 1 Paul uses a physical part of the body, the **heart**, to represent the intentions and desires of a person. Alternate translation: “with sincere intentions” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
184 2:22 b2ti rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐκ καθαρᾶς καρδίας 1 Paul uses the word **clean** to describe the intentions or thoughts of a person as though they were an object that could be made clean. Alternate translation: “with sincere intentions” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
185 2:23 tmf7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὰς & μωρὰς καὶ ἀπαιδεύτους ζητήσεις παραιτοῦ 1 Paul refers to certain kinds of discussions by association with the kind of **questions** that people might ask that would lead to these discussions or by association with the kind of people that would ask these questions. Alternate translation: “do not become involved in foolish and ignorant discussions” or “do not allow people to involve you in discussions that they start because they are foolish and ignorant” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
186 2:23 p069 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet μωρὰς καὶ ἀπαιδεύτους ζητήσεις 1 Paul may be using the words **foolish** and **ignorant** together to emphasize a single idea. Alternate translation: “very stupid questions” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
187 2:23 kh6p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor γεννῶσι μάχας 1 Paul speaks of the **questions** as if they were women giving birth to children (the **battles**). Alternate translation: “they cause arguments” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
188 2:23 p070 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor μάχας 1 Paul uses the term **battles** to describe arguments. Alternate translation: “they cause arguments” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
189 2:24 p071 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor δοῦλον & Κυρίου 1 Paul is using the expression **slave of the Lord** to refer to leaders in the church, including Timothy, who do what God tells them to do. This includes teaching the believers and interacting with the quarrelsome teachers who challenge their authority and the truth. Alternate translation: “a leader in the church” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
190 2:24 p072 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὐ δεῖ μάχεσθαι 1 Paul uses the term **battle** to describe arguments. Alternate translation: “must not argue” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
191 2:25 un9l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns ἐν πραΰτητι 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **meekness** in this expression with an adverb. Alternate translation: “meekly” or “gently” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
192 2:25 u6rp παιδεύοντα 1 Paul presents **educating** as the godly response to quarrels. This term can mean “teach” or “correct.” Alternate translation: “teaching” or “correcting”
193 2:25 jt1r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor μήποτε δώῃ αὐτοῖς ὁ Θεὸς μετάνοιαν 1 Paul speaks of **repentance** as if it were an object that God could give people. Alternate translation: “God may cause them to repent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
194 2:25 u8dy εἰς ἐπίγνωσιν ἀληθείας 1 Paul speaks of the result of **repentance** as knowing the **truth**. Alternate translation: “so that they will know the truth”
195 2:26 p073 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἀνανήψωσιν ἐκ τῆς τοῦ διαβόλου παγίδος 1 As Paul moves from one metaphor into another, he leaves out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. Alternate translation: “they may become sober again and escape from the trap of the devil” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
196 2:26 ef3q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀνανήψωσιν 1 Paul speaks of sinners learning to think correctly about God as if they were drunk people becoming **sober again**. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
197 2:26 mql8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐκ τῆς τοῦ διαβόλου παγίδος 1 Paul refers to the deception of **the devil** as a physical trap that sinners are captured in. Alternate translation: “and escape from the devil’s deception” or “and reject the devil’s deception” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
198 2:26 p074 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐζωγρημένοι ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ, εἰς τὸ ἐκείνου θέλημα 1 If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “after the devil has captured them and made them do what he wanted” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
199 2:26 dj4j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐζωγρημένοι ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ, εἰς τὸ ἐκείνου θέλημα 1 Paul speaks of the devil’s deception as if the devil had physically **captured** them and made them do what he wanted. Alternate translation: “after the devil has deceived them and made them do what he wanted” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
200 3:intro k2cr 0 # 2 Timothy 3 General Notes\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\nMany scholars understand the **last days** to mean the entire time from when Jesus first came to when he will return, which includes Paul’s time. If so, then what Paul teaches in this chapter about being persecuted applies to all believers. But some scholars understand the **last days** to mean a time in the future just before Jesus returns. If that is the meaning, then Paul is prophesying in verses 1–9 and 13 about those days. If possible, translators should be careful not to let how they understand this issue affect how they translate these verses. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/kt/lastday]])
201 3:1 g65r rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐν ἐσχάταις ἡμέραις 1 Paul is using the term **days** to refer to a particular time. Alternate translation: “during the period of time before the end” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
202 3:1 n7gs rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐνστήσονται καιροὶ χαλεποί 1 The implication from what Paul goes on to say about people becoming ungodly and violent is that it will be difficult for believers in this time period. Alternate translation: “believers will face difficult situations” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
203 3:2 p075 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations οἱ ἄνθρωποι 1 Here Paul is using the term **men** in a generic sense that includes all people. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
204 3:2 jb27 φίλαυτοι 1 Here, **self-loving** refers to loving oneself more than loving family or friends with a natural human love. This is not the kind of love that comes from God. Alternate translation: “self-centered”
205 3:3 u3n7 ἄστοργοι 1 The term **unloving** means that they will not love other people whom they should love. Alternate translation: “they will not love their own families”
206 3:3 r2uv ἄσπονδοι 1 The term **irreconcilable** means they will not agree to make peace with others and will insist on living in a state of conflict in order to have their own way. Alternate translation: “they will not agree with anyone” or “they will not live in peace with anyone”
207 3:3 ks9y ἀφιλάγαθοι 1 The phrase **not good-loving** could be translated by removing the negative **not** and replacing **loving** with the opposite term “hating.” Alternate translation: “They will hate what is good”
208 3:4 dw5z προπετεῖς 1 The adjective **reckless** conveys the idea of doing things without thinking about the negative things that could happen as a result. Alternate translation: “heedless of consequences”
209 3:4 d6ng rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τετυφωμένοι 1 The expression **puffed up** is a metaphor for being proud and considering oneself better than others. Alternate translation: “haughty” or “conceited” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
210 3:4 p076 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive τετυφωμένοι 1 If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “haughty” or “conceited” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
211 3:5 k5dc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἔχοντες μόρφωσιν εὐσεβείας 1 The expression **a form of** indicates that their **godliness** is not genuine or true. Alternate translation: “appearing to have godliness” or “appearing to honor God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
212 3:5 p077 rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 Paul uses the word **And** to introduce the results of what the previous sentence described. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
213 3:5 p078 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj τούτους ἀποτρέπου 1 The term **these** is a demonstrative adjective that refers to the people who show the ungodly qualities that Paul lists in the previous verses. Paul is using the term as a noun. If your language does not use adjectives in that way, you can add the word “people” in your translation. Alternate translation: “avoid these people” or “avoid such people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
214 3:5 xm1c rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τούτους ἀποτρέπου 1 The expression **turn away** is a metaphor for avoiding someone. Alternate translation: “avoid these people” or “avoid such people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
215 3:6 gu4b rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor αἰχμαλωτίζοντες 1 Here Paul uses the term **captivating** to mean greatly influencing someone by the use of deception. Alternate translation: “manipulating” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
216 3:6 u9m5 γυναικάρια 1 The term **foolish women** refers to women who are spiritually weak and immature. They allow these men into their homes and listen to them because they are weak, idle, and have many sins. Alternate translation: “women who are spiritually weak”
217 3:6 e9ex rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor σεσωρευμένα ἁμαρτίαις 1 Paul speaks of these **sins** as if they were heaped up on the backs of these women. Paul is explaining why these men can easily influence these women. This could mean: (1) these women sin often or even continually. Alternate translation: “who sin often” (2) these women feel terrible guilt because they sin. Alternate translation: “who feel terrible guilt for their sins” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
218 3:6 p079 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive σεσωρευμένα ἁμαρτίαις 1 If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “who sin often” or “who feel terrible guilt for their sins” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
219 3:6 p080 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀγόμενα ἐπιθυμίαις ποικίλαις 1 If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “various desires lead them away” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
220 3:6 izz9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification ἀγόμενα ἐπιθυμίαις ποικίλαις 1 Paul speaks about these **various desires** as if they could physically lead a person away. He means that the women decide to do evil things in order to satisfy their desires. Alternate translation: “they decide to sin in various ways” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
221 3:7 p082 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor μηδέποτε εἰς ἐπίγνωσιν ἀληθείας ἐλθεῖν δυνάμενα 1 Paul speaks of the **knowledge of the truth** as if it were a destination at which people could arrive. Alternate translation: “never able to understand the truth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
222 3:8 p083 ὃν τρόπον δὲ 1 Alternate translation: “Just as”
223 3:8 b8el rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἰάννης καὶ Ἰαμβρῆς 1 **Jannes** and **Jambres** are names of men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
224 3:8 p084 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit Ἰάννης καὶ Ἰαμβρῆς 1 Paul assumes that Timothy will know that he is referring here to the magicians in Pharaoh’s court who tried to duplicate the miracles that Moses was doing. The Bible does not record their names, but according to Jewish tradition their names were Jannes and Jambres. These men wanted to show that Pharaoh did not have to listen to Moses or obey Yahweh. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could identify them more explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jannes and Jambres, Pharaoh’s magicians,” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
225 3:8 p085 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj οὗτοι 1 As in [3:5](../03/05.md), the term **these** is a demonstrative adjective that refers to the people who show the ungodly qualities that Paul has described. Paul is using the term as a noun. If your language does not use adjectives in that way, you can add the word “people” in your translation. Alternate translation: “these people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
226 3:8 p086 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῇ ἀληθείᾳ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **truth** with an adjective. Alternate translation: “what is true” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
227 3:8 g4kk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἄνθρωποι κατεφθαρμένοι τὸν νοῦν 1 Paul uses the word **mind** to refer to the way these evil men think. Alternate translation: “men who cannot think rightly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
228 3:8 p087 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἄνθρωποι κατεφθαρμένοι τὸν νοῦν 1 If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “men who cannot think rightly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
229 3:8 pfh1 ἀδόκιμοι περὶ τὴν πίστιν 1 Paul uses the adjective **unapproved** to convey the idea that these men have been tested regarding how well they trust in Christ and obey him, and they have failed the test because their faith is not real. Alternate translation: “without sincere faith” or “whose faith is not genuine”
230 3:8 sppy rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀδόκιμοι περὶ τὴν πίστιν 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could start a new sentence here and say who does not approve of these men. Alternate translation: “God does approve of these men because they do not have a genuine faith in Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
231 3:9 x9kx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἀλλ’ 1 The word **But** indicates a contrast between this verse and the previous idea from [3:06](../03/06.md) that these men were able to sneak into homes and persuade people to believe wrong things. If you need to make this contrast clear, you could remind your readers of the previous idea here. Alternate translation: “But even though they have persuaded some people to believe wrong things” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
232 3:9 c6xx rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor οὐ προκόψουσιν ἐπὶ πλεῖον 1 Paul uses an expression about physical movement to mean that the false teachers will not continue to have much success among the believers. Alternate translation: “they will not be able to continue teaching falsely” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
233 3:9 mv4j rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ἡ & ἄνοια αὐτῶν ἔκδηλος ἔσται πᾶσιν 1 The word **all** is a generalization. Paul has just said that these men will have a little success in deceiving some people. But ultimately their foolishness will become widely apparent, as happened to Jannes and Jambres, who were publicly discredited when they were not able to equal the powerful miracles of Moses. Alternate translation: “their foolishness will become widely apparent” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
234 3:9 z4fu rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj ἐκείνων 1 The term **those** is a demonstrative adjective that refers to Jannes and Jambres. Paul is using the term as a noun. If your language does not use adjectives in that way, you can supply the names of the two men. Alternate translation: “of Jannes and Jambres” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
235 3:10 vw42 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor σὺ & παρηκολούθησάς 1 Paul speaks of giving close attention to the things he lists in this verse as if one were physically following them as they moved. The idea is that Timothy is giving close attention to these things and imitating them. Alternate translation: “you have observed” or “you have paid close attention to” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
236 3:10 wma6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns μου τῇ διδασκαλίᾳ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **teaching** with a relative clause. Alternate translation: “what I have taught others to do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
237 3:10 lq3v rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῇ ἀγωγῇ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **conduct** with a relative clause. Alternate translation: “how I live my life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
238 3:10 p088 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῇ προθέσει 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **purpose** with a verbal clause. Alternate translation: “what I try to do with my life” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
239 3:10 p089 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῇ πίστει 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **faith** with a relative clause. Alternate translation: “what I believe” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
240 3:10 p091 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῇ μακροθυμίᾳ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **patience** with a relative clause. Alternate translation: “how I am patient with others” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
241 3:10 p090 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῇ ἀγάπῃ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **love** with a relative clause. Alternate translation: “how I love others” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
242 3:10 l4pp rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns τῇ ὑπομονῇ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **endurance** with a relative clause. Alternate translation: “how I endure when I suffer” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
243 3:11 p093 οἵους διωγμοὺς ὑπήνεγκα 1 Paul is reminding Timothy that he knows of the various ways in which Paul suffered and how he endured until God rescued him. Alternate translation: “how I endured various persecutions”
244 3:11 r9vk rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐκ πάντων, με ἐρρύσατο ὁ Κύριος 1 Paul speaks as if God had physically removed him from a situation of danger. Alternate translation: “the Lord preserved me through them all” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
245 3:12 ke7f ζῆν εὐσεβῶς 1 The term **piously** means in an obedient way that honors God. Alternate translation: “to live in a godly way”
246 3:12 xm9l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive διωχθήσονται 1 If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “people will persecute” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
247 3:13 p094 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ἄνθρωποι 1 Here Paul is using the term **men** in a generic sense that can include both men and women. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
248 3:13 xo4q rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys πονηροὶ & ἄνθρωποι καὶ γόητες 1 This is probably a hendiadys, and the **evil men and impostors** are not two groups of people, but one group of people. Alternate translation: “evil people who only pretend to follow Jesus” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
249 3:13 s7f2 γόητες 1 The term **impostors** refers here to a person who wants other people to think he is a true Christian when he is not. Alternate translation: “people who are pretending to be believers”
250 3:13 imc8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor προκόψουσιν ἐπὶ τὸ χεῖρον 1 Paul speaks of evil people and their character as something that moves forward physically, making gradual progress in a direction. Alternate translation: “will become worse and worse” or “will become even more evil” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
251 3:13 p095 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom ἐπὶ τὸ χεῖρον 1 This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “worse and worse” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
252 3:13 eyx5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πλανῶντες καὶ πλανώμενοι 1 The expression **leading astray** uses the image of physically taking a person to a place that he didn’t think he was going to. This is a figurative reference to persuading someone to believe something that is not true. Alternate translation: “teaching lies and believing lies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
253 3:13 p096 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive πλανῶντες καὶ πλανώμενοι 1 If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “teaching lies and believing lies” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
254 3:14 ytg9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor μένε ἐν οἷς ἔμαθες 1 Paul speaks of biblical instruction as if it were a place in which Timothy could stay. Alternate translation: “continue doing what you have learned” or “continue believing what you have learned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
255 3:14 p097 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐπιστώθης 1 If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “are confident about” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
256 3:15 w9l5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification τὰ δυνάμενά σε σοφίσαι 1 Paul speaks of the Scriptures as if they were a teacher who could instruct people and help them become **wise**. It may be convenient in your translation to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “By studying them you can become wise” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
257 3:15 p098 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns εἰς σωτηρίαν διὰ πίστεως τῆς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **salvation** with a verb such as “save.” Alternate translation: “so that you will know enough to trust Christ Jesus to save you” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
258 3:16 s274 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor πᾶσα Γραφὴ θεόπνευστος καὶ 1 The term **God-breathed** uses the image of breathing to indicate that the Scriptures come directly from God through his Spirit. Characteristically in the Bible, the breath of God represents the Spirit of God. Alternate translation: “God produced all Scripture as his Spirit directed people what to write, and it” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
259 3:16 hvr1 πᾶσα Γραφὴ θεόπνευστος 1 By **All Scripture**, Paul is referring to every part of Scripture, which, at that time, was what we know as the Old Testament. If it is confusing to refer to all of the books of the Old Testament with the singular word **Scripture**, you could change it to a plural word as in the UST and make the verbs plural. Alternate translation: “All of the Holy Writings are God-breathed”
260 3:16 uv35 ὠφέλιμος 1 Paul refers to the Scripture as **profitable** to convey the idea that Timothy and all believers will benefit when they use the Scripture to teach, reprove, correct, and train. Alternate translation: “you will benefit from it as you use it” or “it benefits everyone when we use it”
261 3:16 vl2n rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πρὸς ἐλεγμόν 1 Paul instructs Timothy to use the Scriptures as the standard for knowing what is right and wrong and showing people that they are wrong. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **reproof** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “for showing people that they are wrong” or “for helping us to know when we are wrong” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
262 3:16 e5h9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πρὸς ἐπανόρθωσιν 1 Paul instructs Timothy to use the Scriptures as the standard for showing people how to make something right. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **correction** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “for showing people how to make things right” or “for showing us how to fix errors” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
263 3:16 y1hf rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns πρὸς παιδείαν τὴν ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ 1 Paul instructs Timothy to use the Scriptures as the standard for training people how to live lives that are right with God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **righteousness** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “and for training people how to do what is right” or “and for training us to do what is right” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
264 3:17 nb12 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations ὁ τοῦ Θεοῦ ἄνθρωπος 1 Paul is using the word **man** here in a generic sense that includes all believers in God, whether male or female. Of course, Paul also intends for Timothy to apply this to himself. Alternate translation: “the person who serves God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
265 3:17 uu7i ἄρτιος 1 Alternate translation: “fully capable”
266 3:17 p099 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐξηρτισμένος 1 If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “and have everything he needs” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
267 4:intro k2xa 0 # 2 Timothy 4 General Notes\n\n## Structure and formatting\n\n1. Paul gives a solemn charge to Timothy (4:1–8)\n2. Paul tells Timothy how he is doing (4:9–18)\n3. Paul sends personal greetings (4:19–22)\n\n## Special concepts in this chapter\n\n### “I adjure you”\n\nWith these words Paul challenges Timothy in the most serious way possible to do what he is telling him to do. It is a way of commanding Timothy, not by Paul’s own authority, but by the authority that he then refers to, that of God and Jesus Christ. In other words, Paul is saying that God and Jesus Christ are commanding Timothy through Paul.\n\n### Crown\n\nScripture uses the image of a crown to represent different things. In this chapter, Paul describes Christ as awarding a crown to believers as a metaphor for the reward that Christ will give them for having lived rightly on this earth.
268 4:1 eh3x διαμαρτύρομαι 1 The word translated **adjure** is used to place someone under a serious and binding obligation. Think about the words that you use to do this in your language. This could refer to: (1) placing someone under an oath to do something. Alternate translation: “I place you under an oath” or “I hereby obligate you” (2) solemnly commanding someone with great authority. Alternate translation: “I solemnly urge you”
269 4:1 cb15 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 Here the word **before** means “in front of,” that is, “in the presence of.” The implication is that God and Christ Jesus will witness and approve this command or oath. Alternate translation: “in the presence of God and Christ Jesus” or “with God and Christ Jesus as the witnesses” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
270 4:1 u32g rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism ζῶντας καὶ νεκρούς 1 Paul refers to **the living** and **the dead** together to mean all people, whether they are alive at the time of judgment or have died. Alternate translation: “those who are still alive and those who have died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
271 4:1 p100 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj ζῶντας καὶ νεκρούς 1 The terms **living** and **dead** are adjectives that Paul is using as nouns to refer to groups of people. If your language does not use adjectives in that way, you can translate these terms with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “those who are still alive and those who have died” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
272 4:1 lwt2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy καὶ τὴν ἐπιφάνειαν αὐτοῦ, καὶ τὴν βασιλείαν αὐτοῦ 1 Paul refers to Christ’s return by association to the fact that he will appear once again to people on earth when he returns, and he refers to Christ’s rule as king by association to the **kingdom** that he will rule. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “and on Christ’s return and on his rule as king” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
273 4:1 anqh καὶ τὴν ἐπιφάνειαν αὐτοῦ, καὶ τὴν βασιλείαν αὐτοῦ 1 This can be understood in two different ways, depending on if Paul is placing Timothy under an oath or giving Timothy a command. (1) If Paul is placing Timothy under an oath, then he is saying that these are the things that Timothy would be denying if he fails to fulfill the oath. Alternate translation: “with an oath as strong as your desire for Christ’s return and for his rule as king” (2) If Paul is introducing a command in this verse, then Paul is appealing to these things to strengthen his command. Alternate translation: “and as surely as Christ will return and rule as king”
274 4:2 j2z7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 Paul is using the term **word** to refer to the whole message about Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “the Gospel message” or “the Good News” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
275 4:2 zzh4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism εὐκαίρως, ἀκαίρως 1 Paul uses the opposite words **opportunely** and**inopportunely** to say that Timothy should be ready to preach about Jesus when it seems like a good time to do so and also when it does not seem like a good time. He is using the two types of occasions together to indicate all occasions. Alternate translation: “when it is convenient and when it is not convenient” or “at all times” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
276 4:2 g7ax rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἔλεγξον 1 The command to **reprove** implies that the action is directed toward people who have done something wrong and are in need of correction. Alternate translation: “correct those who have sinned” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
277 4:2 p101 ἐπιτίμησον 1 The word **rebuke** involves telling someone that they have done something wrong and warning them not to do it again. Alternate translation: “tell them not to sin”
278 4:2 p102 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys ἐν πάσῃ μακροθυμίᾳ καὶ διδαχῇ 1 Here, **patience and teaching** is a hendiadys, with **patience** modifying **teaching**. Alternate translation: “do these things by teaching very patiently” or “always do these things by teaching patiently” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
279 4:2 g5r0 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν πάσῃ μακροθυμίᾳ καὶ διδαχῇ 1 The implication is that this is how Timothy should preach, reprove, rebuke, and exhort. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “do these things by teaching very patiently” or “always do these things by teaching patiently” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
280 4:2 p103 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole ἐν πάσῃ μακροθυμίᾳ καὶ διδαχῇ 1 Here, **all** could mean: (1) Timothy should always be patient when he teaches. Alternate translation: “always teaching patiently” (2) a generalization for emphasis, meaning that Timothy should be very patient. Alternate translation: “by teaching very patiently” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
281 4:3 jv7a ἔσται & καιρὸς ὅτε 1 Alternate translation: “the time will come when”
282 4:3 u2cc οὐκ ἀνέξονται 1 Alternate translation: “they will no longer listen patiently to”
283 4:3 ilx7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit οὐκ ἀνέξονται 1 The context indicates that **they** means people who are a part of the community of believers. Alternate translation: “some believers will no longer listen patiently to” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
284 4:3 fyl3 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τῆς ὑγιαινούσης διδασκαλίας 1 The expression **healthy teaching** means “correct teaching” by association, since a healthy mind would recognize that correct teaching was reasonable. Alternate translation: “correct teaching” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
285 4:3 e5t2 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor κατὰ τὰς ἰδίας ἐπιθυμίας, ἑαυτοῖς ἐπισωρεύσουσιν διδασκάλους 1 Paul speaks of how people will obtain many teachers as if they were putting them into a heap or pile. They will want many teachers, but not value these teachers for how they live godly lives or how accurately they teach. Alternate translation: “they will gather many teachers for themselves who will teach what they want” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
286 4:3 s375 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom κνηθόμενοι τὴν ἀκοήν 1 Paul speaks of people badly wanting to hear something as if their ears itched and could only be relieved if they found many teachers who would tell them what they wanted to hear. Alternate translation: “because they want to hear it so badly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
287 4:3 p104 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy κνηθόμενοι τὴν ἀκοήν 1 Paul uses the **ear** to mean hearing. Alternate translation: “because they want to hear it so badly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
288 4:4 rh2i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀπὸ μὲν τῆς ἀληθείας τὴν ἀκοὴν ἀποστρέψουσιν 1 Paul speaks about people no longer paying attention as if they were physically turning their ears away so that they could not hear. Alternate translation: “will no longer pay attention to the truth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
289 4:4 p105 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἀπὸ μὲν τῆς ἀληθείας τὴν ἀκοὴν ἀποστρέψουσιν 1 Paul uses the **ear** to mean listening. Listening, in turn, means paying attention. Alternate translation: “will no longer pay attention to the truth” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
290 4:4 xrv7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐπὶ & τοὺς μύθους ἐκτραπήσονται 1 Paul speaks about people starting to pay attention to **myths** as if someone were getting them to wander off in the wrong direction. Alternate translation: “these teachers will get them to pay attention to stories that are not true” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
291 4:4 p106 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐπὶ & τοὺς μύθους ἐκτραπήσονται 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form, and you can state who would do the action. Alternate translation: “these teachers will get them to pay attention to stories that are not true” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
292 4:5 ehz7 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor νῆφε 1 Paul wants his readers to think correctly about everything, and so he speaks as if he wanted them to **be sober** rather than drunk. Alternate translation: “think clearly” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
293 4:5 tv3k εὐαγγελιστοῦ 1 Alternate translation: “of a person who proclaims the good news about Jesus”
294 4:6 p107 ἐγὼ & ἤδη σπένδομαι 1 While Paul speaks of his death as **already** happening, he means that it is an event that will happen soon. Alternate translation: “I will soon be poured out”
295 4:6 sh23 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐγὼ & ἤδη σπένδομαι 1 Paul speaks of himself as if he were wine in a cup that was **being poured out** as a sacrifice to God. Alternate translation: “the sacrifice of my life to God will soon be complete” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
296 4:6 p108 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐγὼ & ἤδη σπένδομαι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you can express this with an active form. Alternate translation: “My life will soon end as a sacrifice to God” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
297 4:6 fb7l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism ὁ καιρὸς τῆς ἀναλύσεώς μου ἐφέστηκεν 1 Paul refers to his death as a **departure**. This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant. Alternate translation: “soon I will die and leave this world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
298 4:7 d9ts rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸν καλὸν ἀγῶνα ἠγώνισμαι 1 Paul speaks of himself as if he has been competing in an athletic contest. Here, **good** could mean: (1) the kind of effort Paul has made. Alternate translation: “I have done my best” (2) Paul has pursued a worthwhile endeavor. Alternate translation: “I have worked hard for what really matters” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
299 4:7 kq83 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὸν δρόμον τετέλεκα 1 Paul speaks of his life of service to God as if he had been running a **race** on foot. Alternate translation: “I have completed what I needed to do” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
300 4:7 vk2p rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τὴν πίστιν τετήρηκα 1 Paul speaks of **the faith**, by which he means his trust in Christ and his obedience to God, as if they were valuable objects that he has kept safe in his possession. This could mean: (1) Paul was faithful to do what God told him to do. Alternate translation: “I have remained faithful in doing my ministry” (2) Paul was faithful to teach the truth. Alternate translation: “I have preserved the teachings from any error” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
301 4:8 ujg5 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἀπόκειταί μοι ὁ τῆς δικαιοσύνης στέφανος 1 If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “God has reserved the crown of righteousness for me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
302 4:8 hg8i rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor τῆς δικαιοσύνης στέφανος 1 Here, the **crown** could: (1) represent the reward that God gives to people who have lived the right way. Alternate translation: “the reward for the righteous” (2) represent righteousness itself. Just as the judge of a race gives a crown to the winner, when Paul finishes his life, God will declare that Paul is righteous. Alternate translation: “the reward that is righteousness” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
303 4:8 dwn6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown στέφανος 1 See how you translated **crown** in [2:5](../02/05.md). The **crown** that Paul is using as an illustration of the future award from God was a wreath made of laurel tree leaves that was given to winners of athletic contests. You can use a word in your language that would refer to a prize for winning a contest. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
304 4:8 n3k8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit ἐν, ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ 1 As in [1:12](../01/12.md), this refers to the **day** when Jesus returns to judge people. Alternate translation: “on the day of judgment” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
305 4:8 uh88 πᾶσιν τοῖς ἠγαπηκόσι τὴν ἐπιφάνειαν αὐτοῦ 1 Alternate translation: “to all those who are looking forward to his return”
306 4:8 p109 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὴν ἐπιφάνειαν αὐτοῦ 1 See how you translated **his appearing** in [4:1](../04/01.md). Paul is referring to Christ’s return by association with the fact that he will appear once again to people on earth when he returns. Alternate translation: “his return” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
307 4:9 t8b7 σπούδασον ἐλθεῖν & ταχέως 1 Alternate translation: “Come … as soon as possible”
308 4:10 e4xx rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Δημᾶς & Κρήσκης & Τίτος 1 **Demas**, **Crescens**, and **Titus** are names of men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
309 4:10 ji2l rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸν νῦν αἰῶνα 1 The expression **the present age** refers to worldly things as opposed to the things of God. Paul refers to these worldly things by association with the present time when people generally desire them, as opposed to the future time when the things of God will be established throughout the earth. Alternate translation: “the temporary comforts of this world” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
310 4:10 u2qb rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis Κρήσκης εἰς Γαλατίαν, Τίτος εἰς Δαλματίαν 1 Here Paul leaves out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. He means that like Demas, **Crescens** and **Titus** have left him. However, he is probably not saying that they did this because they also “loved this present age” like Demas. It is more likely that they are traveling to help the churches. Alternate translation: “Crescens has left me and gone to Galatia, and Titus has left me and gone to Dalmatia” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
311 4:10 gs61 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Γαλατίαν & Δαλματίαν 1 This are the names of parts of the Roman empire. **Galatia** is an official Roman province and **Dalmatia** is an area in the southern part of the province of Illyricum. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
312 4:11 w21u μοι εὔχρηστος εἰς διακονίαν 1 This could mean: (1) Mark is **useful** in helping Paul to take care of his personal needs. Alternate translation: “he can help take care of my needs” (2) Mark is **useful** in helping Paul minister to others, especially by preaching and teaching. Alternate translation: “he is helpful to me in my ministry”
313 4:12 y60r ἀπέστειλα 1 Timothy is at Ephesus when he receives this letter. It may be that Tychicus is the one who carried this letter to Timothy at Ephesus. If so, then Paul is writing from Timothy’s perspective, who would view Paul’s sending of Tychicus as a past event. If this is confusing in your language and you want to include this possibility, you may need to change the tense of the verb to future. Alternate translation: “soon I will be sending”
314 4:13 d5rw rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown φελόνην 1 The term **cloak** refers to a heavy garment worn over clothes. Alternate translation: “coat” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
315 4:13 v9b6 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Κάρπῳ 1 **Carpus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
316 4:13 k6tj rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown τὰ βιβλία 1 The term **books** refers to scrolls. A scroll was a type of book made of a long sheet of papyrus or leather. After writing on a scroll or reading it, people would roll it up using rods on the ends. Alternate translation: “the scrolls” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
317 4:13 e395 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown μάλιστα τὰς μεμβράνας 1 The term **parchments** may refer to a specific type of scroll. Alternate translation: “especially those made from animal skins” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
318 4:14 un4v rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown Ἀλέξανδρος ὁ χαλκεὺς 1 The term **coppersmith** refers to a person who worked with things made of copper and other metals. Alternate translation: “Alexander, who works with metal” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
319 4:14 kv94 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἀλέξανδρος 1 **Alexander** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
320 4:14 wbx4 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἀποδώσει αὐτῷ ὁ Κύριος κατὰ τὰ ἔργα αὐτοῦ 1 Paul speaks of punishment as if it were repayment. Alternate translation: “the Lord will give him the right punishment for what he has done” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
321 4:15 i4aj rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy ἀντέστη τοῖς ἡμετέροις λόγοις 1 The term **words** refers to the message that Paul and Timothy and their co-workers teach. Alternate translation: “he … opposed the message that we teach” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
322 4:16 v847 ἐν τῇ πρώτῃ μου ἀπολογίᾳ 1 Paul is referring to the opening session of his trial. By writing **first**, he is likely indicating that he will have to appear in court again. Alternate translation: “At the opening session of my trial” or “When I first appeared in court and explained my actions”
323 4:16 f2c3 οὐδείς μοι παρεγένετο 1 Paul explains to Timothy that he had to go to court alone, without any supporters. Alternate translation: “no one testified on my behalf”
324 4:16 rm2t rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive μὴ αὐτοῖς λογισθείη 1 If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “May God not hold it against them” or “I pray that God does not punish those believers for deserting me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
325 4:17 t1fw rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ὁ & Κύριός μοι παρέστη 1 Paul is speaking as if **the Lord** had physically **stood** with him. Alternate translation: “the Lord helped me” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
326 4:17 y69m rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἵνα δι’ ἐμοῦ τὸ κήρυγμα πληροφορηθῇ 1 If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. This could mean: (1) at his trial, Paul was able to explain the entire message God had given him to proclaim. Alternate translation: “so that I was able to proclaim all of the Lord’s message” (2) Paul was able to continue proclaiming God’s message right through to this time when he expected to lose his life. Alternate translation: “so that I was able to continue proclaiming the Lord’s message right to the end” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
327 4:17 p113 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole καὶ ἀκούσωσιν πάντα τὰ ἔθνη 1 Here, **all** could be: (1) a figurative generalization. Alternate translation: “so that as many Gentiles as possible could hear it” (2) a reference to all the Gentiles in the court. Alternate translation: “so that all the Gentiles who were there might hear” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
328 4:17 gsr8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor ἐρύσθην ἐκ στόματος λέοντος 1 Paul speaks as if he had been in danger of being killed by a **lion** at his court appearance. He could mean the physical danger of being sentenced to execution, or the spiritual danger of being tempted not to speak boldly for Jesus, or both. It would probably be best to leave both possibilities open in your translation. Alternate translation: “I was rescued from great danger” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
329 4:17 p114 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive ἐρύσθην ἐκ στόματος λέοντος 1 If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “God rescued me from great danger” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
330 4:18 p115 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας τῶν αἰώνων 1 This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “forever and ever” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
331 4:19 n4zc rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy τὸν Ὀνησιφόρου οἶκον 1 See how you translated this phrase in [1:16](../01/16.md). The word **household** refers to **Onesiphorus** and all the people in his family, possibly even his servants. Alternate translation: “Onesiphorus and everyone who lives with him” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
332 4:19 mef8 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ὀνησιφόρου 1 **Onesiphorus** is the name of a man. See how you translated this name in [1:16](../01/16.md). (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
333 4:20 lie9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Ἔραστος & Τρόφιμον 1 **Erastus** and **Trophimus** are the names of men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
334 4:20 wp9h rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Μιλήτῳ 1 **Miletus** is the name of a city to the south of Ephesus. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
335 4:21 cvc7 σπούδασον & ἐλθεῖν 1 Alternate translation: “Do your best to come” or “Try as hard as you can to come”
336 4:21 eh95 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit πρὸ χειμῶνος 1 The implication is that Timothy should try to come to Paul before the cold weather arrives and makes travel difficult or even impossible. If **winter** is the warm season in your area and summer is the cold season, or if your area does not have a cold season but a rainy season, you could use a more general expression. Alternate translation: “before the cold weather makes travel difficult” or “before the weather changes and makes travel difficult” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
337 4:21 z1j9 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis ἀσπάζεταί σε Εὔβουλος, καὶ Πούδης, καὶ Λίνος, καὶ Κλαυδία, καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ 1 Here Paul leaves out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. To make sure that the meaning is clear, you could supply these words. The people listed after Eubulus are also greeting Timothy. Eubulus is not greeting them. Alternate translation: “Eubulus greets you, and so do Pudens, Linus, Claudia, and all the believers here” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
338 4:21 p7px rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Εὔβουλος & Πούδης & Λίνος 1 **Eubulus**, **Pudens**, and **Linus** are the names of three men. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
339 4:21 er77 rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names Κλαυδία 1 **Claudia** is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
340 4:21 mk26 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations οἱ ἀδελφοὶ 1 The word **brothers** means all believers, whether male or female. Alternate translation: “all the believers here” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
341 4:22 tx26 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you ὁ Κύριος μετὰ τοῦ πνεύματός σου 1 Paul ends his letter with a blessing for Timothy. Here, **you** is singular and refers to Timothy. Alternate translation: “I pray that the Lord makes your spirit strong” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
342 4:22 p119 rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche ὁ Κύριος μετὰ τοῦ πνεύματός σου 1 Paul describes Timothy as a whole person by reference to his **spirit**, perhaps because he is wishing particularly for Timothy to receive spiritual strengthening. Alternate translation: “I pray that the Lord makes you strong” or “I pray that the Lord will strengthen you spiritually” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
343 4:22 k85y rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you ἡ χάρις μεθ’ ὑμῶν 1 Paul ends his letter with a second blessing. The **you** here is plural and refers to all of the believers who are with Timothy. Alternate translation: “May grace be with all of you there” (See: [[rc://*/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
344 4:22 p120 ἡ χάρις μεθ’ ὑμῶν 1 If it would be helpful in your language, you could state explicitly who Paul wishes will make this happen. Alternate translation: “May God give grace to all of you”